¶ THE NEW found world, or Antarctike, wherein is contained wondered and strange things, as well of humane creatures, as Beasts, Fishes, Foules, and Serpents, Trees, Plants, Mines of Gold and Silver: garnished with many learned authorities, travailed and written in the French tongue, by that excellent learned man, master ANDREW THEVET.  
And now newly translated into English, wherein is reform the errors of the ancient Cosmographers.  
¶ Imprinted at London, by Henry Bynneman, for Thomas Hacket.  
And are to be sold at his shop in Paul's Church yard, at the sign of the Key.   

¶ To the right honourable Sir Henry Sidney, Knight of the most Noble order of the Garter, Lord Precedent of Wales, and Marches of the same, Lord deputy General of the Queen's majesties Realm of Ireland. Your humble Orator Thomas Hacket wisheth the favour of God, long and happy life, increase of honour, continual health and felicity.  
NOne are more to be commended (right Honourable) than those who were the first inventors and finders out of Arts and Sciences, wherewith mankind is beautified and adorned, without the which gifts he were but naked, barbarous and brutish, yea and a servile creature. It was not for nothing that the elders in times past did so much celebrate the instituters of those things: as Herodotus writeth, that the Egyptians before all other men first found out the year by the course of the Planets, and divided it into twelve months. Diodorus assigned it to the Thebans, the which standeth well with the opinion of Herodotus, because the Thebans be a nation of Egypt. As Numa added to the year january and February, Romulus ordered March, April, and May, Augustus an other part, and so julius Caesar made up the perfect year, as Polidorus Vergilius witnesseth in his book De inventoribus rerum. But how much praise is to be given to such as have invented good laws & statutes for the bridling of the Barbarous and wicked, and for the maintaining and defending of the just? As we read that Isis arriving in Egypt, bridled that Country, and ordained good common wealths. How did the Scicilians honour Ceres, for that she was the first inventor of wheat sowing, with other innumerable? Among all other, none in my judgement is more worthier to be praised, than the first finders out how to make ships and vessels navigable for the sea. Strabo writeth that Minos king of Crete, had the first rule of the sea. But Diodorus saith, that Neptunus had the Empire of it afore him, for he invented the feat in rowing of boats, and made a navy, and was made Admiral of it by his father Saturnus, and Pliny reporteth that King Erichthas devised boats first, and rowed in them on the Red sea. Some say they were ordained by the Trojans in the narrow seas called Hellespontus: some think they were invented in the English sea. Danus as some writ, was the first that used any ship when he sailed out of Egypt into Grece. But for more assurance, what so ever their opinions be, as touching the beginning hereof, (as we read in the holy scripture) Noah was the first inventor or maker thereof, before the flood. The ingenious industry of man hath brought many things to a notable and good perfection, as well in Cosmography and Navigation, as in any other art or science: for no doubt, (as it appeareth by this travail or work of Cosmography & such like,) the old ancient writers, as Ptholomeus and others, were deceived, in that they judged this New found World, or the West part to be unhabitable. How much are they to be praised, that for their Country sake refuse no imminent peril, leaving the Pleasant bed of Delicacy, and the seat or cradle of Sensuality, their lands and goods, their Wives and children, which in deed, are dearest unto them, to abandon themselves and their sweetest lives to the favour of the boisterous seas, to the hap of the unconstant winds, to the chair of fortune, and finally to a thousand imminent evils, only to increase the fame and good renown of their country. Among the which I might rehearse, that this most noble signory and territory of England hath of late years got the fame and renown, that it hath had in times past, by Navigation lately attempted by many and sundry of our countrymen, (God grant them still to go forward and increase in those and such like enterprises, to God's glory and the benefit of this common Wealth.) But alas, the greater number of men are given to idleness or sensuality, as if I might say now: where are the Tiberians, the Metelli, the Emili, the Marij and the Catones? Among the number of a great many, and in the midst of abundance and pleasure, we meditate nothing else but only security, almost abhorring to hear the name of travel or pain, by which it may be said to us, in a manner, as it was said of Hannibal, after the battle Trasimenius or Cannas, that his wintering at Capua in pleasure and delicacy was more noisome and hurtful unto him, than either of the battles before named. We read after that Alexander had vanquished almost the third part of the world, having overthrown the mighty King Porrus one of the strongest Kings of India, with whom (as rehearseth plutarch in the life of Alexander) he among all other had most to do, having also subdued unto him the mighty King Darius, hearing the Philosopher Anaxagoras, in a certain lecture, holding this opinion, that there were Worlds out of number, therewith he burst out suddenly into weeping, his friends moved with this sight, demanded whether any mishap had fallen unto him meet to weep for or no, he said these words: Oh, have I not good cause to weep trow ye, that there being world's innumerable, I am not yet come to be full Lord of one? of whom I gather the inceasable stomach, glory and renown, how little he esteemed himself and his Kingdoms, without the name of victorious and mighty. Among and above all (as affirmeth Plutarch) he esteemed the Ilia● of Homer, because in the same was declared the excellent prows of Achilles. Thus (right honourable) we see, the valiant and curagious personages of the world have brought to pass many excellent enterprises, so that their fame shall never die, achieved as well by sea as by land, as this worthy traveler Andrew Thevit, in this his Navigation of the New found World, which I have dedicated unto your honour, as a token of my good will, the which after your great & weighty affairs, it may please you to use, and to pardon this my rash enterprise, wherein I am enboldned to prefer this towards you, as a thing very rare, and of such exquisite doing, as before this time the like hath not been heard of, whose annotations therein be such, as no Cosmographers hereto before have done the like: desiring your honour so to accept the same, as the good will of him that gave it. And thus I commit your good Lordship to the tuition of God, who preserve you and all yours in health and eternal felicity. Amen.  
Your Lordship's most humble, Thomas Hacket.   

¶ An Admonition to the Reader.  
I Doubt not gentle Reader, but that the description of this present history will make thee to wonder, as well because of the variety of things that herein then mayst Read, as also of many others which at the first will seem unto thee rather monstrous than natural. But after that thou hast soberly weighed & considered the great effects of our mother dame nature, I do surely believe that such admirations shall have no more place in thee. Also let it not seem to thee strange the setting forth of many strange trees, as Palm trees and others, with beasts of the field and fowls of the Air, the which are clean contrary to the setting forth of our Cosmographers and ancient writers, who for because that they have not seen the places, and for the small experience and knowledge that they had, did greatly err. But if thou herein stand in doubt, than those that have traveled thither, and those Indians that were brought from thence, can affirm all things herein contained to be true. Furthermore if that there be here in this book any words that seem to thee rude or il placed, thou shalt therefore accuse the fever and death, (the fever) which hath so kept or cleaned to the Author since his return home, that he had no leisure to peruse his book before that it came to the Printer, being provoked to deliver it at the commandment of the Cardinal of Sens: and death which happened to Ambrose de la port, a good student and well seen in the French tongue, who had taken upon him the whole charge of this present book. Notwithstanding gentle Readers, our good will herein hath not been wanting, only wishing for recompense, that it may be agreeable to thee. Farewell.   


In praise of the Author.  
THe farthest scope of heaven and earth also,  
The subtle streams enclosed in the ground,  
The mighty Mines of Metals that do grow  
In lurking veins, that hidden are profound,  
The Crystal pearl, the Diamond so fair,  
The floating fish of divers kinds of hue,  
Of divers soils, to which thou mayst repair,  
Of other lands that yet to us be new,  
Hath Thevet here through travel his and pain,  
Educted forth, to satisfy thy mind,  
Who well deserves thy thankful speech to gain,  
As single eye of judgement thine shall find.  
Therefore as craves this his deserved style,  
So of his work let judgement thine proceed,  
Who of good will this libel did compile,  
To further thee, that took the same to read.   

IN THEVETUM NOVI ORBIS peragratorem & descriptorem, Io. Auratus, literarum Graecarum Regius professor.  
AVre tenus, sed non pedibus, nec navibus ullis,  
Plurimus & terras, mensus & est maria  
Multa tamen non nota maris terraequeve relicta  
His loca, nec certis testificata notis.  
At maria & terras pariter vagus iste Thevetus  
Et visu, & mensus navibus & pedibus.  
Pignora certa refert longarum haec scriptae viarum,  
Ignotiqueve orbis cursor & author adest.  
Vix quae audita alijs, subiecta fidelibus edit  
Hic oculis, terra sospes ab Antipodum.  
Tantum alijs hic Cosmograephis Cosmographus anteit,  
Auditu quanto certior est oculus.  
Vale in Christo.    

¶ To my Lord the Right reverend Cardinal of Sens, keeper of the great seals of France: Andrew Thevet wisheth peace and felicity.  
MY good Lord, being sufficiently informed, (how greatly) after the most commendable and no less great and painful exercise, to the which it pleased the King to employ and bestow your prudency (& forcasting wit) you take pleasure not only to read, but also to see and taaste, some fair History, the which among so many cares, might recreate your spirit and give it a delectable liberty of his most grave and careful business. I have boldened myself to present unto you this my discourse of a longer far voyage made into India America, otherwise by us named France Antarctic, being partly peopled and partly discovered by our Pilots, a land which at this day may be called the fourth part of the world, not only by the withdrawings of our orisons, as by the diversity of nature of bests, and temperateness of the air of the country. Also for that none heretofore hath sought it out, supposing all Cosmographers (yea persuading with themselves) that the world was lymitted in that which the elders to us had showed. And although that this work seemeth to me of itself to be very little to be offered before the eyes of your Lordship, notwithstanding, the greatness of your name will extol the baseness of my work: seeing also that I am assured well of your wont clemency, virtue, and desire to hear wonderful things, that easily you will judge how that my intention doth tend to no other end but only to make you understand, that I have no other delight than to offer unto you that thing, of the which you may draw and receive some contentation, and wherein sometimes, you shallbe eased of the great and troublesome affairs which are offered in this degree and office, that you hold. For there is no mind or spirit be it never so constant, but that sometimes is troubled with the quick dispatch, grave and weighty affairs of a common weal. Therefore it is needful sometimes to ordain as the learned Physician doth to a patient or sick body, some change of meats to recreate the appetite of them which by their infirmity and sickness, cannot broke nor taste one kind of meat continually, be it never so pleasant.  
This therefore is the cause why the ancient Philosophers and others did oftentimes withdraw themselves from being wrapped in or charged with the public affairs. As also the great Orator Cicero witnesseth to have absented himself many times from the Senate of Rome, (to the great displeasure of the citizens) for to remain in his countryhouse to be delighted in the pleasant and Harmonical melody of the birds. Seeing then that among ours, as he among the Romans, for your singular erudition, prudency, and eloquence, you are as chief and principal minister of the triumphant common weal of France: and such a one as describeth Plato in his common weal, that is to know, great Lord, and a lover of virtue and science, therefore it is not without reason to imitate and follow him in this point. Even so (my good Lord) as returning all weak and weary of so long a voyage, I was by you first of your grace received and welcomed home, which gave me to understand and know, that you are the singular patron of virtue and of all those, that follow it also to my judgement, I think I could not direct this my little labour to a better than to you, the which if it please you to receive so benignly as with a good & affectioned will I do present and direct it, and also to read and peruse it, you shall find in my opinion wherein to recreate your spirits, and to hold me yours for ever. Although that already for many causes I feel myself greatly bound and held to do most humble and obedient service to your lordship: to whom I beseech the creator to give all good luck and prosperity.   

¶ A Preface to the Reader.  
COnsidering with myself how much the long experience of things, & faithful observation of many countries and nations, also their orders and manner of life, bringeth or causeth perfection to man, although there were no exercise more commendable by the which a man may sufficiently deck his spirit with all kind of Heroical virtue and science: beside my first & formal Navigation into the country of Levant, in Grecia, in Turkey, egypt, and Arabia, the which in times paste I have put to light, I have again under the protection and safeguard of the great governor of the universal world, seeing it hath pleased him to show me so much favour being left to the discretion and mercy of one of the most unconstant Elements, & least assured that is among the rest, with small vessels of wood so frail that many times there was more hope of death than of life, for to sail toward the Pole Antarctic, the which was never discovered nor found out by the elders in times past, as it appeareth by the writings of Ptolomeus and others, also ours of Septentrion, to the Equinoctial, and therefore it was thought to be unhabited. And we sailed so long that at the last we came to India America, about the Capricorn, a main land of good temperateness and inhabited, as we will particularly & more at large hereafter declare, the which I have taken in hand at the instant request of many great personages, of whom the gests more than Heroical & high enterprises celebrated by the Histories, cause them to live for ever in perpetual honour and immortal glory. What hath provoked the great Poet Homer so virtuously to celebrate in his writings Ulysses, but only his long peregrination and far travel that he made in diverse places, with the experience of many things aswell by sea as by land after the spoil of Troy? What moved Virgil to write so worthily of the Trojan Aeneas although that he according to the writing of some Historiographers had most traitorously betrayed his native country in to the hands of his enemies, but only for that he had virtuously resisted the fury of the raging waves, and other inconveniences of the sea, he had seen & endured many sharp showers, and finally he came into Italy? Even so as the sovereign creator hath made man of two substances the one differing or exceeding the other, the one elementary & corruptible, the other celestial; divine and immortal. Also he hath put all things in his subjection, that is contained under the scope or circuit of the Firmament, to the end that he might know asmuch as to him was necessary for to attain to the sovereign gift, leaving him nevertheless some difficulty & variety of exercise. Man then although that he be a creature marvelously accomplished, yet he is nevertheless an instrument of virtuous acts, of the which God is the original, so that he may elect such an instrument as pleaseth him for to execute his pleasure, be it by sea or by land. But it may so chance as it is commonly seen come to pass, that some under this pretexitie make it a custom to abuse the workemaster by an avarice and an unsatiable appetite of some particular and temporal appetite, ieoparding themselves undiscreetly & as wickedly, (as Horace in his epistles doth manifestly show) that he is worthy of praise, that for the beautifiing and eluminating of his spirit, & in the favour of the common wealth doth willingly offer and put forth himself. This rule or mean Socrates the wise Philosopher knew how to practise, and after him Plato his disciple, (both the which) not only contented to have traveled and made voyages into strange countries for to attain to the full perfection & knowledge of Philosophy, but also to declare it openly without hope of any reward or recompense. Did not Cicero send his son Mark to Athens? partly for to hear Cratippus, and of him to learn Philosophy, and partly also for to learn the manners and living of the citizens of Athens. Lysander being elected for his magnanimity & worthiness governor over the Lacedæmonians hath so worthily achieved so many fair enterprises against Alcibiades, a man prewe and valiant, and Antiochus his Lieutenant on the sea, that what loss or detriment so ever did chance, his heart and manly courage did never fail him, but pursued his enemy by sea & by land, so that in the end he brought Athens to his obedience. Themistocles, not less expert in the feat of war than in Philosophy, for to show what a fervent desire he had to jeopardy his life for the liberty of his country, persuaded the Athenians, that the silver that was gathered in the mines the which they were wont to distribute to the people, was turned and bestowed to furnish and make ships and galleys against Xerxes, who for that he had partly distressed him, and almost put to flight, falling to appointment after this happy victory against the order of an enemy, made him present with three of the best Cities of his Empire. What hath caused Seleucus Nicanor, the Emperor Augustus Cesar, and many Princes and noble men to bear in their pendens and standards the Dolphin and the anchor, but only to give instruction to all their posterity, that Navigation is the first and of all others the most virtuous. Here therefore without any long discourse is an example of navigation: as all things the more excellent they are, the more difficile or hard is the way to attain to them, as after the experience Aristotle witnesseth, speaking of virtue. And that the navigation is always followed with peril, as a body is with his shadow, the which in times past was showed by Anacharsis the Philosopher, who after he had demanded of what quantity or thickness were the planks or side of a ship: it was answered, not above four fingers: so much (said he) is the life of him from death that saileth with ships on the water. Now gentle Reader in that I have alleged so many excellent personages, it is not to compare, much less to think myself equal to them, but I am persuaded that the great power of Alexander hath not letted his successors to attempt yea the very extremity of fortune. Also the deep knowledge of Plato did nothing at all fear or abash Aristotle, but that at his own pleasure he hath treated of Philosophy. For this intent therefore not to be found idle and slack among others, no more than Diogenes was among the Athenians, I have thought good to set out in writing many notable things that I have diligently observed in my Navigation between the South and the West, that is to wit, the situation and disposition of places, in what climate, zone or paralegie it be, aswell of the sea costs, Islands, and main land, the temperateness of the air, the form and manner of living of the inhabitants, the form and property of beasts of the earth and of the sea, also of trees and roots with their fruits, mines and precious stones, showing it lively and truly as near as is possible. As touching the rest I would think myself happy if that it would please you to accept and receive this my little labour with as willing a heart as I do present it: as for the rest I am assured that it will be agreeable if the Reader think well and way in his mind the long and dangerous peregrination that I have taken in hand, for to see with the eye & to bring to light those things most memorial that I cold note and gather together, as hereafter shallbe seen.   

The first Chapter. How the Author took shipping.  
ALthough that the firmament and all things that are contained under the Moon, even to the scope of the earth, seem as the verity is, to have been made for man, 
All things have been made for man.  yet nevertheless it is so that dame Nature mother of all things, hath been, and is always such a one, that she hath preserved and kept hid within, the things that are most precious and excellentest of her work, yea she hath remised herself, contrary to things artificial, the most expertest workman that ever was, were it Appelles or Phidias, 
A difference of Art and of Nature.  even so as in the outward show remaineth the painting, graving or decking of the vessel or statue, and within it remaineth altogether rude and unpollished. But in nature we see the contrary. Let us first take example by the human body. All the art and excellency of nature is hidden within: also of all other natural bodies, the exterior or outward part is nothing in comparison if that of the interior part it taketh not his perfection. The earth showeth outwardly a sorrowful and heavy face, being for the most part covered with stones, thorns and thistles, or such like: but if the husbandman mind to open it with the plough, he shall find this virtue so excellent, ready to bring him forth abundance, and to recompense him a thousand fold. Also the virtue of the root & of the plant being without a hard bark sometimes single & sometimes double, & that part of the fruit that is most precious, wherein the virtue to bring forth his like, is hid within, as in the surest place or belly of the said fruit. Even as the labourer or husbandman having tilled the earth, receiveth thereby great profit and advantage: 
How Navigation profiteth.  others not contented only to see the waters, would in like case sound them by the way of this noble Navigation with ships and vessels, and for because that thereby they have found & gathered inestimable riches, that which is not without reason, seeing all things were made for man, the Navigation is become by little & little so frequented and followed of men, that many not continually remaining in unconstant islands, have in the end aborded the main land good and fruitful, the which before the experience was not thought, neither according to the opinion of our elders. 
The cause of the Author's Navigation.  Therefore the principal cause of our Navigation was for that Mounsieur de Villegagnon, knight of Malta a very expert gentleman as well in Navigation as in other honest & comely affairs, having with more deliberation received the King's commandment, & for that he was sufficiently informed of my voyage made into the country of Levant, and the good & perfect knowledge that I had in Navigation, did most instantly request me, yea under the Authority of the King my sovereign Lord & Prince, to whom I own all honour & obedience, charging and commanding me to assist him in the accomplishing of his enterprise, the which I freely granted, as well for the obedience that I will give to my natural Prince according to my capacity, as also for the honesty of the thing, although it was painful. 
How the Author took shipping for to sail to India America.  And therefore the sixth day of May 1555. after that the said Mounsieur de Villegagnon had given order for the rigging and trimming of his ships, for munitions & other things of war, but with much greater difficulty than to an Army marching on the land, and to the quality of his men of all estates, gentlemen, soldiers, and divers artificers: to be short, all things being made ready and prepared in as good order as might be, the time being come for us to take shipping, 
Why it was called new Haven.  at new Haven a port town (the cause why it was so named I will show before passing further) being so named to my judgement of this word that signifieth sea or strait, or if you say Haven, ab hauriendis aquis, lying in Normandy, whereas forsaking the land we hoist sail, sailing upon that great sea by good right named Ocean, because of his raging, of this Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 as some judge, being wholly under the power and mercy of the wind and waves. I know well that in times past, according to the superstitious Religion of the Gentiles, many made their Vows, Prayers, and Sacrifices, to divers Gods, 
The superstition of the elders before they would go on the water.  according as their necessity did show, then among those that would go on the water some before hand would cast some piece of money therein as a present or offering for to cause the Gods of the sea to be favourable and to appease their Ire. Others attributing some divinity to the winds, thought to appease them by strange ceremonies. As we find the Calabrians to have done to Lapix, a wind so named: likewise the Thurins and Pamphiliens to certain others. Also we read in Aeneidos in Virgil, if it be worthy of credence, that notwithstanding the importunate prayer of juno to Aeolus King of winds, the miserable Trojan remained on the sea, and the quarrel of the Gods that did follow. By this we may evidently know the error and abuse, with the which the Antiquity was blinded, being an erroneous and damnable opinion, attributing to one of the least creatures and under the power of man, that which appertaineth to the only Creator, to whom I cannot sufficiently give praise in this place for his favour showed to us, in delivering us out of such blinded ignorance. And for my part, for that of his only grace he hath so favoured our voyage, that giving us a good full wind, we have safely and peaceably passed the straits, and from thence to the Canaries, islands distant from the equinoctial .27. degrees, and from our France five hundredth leagues or there about. Now for many reasons I thought good to begin this my discourse at our embarkment, and shipping, as by a more certain and sure mean, the which being done, I think loving Reader, if that you take pleasure to read it, I doubt not but to guide you from point to point, and from place to place, even from the beginning unto the end, as right as is possible, observing the longitude and latitude of countries. Nevertheless whereas I have not used such form and mean, as the thing and your needful judgement doth deserve, I beseech you to hold me excused, considering that it is very hard for one man alone, without the favour and maintenance of some Prince or great Lord, for to sail and discover far countries, observing the things singular, nor to execute great enterprises, although that of himself he might. And to my remembrance Aristotle agreeth well to this purpose, that it is unpossible and very hard that he should do any thing of great excellency and worthy of praise, when the mean, that is to say riches, wanteth, knowing that the life of man is short and subject to a thousand fortunes and adversities.   

Of the straight anciently named Calpe, and now Gibaltary. Cap. ij.  
COasting Spain on the left hand, with a calm and favourable wind, we came over against Gibaltar, not striking our sail, nor casting anchor very near, for many causes. In that which place we stayed certain days. This straight is on the borders of Spain, dividing Europe with Africa, as Constantinople doth Europe and Asia. Many think this to be the original of our sea Meditareum, as if the great sea being to full, should by this place pour out upon the earth, of the which writeth Aristotle in his book of the World in this manner: the Ocean that of all sides doth compass us toward the west near to the columns or pillars of Hercules, 
Islands and other singularities of Gibaltar.  doth pour out by the earth into our sea as in a port or haven by a narrow strait: near to this strait are two islands near one to the other, inhabited with slaves and others, the which labour to make salt, and therefore there is good trade and traffic: of these Islands the one is southward and the greatest made in manner of a triangle, if that ye behold it from far, named by the elders Ebusus, 
Ebusus. jeniza.  and by the modernesse jeniza, the other is toward the north and named Frumentaria, and for to sail thither it is very dangerous, 
Frumentaria.  because of certain rocks that are there, with other inconveniences. Furthermore there entereth diverse navigable Rivers that bringeth great riches, as one named Malue, separating Mauritania from Cesariensia, 
Malue. Sala.  another yet named Sala, taking his spring in Mountain Dure, the which travessing the Kingdom of Fes, divideth in form of this Greek letter Δ and then runneth into this straight: likewise of many others the which at this time I omit: this much I will say by the way, that this strait passeth over the coast of Africa to the troppike of Cancer, where as the sea doth very little ebb and flow, but in those parts so soon as one draweth near to this great flood Niger, 11. degrees from the line, the course of this River is not perceived. In this strait of the sea Meditareum, there be two Mountains of a wonderful height, one on the cost or side of Africa, in times passed named Calpe, and now Gibaltar, the other Abyle, the which both together are called the Colunnes, 
divers opinions of the erection of the pillars of Hercules.  or pillars of Hercules, for that according to some writers he divided them in twain that before was but one mountain named Briarei: and there returning into Grecia by this strait finished and ended his labours, esteeming and thinking that he could pass no further, because of the Amplitude and spreading of the sea, which extended even to his orison & end of his sight. Others do affirm that the said Hercules for that he would leave a memorial of his happy conquests, caused there to be erected two columns or pillars of a marvelous height on the cost of Europe. 
The manner & custom of noble and valiant men in times passed.  For the old & ancient custom hath been that the Noble & great Lords, did rear & set up a pillar or column, in that place whereas they did finish their voyages & high enterprises, or else at their tombs or sepulturs, thereby to show and manifest their might & famous acts above others. As we read of Alexander which did leave certain marks in Asia the great, whereas he had been. For the like cause the like was erected at Rhodes. As much may be said of Mausolia numbered among the seven wonders of the world, made & edified by Artemisia in the honour & for the love that she bore to her husband: the like of the Pyramids of Memphis, under that which are embalmed the Kings of egypt. Furthermore at the entry of the great sea, julius Caesar reared up a high pillar of white marble. And for because that many have been of this name of Hercules, we will say with Arian the Historiographer, 
What Hercules it was of whom are named the columns Tartesse and ancient City of Africa.  this Hercules to be he, that the Tyriens have celebrated, for because that they have edified Tartesse on the borders of Spain whereas are the pillars of the which we have spoken, and there is consecrated to him a temple according to the manner of the phoenicians, with such sacrifices and ceremonies as was used in times passed. Also it hath been named the place of Hercules. This strait at this day is the refuge and succour of thieves, pirates and rovers on the sea, as Turks, moors and Barbarians, enemies of our Christian Religion, 
Gibaltar a place of Traffic from Europe to Africa.  who lurking and floating there with their Galleys and barks, rob and spoil merchants that come to trade as well of Africa and Spain as of France, England and other places, and that which is more to be lamented, the captivity of divers Christians whom they use most cruelly, yea worse than brute beasts in all their affairs, beside the loss of souls in denying their Christendom because of their horrible and dreadful torments.   

Of Africa generally. Chapter .3.  
Sailing beyond this strait, 
Cap. de canti.  for that we had costed the country of Africa the space of eight days, on the left hand even right to the Cape of Canti being distant from the Equinoctial .33. degrees, we will write thereof generally. Africa as Ptolomeus writeth, 
The fourth part of the world as some writers affirm the opinion of this word Africa.  is one of the third parts of the world, or else the fourth, according as certain writers have affirmed that have written sine, tchat by navigations many countries, in times past being unknown, have been discovered, as India America of the which we pretend to write, named as joseph witnesseth Africa of Affer, who as we read in the Greek and Latin Histories, for that he overcame it, reigned himself & named it after his own name, for before it was called Libya as some think of this Greek word: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the which signifieth the South wind that there is frequented and familiar, or of Lybs that reigned, or else Africa hath been named of this article A, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 that signifieth cold, and before called Hisperia. As touching his lying, 
The situation of Africa.  it beginneth truly at the west Atlantike and endeth in the strait of Arabia or at the sea of egypt as Apian witnesseth, as in like case in few words Aristotle doth very well write. Others make it to begin at Nill towards the North, at the sea Meditareum: furthermore Africa hath been called as josephus writeth in the Antiquities of India, all that is comprehended on the one side from the North sea or Meditareum, even to the West Meridional, nevertheless separated in twain, old and new, the new beginneth at the hills of the Moon, having his head at the Cape of good hope in the South sea .35. degrees above the line, so that it containeth of latitude .25. degrees. As touching the old, it is divided in four provinces, the first is Barbaria, containing Mauritania, Cyrenia, and Cesariensia, there the people be very black. In times past this country was little inhabited, but now much more: also the diverse kinds of people remaining in this country with the diversity of manners and of their Religion, the knowledge of which would have made both a long voyage and also a large volume. Ptolomeus hath made no mention of the exterior part toward the South, for because that it was not found out nor discovered in his tyme. Many have described it more at large, as Pliny, Mela, Strabo, Apian, and others, and therefore I will not stand therein.  
This Religion, as Herodian writeth, is fruitful, and well peopled with people of diverse sorts and manners of living. 
Pillars of stone where as are writings, of the phoenicians.  Also the phoenicians in times past came to dwell in Africa, as it is seen by that which is written in the Phenician tongue in certain pillars of stone that as yet are to be seen in the town of Ting, called at this day Thamar, belonging to the King of Portugal. As touching their manners even so as is the temperateness of the air according to the diversity of places, also the people themselves do cause variety of temperance, and by following of manners for the Sympathy that the soul hath with the body, as Galian showeth in the book that he hath written. Likewise we see in Europia, in divers Kingdoms, the variety of manners and customs, the Africans in general are crafty, 
The manners & Religion of the Africans.  as the Syrines covetous, the Sicilians willy, and the Asians voluptuous. There is also difference in Religions: some worship after an other manner, some are Mahometistes, other some are Christians after a very strange manner contrary to us. And as for brute beasts, there are divers kinds. Aristotle saith that the beasts in Asia are very cruel, and in Africa monstrous. For the scarcity of water many beasts of divers kinds are constrained to assemble where as there is any water to be had, & there oftentimes they couple together, and thereby engendereth the diversity of strange and monstrous beasts, 
The cause why there are in Africa so many strange kind of beasts  the which causeth this argument and proverb, that Africa always bringeth forth some new thing. This proverb is common among the Romans, for that they made thither many vayages, having the Dominion of it of a long time, as Scipio Africanus saith, they always brought from thence some strange thing, which seemed to engender a rebuke or shame to their city and common weal.   

The fourth Chapter treateth of Africa particularly.  
Now as concerning that part of Africa the which we have coasted towards the West, as Mauritania, 
Barharia part of Africa and why it was so called.  and Barbaria, so named because of the diversity and strange manner of the inhabitants, it is inhabited with Turks, moors, and others borne in the country, true it is that in some places it is unhabited, and as desert as well for the extreme heat that maketh them to go naked saving only their privy parts, as also for the sterility and barrenness of some places being full of Spiders, and for the quantity of wild beasts, as Lions, Tigers, Dragons, Leopards, Panthers, and others unknown, the which causeth and constraineth the people of that country to go in bands and companies to their affairs and trades, garnished with bows and arrows, & with other weapons, for their defence. But if by adventure they be suddenly beset with these wild beasts, being but a small company when that they go a fishing or otherwise, they flee to the sea, casting themselves in, & so save themselves by swimming, in the which they are well exercised & accustomed. The others being not so swift in running, or not having the knowledge to swim, climb up into trees, and by this mean they evitate or eschew the danger of those beasts. Ye must also note that the people of the country die more by the ravishment of wild beasts than by natural death: and this is from Gibaltar to the Capuerd. They keep the cursed and damnable law of Mahomet, 
The Religion & ceremonies of the barbariens.  yea more superstitiously than the natural Turks. Before they make their prayer in their temples, they wash wholly their bodies, thinking thereby they purge their soul as well as the body by this outward washing and ceremony with a corruptible element, and their prayer is made four times a day, as I have seen the Turks do at Constantinople. 
In Mecha the sepulture of Mahomet: the voyage of the Turks to Mecha.  In times past when that the Pagans had first received this damnable Religion, they were constrained once in their time to make a voyage to Mecha, where as their gentle Prophet is buried, otherwise they had no hope of the rewards or benefits that to them were promised, the which things the Turks observe at this day, and they assemble for to accomplish this voyage with all kind of munitions and attilery, as though they would go a warfare, for fear of the invasions of the Arabians that keep the mountains in certain places. What assemblies I have seen being in Cairea, with the magnificence and triumphs that there is made. And yet this is more curiously and straightly observed among the moors of Africa and other Mahometists so blinded and obstinate are they, the which hath given me occasion to speak in this place of the Turks and of their voyage afore they take in hand the war or any thing else of weight or importance. And when that principally the mean is taken from them to make this voyage, they sacrifice some wild or tame beast, as they chance to meet, which they call as well in their language as in Arabike, Corban, which is as much to say as present or offering, the which abuse is not used among the Turks of Levant, neither in Constantinople. They have certain Priests that are the greatest deceivers of the world, they make the common sort believe & understand, that they know the secrets of God and of their Prophet that speaketh many times to them. Furthermore they use a strange manner of writing, and do attribute the first use of writing before all other nations. To the which the Egyptians will never accord to whom the most part of those that have treated of Antiquities, give the first invention of writing with the representing by certain figures the cogitations and thoughts of the mind. And to this purpose writeth Tacitus in this manner: 
The Egyptians were the first that invented writing and letters.  the Egyptians were the first that represented and manifested the conception of the mind by figures of beasts, graving upon stones for the memorial of men, the things that happened and were done in times past. Likewise they say that they are the first inventors of letters. And this invention, as it is found by writing, was brought into Grecia by the phoenicians, that then ruled on the sea, being reputed to their great glory as the first, finders out of that which they had learned of the Egyptians.  
The men in this part on the coast of Europe, use to noint their joints with Oil, of the which they have great plenty, before they take in hand any great exercise: for all soft and pliable things are not easy to break, they principally make war with the spaniards on their borders, partly for religion & partly for other causes. It is true that the Portugeses of late time have overcome certain places in Barbaria, 
The holy Cross a town in Barbary.  and edified towns and Castles, and planted our Religion, specially one fair town named the holy Cross, for that they arrived & stayed there the same day, & it is at the foot of a fair mountain. But within this two years the wicked people of the country being assembled together, have thrown down from the said mountain so many great stones, that they had pulled out thereof, that in the end the poor Portugeses were constrained to forsake the place, & there is always such enmity or hatred among them, that they trade and traffic together their Sugar, Oil, rice, Leather and other merchandise by leaving of pledges and hostages. They have quantity of good fruits, as Oranges, Lemonds, Citrons, Pomegarneds, the which they eat for want of better meat, and Rice in stead of Wheat: also they drink Oils, as we do Wine. They live many years, more to my judgement because of the sobriety they use, than otherwise.   

Of the fortunate Islands now called the Canaries. Cap. 5.  

How the Fortunate Islands lie now named the Canaries.  Leaving Barbaria on the left hand, having always the wind favourable, we knew by our compass how near we were to the fortunate Islands, lying on the borders of Mauritania toward the west, being so named by our elders, because of the good temperatnesse of the air, 
Why they were named of our elders the Fortunate Islands.  & frutfulnesse of the same. Now the first day of September in the foresaid year, about six of the clock in the morning, we had sight of one of these islands, because of the height of a great Hill, of the which we will speak more largely and particularly hereafter. These Islands as some do affirm are ten in number, 
The number of these islands.  of which there are three that the Authors make no mention of, for that they are unhabited, the other seven, which are named, Tenerif the Isle of iron, Gomeria, and the great Island, properly called Canaria, are distant from the Equinoctial .27. degrees, the other three, Forteventuria, Palma, and Lencelota, are .28. degrees, so that by this ye may see, that from the first to the last, is a degree, the which is .17. Leagues and a half, reckoning from the North to the South, according to the opinion of Pillotes. But without further talk, he that would find out by the degrees of the firmament the quantity of leagues, and stades, that the earth doth contain, and what proportion there is from league to degree (the which ought to be observed of him that will write of countries as a true Cosmographer) let him read Ptolomeus, the which treateth thereof at large in his Cosmography. 
Ca 3.4.5. & 6.  Among these islands there is none of them, but the greatest that is named Canaria, because of the multitude of great Dogs that there are nourished, as Pliny showeth, and many others after him, that say as yet, that juba bore away twain.  
But now they are all named the Canaries without any distinction, for this only reason before showed. 
Why the fortunate Islands are now named the Canaries.  But in my opinion I think they were named Canaries, for the abundance of Canes and wild reeds that grow on the sea brink: as for the Canes or reeds that bear Sugar, the Spaniards have planted a great many, since the time that they have there inhabited, but there did inhabit brutish & Barbarous men before that there were any Dogs, the which standeth by good reason, for I know well by experience, that in all the countries and Indies that have been discovered and found out of late days, they had never knowledge of dog or cat, as hereafter shall be showed. Yet I know well that the Portugeses have brought thither some, and kept them for to hunt after wild beasts. Pliny, therefore speaketh in this manner: the first is called Ombrion, 
Ombrion.  whereas there is no sign of house nor building. In the mountains there is a fountain, & trees like unto that which is named Ferula, 
Strange trees.  both black and white, out of the which may be wrong or writhe water. Of the black ones the water is very bitter, & to the contrary the white ones, the water is pleasant to drink. The other is called junonia, 
junonia.  whereas there is but one only house builded of stone, there is seen another that is next to this, but less & of the said name: another that is full of great Lizardes'. Right over against these before showed, there is another named the Island of Snow, 
The isle of snow. Canaria.  for that it is always covered with snow. The next to that is Canaria, so called because of the multitude of great dogs that it engendereth, as we have before showed, whereof juba King of Mauritania, had two, & in the said I'll there are some appearance of old buildings. This country in times past hath been inhabited with wild & Barbarous people, not knowing God, but altogether Idolaters, worshipping the sun the Moon & certain other planets, as sovereign deities, of the which they thought they received all their benefits, but in less than .58. years, the Spaniards have subdued and overcome them, and slain part of them, and the rest they hold and keep as slaves and captives: and they inhabiting there, have established or set up the Christian faith, so that at this present there is none of the ancient dwellers left, 
The inhabitants of the Canaries converted to the Christian faith.  only a few excepted that are hid in the mountains, as in the mountain of Pych, of the which we will speak hereafter following: True it is that that place is the refuge of all the banished of Spain, the which for punishment are sent thither into exile, so that there is an infinite number also of slaves, the which serve as well to labour the ground, as to do other labours. I do much marvel how the inhabitants of these islands, and of Africa, for that they are near neighbours, have so differed in language, in colour, Religion and in manners. Also that many under the Roman Empire have conquered and subdued the greatest part of Africa, and never touched these islands, as they have done in the sea Meditareum, knowing also that they are very fruitful, serving as a victualler to the Spaniards, even as Cicilie serveth to the Romans and Genevois. 
The bounty of the Islands named Canaries.  This country of itself is good, being so well tilled, it bringeth great profit, and the most in Sugars. For within these few years they have planted many Canes that bring forth great quantity of Sugars marvelous good, not only in these islands but in other places that they hold there. 
Sugar of Canaria.  Nevertheless it is not so good in any part as in these islands of Canaries. And the cause why it is there better gathered & desired, is, for that the islands in the sea Meditareum on the cost of Greek land, as Metelin, Rhodes, & other places bearing good sugar, before the Turk had the dominion of them, have been spoiled by negligence or otherwise. And in all the country of Levant, I have seen no sugar made but in Egypt, 
Sugar of Egypt  & the canes that bear it grow on the brink of Nill, the which also is greatly esteemed of the people & of the merchants that trade thither as much & rather more, than Canary Sugar. The elders before us esteemed greatly the Sugar of Arabia, 
Sugar of Arabia.  for that it was marvelous hearty and pleasant, specially for medicine, to the which use they did put it & to little other. But now adays voluptuousness is so increased, specially in our Europe, that there cannot be never so little a banquet made after our manner of living, but that every sauce must be sugared, and also our meats and drinks. The which thing was defended to the Athenians, by their laws, as a thing that did effeminate the people: the which the Lacedæmonians have followed by example.  
But of a truth the great Lords of Turkey drink sugared waters, for because that wine is defended them by their law. As touching the wine that was invented by the great Physician Hippocrates, it was only permitted to sick folk and unable, but at this day it is so common with us, as it is scarce in other countries. So much have we spoken by the way, on the talk of sugar, let us now return to our matter. 
The fruitfulness of the Canaries.  As for corn there is sufficient in these islands, also of very good wine, better than the wine of Candia, where as they make Malmesies, as we will declare entreating of the islands of Madera. Of flesh also there is sufficient, as wild and tame goats, birds of all kinds great quantity, Oranges, Citrons, Lemons, Pomegranads and other fruits, Palms, and great quantity of good honey.  

Small trees named Paper.  There is also about the rivers and floods little trees named Paper, and in the said rivers and floods there are fishes named Silures, the which Paulus iovius in his book of fishes, thinketh to be Sturgeon, of the which the poor slaves feed on, sweeting for travel & almost breathless, and oftentimes they feed thereon for want of other meat. And thus much I will say by the way, that they are very hardly entreated of the Spaniards, specially of the Portugeses, yea worse than of the Turks or Arabians. And I am constrained to speak thereof, for that I have seen it myself. Among other things, there is found an herb against the hills sides commonly called Oriselia, 
Oriselia an herb.  the which they gather with great diligence for to die colour. Furthermore they make a kind of black gum the which they name Bre, 
Bre, black gum and how it is made.  of the which there is great abundance in Tenerif. They take thorns of that which there is great quantity, and break them, and lay them by piece one upon another like crosses, and under each heap there is a little hole of no great depth, and then they set fire on this wooden almost at the very top, and then it rendereth his gum that falleth into this hole. Others do make it with less labour, for the hole being made, they set fire on the tree: this gum bringeth them great profit in their trade that they make to Perou, of the which they use to calk ships and other vessels for the sea, putting it to no other use. As touching the heart of this tree being somewhat red, the poor people that dwell on the hills and mountains cut it by long sticks of the length of half a fathom, as great as our thumb, and lighting it at one end it serveth in stead of a candle. Also the Spaniards use it after this manner.   

Of the high mountains of Pike properly called Pikehill. Cap. 6.  
IN one of these islands named Tenerif, 
The wonderful height and circuit of Pikehill.  there is a Hil of so wonderful a height that the mountains of Armenia, of Persia, Tartary, neither the Hill Lybem in Syria, the mount Ida, Athos, nor yet the mount Olympus, so much celebrat by the Historiographers, ought not to be compared to this Hil, the which containeth in circuit at the least twenty miles, & from the foot to the top 54. miles. This mountain or Hil is named Pike, at all times snowy, misty, and full of great and cold vapours, and also of snow, although that it is not easily seen, (to my judgement) for because that it extendeth to the lower Region of the Air the which is very cold, as Philosophers, and Astronomers hold opinion, so that the snow cannot melt, because that in that place the Sun cannot cast her beams, and therefore the superior or upper part remaineth always cold. This mountain or Hill is so high, that if the air be clear, it may be seen fifty Leagues on the water and more, the top and the bottom of this hill though one be near or far of, is made in manner of this Greek figure Ω the which signifieth Omega. 
The height of the hill Aetna.  I have also seen the Hill called Ethna .30. Leagues, and on the sea near to Cypris, I have seen a certain mountain of Armenia, fifty Leagues of, though I have not the eye sight so good, as Linxius, who from the Promontory of Lylibie in Cicilie, did discern and see the ships, in the port of Carthage. I am sure that some will think this strange, esteeming that a man's eye could in no wise see nor discern so far of: but nevertheless this is most true in plainness, but not in height. The Spaniards have divers times assayed to sound the height of this hill, and for to do it, they have many times sent a certain number of people with mulles, bearing bread, wine & other munitions, but they never return again as I have been credibly informed of those that have dwelled there ten years. And therefore they hold opinion, that in the said hill, as well on the top as on the circuit, there are some rest or remnant of these wild Canarians, that thither are retired, and keep the said hill, living with Roots, and with wild beasts, the which kill and slay those that presume to get up the hill, 
Ptolomeus hath known this hill.  to discover the top thereof. Also of this Ptolomeus hath had knowledge, saying, that beyond the Columns or pillars of Hercules. In a certain I'll there is a hill, of a marvelous and wonderful height, and therefore toward the top it is always covered with snow: from the said hill there falleth great abundance of water, that watereth all the Island, the which maketh it very fruitful of Canes, Sugars, and other things. And there is no other water than that which cometh from that hill, otherwise the countries that are under the tropic of Cancer, would remain barren because of the excessive heat. 
Strange sort● of stones.  It bringeth forth abundantly great stones like to sponges, & are very light, so that one as great as a man's head doth not weigh half a pound: it bringeth forth other stones like Iron sledges: and four or five Leagues upon the Hill, are found other stones, that smell like smoke, and therefore the inhabitants think that in the hill there is some smoky Mine.   

Of the isle of Iron. Cap 7.  
AMong these Islands I think good particularly to describe the isle of Iron next to Tenerif, 
The isle of Iron and why it is so called.  so named for because that there are found mines of Iron, as the isle of Palm, so named because of the multitude of Palm trees, that are there, and so of others. And although that it be the least of the others, (for his circuit is not above 6. League's) yet nevertheless it is fruitful, for the circuit that it containeth, as well in canes bearing Sugar, 
The fruitfulness of the isle of Iron.  as in beasts, fruits, & fair gardens, above all the rest. It is inhabited with the Spaniards as well as the rest. As touching corn, there is not sufficient for the dwellers, therefore the greatest part as the slaves, are constrained to nourish themselves with milk and cheese, made of goats milk, of that which there is plenty, and therefore they look fresh, well disposed, and marvelous well nourished, for because that such nourishment by custom is familiar to their nature, likewise for that the good temperateness of the air favoureth them. Some half Philosopher or half Physician (giving always honour to them that merit honour) may here demand when- that they using these things, are not gravelly, knowing that milk, 
Milk and Cheese gravelly.  and cheese engender gravel, as may be seen in many in our Europe. I answer that cheese of itself may be good and bad, gravelly and not gravelly, according to the quantity that is taken, and the nature & disposition of the person. True it is that to us which being not contented with one kind of meat, we take oftentimes even in an hour twenty, or thirty kinds of meats and drinks, it may be hurtful, but not to them which use one kind only, yea, and that moderately.  
We see that the Indians live seven or eight months in the war with meal made of certain hard and dry roots, in the which some would judge that there were no nourishment nor sustenance. The inhabitants of Creta & Cypris, 
divers nourishmentes of divers people.  live almost with no other thing than milk the which is better than that of the Canaries for that it is Kowe milk and other goats milk. Furthermore that milk is good nourishment, that promptly is converted into blood, 
Milk is very good sustenance.  for that it is but blood whitted in the dug or roother. Pliny in his second book & .42. Chap. showeth that Zorastes lived xx. years in the wilderness only with cheese, that Pamphiliens in the war, had almost no other victuals but cheese made of Asses, & Camel's milk, the which also I have seen the Arabians do, the which did not only drink milk in stead of water passing the Desert of Egypt, but also gave it unto their horses. Also the Ancient Spaniards for ●he most part of the year lived with Acorns, as Strabo showeth & Possidonius, of the which they made their bread, and their drink of certain roots, and not only the Spaniards but many others, as vergil reciteth in Georgicon: but now the season serveth us to live more sweeter and more humaynly. The men in all these islands are more broken to labour and travel than the Spaniards in Spain, having no learning but rustically. To conclude, they of knowledge that are well seen in the Navigation, aswell Portugeses as Spaniards, 
The isle of Iron is right under the Diametrial line.  say that this Island is right under the Diametrial, as they have noted in their card Marins, limitating all that is from the North to the South as the Equinoctial line of West and East, the which lines are equal in greatness, for every one containeth .360. degrees, 
The value of every degree.  and every degree as before we have said, is seventeen leagues and a half. And even as the Equinoctial line divideth the Sphere in two, and the four and twenty climates twelve, in the East, and as much in the West, also this Diametriall passing by this former Island, as the Equinoctial by the Isles of S. Omer, cutteth or breaketh the Paralizes and all the sphere by the half of the North to the South. Other things I have not found in this Island worthy of memory, saving that there are great quantity of Scorpions, & more dangerous than those that I have seen in Turkey, as I have known by experience. 
Scorpions of Canaries.  Also the Turks gather them for to make Oil, good for medicine, as the Physician can very well use it.   

Of the Islands of Madera. Cap. 8.  
WE read not in Authors how that these Islands were discovered, 
The Islands of Madera not known of our elders.  but within these sixty years that the Spaniards and Portugeses have hazared and enterprised many Navigations toward the West, and as we have said before, Ptolomeus had understanding of the Fortunate islands even to the Caape verd. Pliny also maketh mention, that juba brought two dogs from the great Canaria, beside many Authors that thereof have spoken. Then the Portugeses were the first that found out these islands, of the which we speak, and named them in their language Madera, 
What Madera signifieth.  the which is as much to say, as Wood, for that it was altogether a Wilderness full of wood, and not inhabited. These islands lie between Gibaltare and the Canaries towards the West, and in our Navigation we coasted them on the right hand, being distant from the Equinoctial, about .32. degrees, and from the Canaries .63. leagues. Now for to discover and labour this Country, as a Portugal being a master Pilot showed me, they were constrained to set fire in the wood, as well of the highest as of others. Of the greatest and principallest Island, that is made in manner of a Triangle, as Δ of the Greeks, containing in circuit .14. leagues, or thereabout. Wherein the fire continued the space of vj. or vij days, with such a vehement heat, that they were constrained to save themselves in their ships, and the others that had not this mean nor liberty, cast themselves into the Sea, until the smoke of the fire was passed. Incontinently after, they began to labour the ground, to plant and sow divers grains: the which profited greatly, because of the good disposition and temperateness of the air. afterward, they builded and edified houses and Castles, so that at this day there is found no place so fair and pleasant. 
Sugar of Madera, celebrated above others.  Among other things, they have planted great plenty of Canes, that bear very good sugar: with the which they have a great trade into other Countries, and at this day the sugar of Madera beareth the name. The people that now inhabit Madera, are much more civil and fuller of humanity, than they of the Canaries, and they trade with others, as humainely as is possible. Their greatest trade is Sugar and Wine, of the which we will treat hereafter at large. Also they have Honey, Wax, Oranges, Citrons, Lemons, Pomegranads and Corderians, they make great quantity of Comfits, 
Comfits of Madera.  the best that may be wished for, and they make them in the likeness of Men, Women, Lions, Birds, and Fishes, the which is a fair thing to see, and much better to taste. Also they conserve many fruits, the which by this means do keep, and they are carried into strange Countries, to the comfort and recreation of every one. 
The fruitfulness of the islands of Madera.  This Country is very good, fair, and fruitful, aswell of his natural disposition, because of the fair hills decked with woods and strange fruits, the which we have not in these parties: as also of fountains and lively springs, with the which the fields and meadows are watered, being garnished with herbs and flowers sufficiently, and wild beasts of all sorts. Among the Trees that are there, 
Gum.  there are many that cast gum, the which they have learned with the time, to put to necessary uses. There is also seen a kind of Gaiac, 
A kind of Gaiac.  but for that it is not found so good as the Gaiac that is at the Antilles, they set nought thereby: it may also be, that they know not the manner how to use it. There are also certain Trees, that at certain times of the year, casteth good Gum, the which they call Dragon's blood, 
Dragon's blood.  and for to get it out, they pierce the tree foot, opening it wide and deep. This tree beareth a yellow fruit, as great as a Cherry, the which is very good to refresh one, whether he have the Ague or otherwise.  
This kind of gum is not unlike to Cynaber of which writeth Dioscoridus, 
Dioscoridus Cinaber.  saying, as for Cynaber saith he, is brought from Africa, and is sold dear, so that there is not enough to satisfy painters: it is red, and therefore some judge it to be Dragon's blood, and so hath Pliny thought it in his book the .33. of his natural History the seventh Chapter, of the which as well Cynaber as Dragon's blood is not at this day found among us so natural, as the elders have described, but the one & the other is artificial: therefore knowing what the elders have judged it, and that which I have known of this gum, I would esteem it to be altogether like to Cynaber and Dragon's blood, having a soft, and a cold virtue. I will not here forget among these, so singular fruits as great Lemons, Oranges, Citrons, and abundance of sweet Pomegranads, winish, sweet and sour, little and great, the ryne or peel of which serve to tan and harden the skins, for that they are very suppell. And I think that they have learned this of Pliny, for the treateth thereof in his 19 book and thirteenth Chapter of his History. To be short, these islands so fruitful & well disposed, do excel in dilicatnesse those of Greece, were it Chios that Empedocleus hath so much extolled, and Rhodes, Apollonius and many others.   

Of the Wine of Madera. Cap. 9  
WE have here showed how much the land of Madera is fruitful and well disposed, to bear many kinds of good fruit: now we must speak of the Wine of Madera, the which is above all fruits, for the use and necessity of our human life. I cannot tell whether it meriteth the first degree, at the least I am assured it meriteth the second in excellency and perfection. The Wine & Sugar because of an affinity in temperateness that they have together, require a like disposition as doth the air and the land. And even as our Islands of Madera do bring forth great quantity of very good Sugar, 
Wine and Sugar of Madera.  so do they in like manner bring forth good Wine from what parts so ever the plants are come. The Spaniards have affirmed that they were not brought from Levant nor from Candia, and yet the Wine is as good and better. The which then ought not to be attributed to any other thing, but only to the ground. I know well that Cyrus' King of the Medians and Assyrians, before that he had conquered egypt, made to be planted a great number of plants that he caused to be brought from Syria, that since brought forth good Wine, but yet they passed not these of Madera. 
Wine of Candia  And as for the Wine of Candia, though they are very excellent, so that in times paste they have been greatly esteemed in the Roman banquets, the which have been more celebrated than the Wines of Chios, Metheglin, and of Promentorie of Aruasia, which for his excellency and pleasantness hath been called Wine for the Gods. But at this day the Wines of Madera, and of the isle of Palm one of the Canaries, 
Wine of the isle of Palm.  hath got the reputation, whereas there groweth white, red & claret with the which they do trade into Spain and from thence into other countries. The most excellentest is sold at the place where it is made, for nine or ten Ducats the Pipe. From the which country being transported into other places, it is very hot and burning, and rather poison to men, than nourishment, if it be not taken with discretion.  
Plato esteemed Wine to be a very good nourisher, and very familiar to our bodies, stirring up or provoking the spirits to virtue and honesty, always provided that it be moderately taken. 
The profit of Wine being moderately taken.  Also Pliny saith, that Wine is a sovereign medicine. The which being well known of the Persians, esteemed their great enterprises after that they had drunk Wine (moderately) to be more worthy than those that were done fasting, that is to wit, being taken in sufficient quantity according to the complexion of men. We have here showed, that only the quantity or superfluity of meats and drinks hurteth: therefore to my judgement this Wine is better the second and third year than the first, when it hath the heat of the Sun, the which heat within time consumeth and vadeth, so that then there remaineth but the natural heat: for being transported from one place to another, the burning heat extinguisheth. Moreover in these Islands of Madera, the trees, herbs, and fruits grow so rank and thick, that they are constrained to cut and to burn a great part thereof. In stead of which they plant canes of Sugar that profit very much, bringing their Sugar in, in .6. months, and those that they plant in januarie, are cut in june, from one month to another, and so according as they are planted, the which letteth that the heat of the Sun doth not hurt them. Here I have briefly showed that which I could observe, as touching the secrets of the Isles of Madera.   

Of the Promentarie Verd, and of his Islands. Cap. 10.  

A promontory is, that which we call a Cape.  THE elders have called or named a Promentarie, a point of a land that lieth out long in the sea, the which may be seen a far of, and that this day it is called with us a Caape, as a thing eminent above others, as the head is above the rest of the body? also some will write Promontorium à Prominendo, the which to my judgement is best. This Caape or Promentarie of the which we mind to speak, lieth on the coast of Africa, between Barbaria, and Guinny, in the realm of Senega, distant from the Equinoctial .15. degrees, being in times passed named jalout, by the inhabitants, and since Caape verd, 
jalout now called Caape verd, & why it was so named.  by those that have sailed thither & discovered it, being so named because of the multitude of trees both small and great, that are green at all times of the year, even as the white Caape is so called, because it is full of white sands, being as white as Snow, without any appearance of Herbs or trees, distant from the Canaries .70. Leagues: and there is found a gulf of the Sea, called by the people of the country Dargin, of the name of a little Island, 
Dargina gowlf. Promentarie of Ethiopiae.  near to the main land. Ptolomeus hath named this Caape verd the Promentorie of Ethiopia, of the which he only had knowledge without passing further, the which I judge for my part, to be well termed of him, for this country extendeth of a great length, and therefore many have said, that Ethiopia is divided in Asia, and in Africa. Among the which Gemaphrisius saith, that the mountains of Ethiopia, did occupy the greatest part of Africa, extending to the brinks or borders of the west Occidental, toward the South, even to the flood or river Nigritis. This Caape is very fair and great lying far into the sea, edified on two fair mountains. All this country is inhabited with rude & uncivil people, not so rude or wild as they of the Indies, very black as they of Barbary, ye must also note that from Gibaltar, to Prestre john's land, Calicute, containing more than .3000. leagues, the people is all black. Also I have seen in jerusalem three Bishops on the part of Prester john, that came thither to visit the holy Sepulchre, that were much more blacker than those of Barbary, and not without occasion, for it is not to be thought that generally those of Africa are a like black or like in manners and conditions, considering the variety and difference of Regions, that are some more hotter than others. Those of Arabia, and of Egypt, are between black and white, others brown coloured whom we call white moors, others are clean black: the most part go all naked, as the Indians, acknowledging a King, whom they name in their language Mahovat: yet some of them as well men as women, hide their privy parts with beasts skins. Some among the others wear shirts, & gowns of course hairy cloth, the which they receive in trading with the Portugeses. The people are familiar enough towards strangers. Before that they take their sustenance they wash their bodies and members, but in another thing they do greatly err, for they ordain their meats very uncleanly, also they eat stinking and rotten flesh, & fish: the fish because of his moistness putrefieth, and the flesh for that it is tender and moist, is quickly changed, because of the vehement heat, as we see here in Summer. For moistness is sign of putrefaction, and the heat is as a cause efficient. Their houses & lodgings are alike, all round in manner of our dove houses, covered with reeds and Rushes, of the which also they use to lie on, in stead of beds for to sleep and take their rest. As touching their Religion, they hold divers kinds of opinions strange enough, and contrary to the true Religion. Some worship Idols, others Mahomet, chiefly in the realm of Camber; some think, that there is one God, the Author of all things, with other opinions not unlike to the Turks. There are some among them that live more hardly than the others, having hanged at their neck a little box closely shut and glued with gum) like to a little chest, full of certain letters or writings, for to make their invocations and prayers, the which customably they use certain days without ceasing, having an opinion that whilst they have it about them, they be out of danger. As for Matrimony, they join together one with another by certain promises and agréementes without any other Ceremony. This Nation passeth the time in pleasure, loving dancing, the which they exercise at evening in the Moon shine: in their dancing they turn their face as by some manner of reverence and worship, the which a very friend of mine hath showed me of a truth, who dwelled there a certain time. 
Barbazins and Serretsa people of Africa.  near adjacent are the Barbazins and Serrets, with the which those of whom we have spoken make continual war, although that they be like, (only excepting) that the Barbazins are more wild, brutish, cruel, and hardy. The Serrets are vacabonds and despearsed, even as the Arabians by the deserts, pilfering all that they may come by, without law, & without King, saving only that they bear a certain honour to him among them, that hath done some prowess or valiant act in the war. And this they allege for reason, that if they were subject under the obedience of a King, he might take their children, and use them as slaves, as doth the King of Senega. They fight for the most part on the water in little boats made of the bark of a tree, of four fathom long, the which they name in their language Almadies. 
Almadies.  Their weapons are bows and sharp pointed arrows envenomed, so that he is uncurable that therewith is stricken. Furthermore, they use staves of Canes, garnished at the end with some beasts teeth in stead of iron, with the which they can well help themselves. When they take their enemies in the war, they keep them to sell to to strangers, for to get other Merchandise, (for there is no use of money) they do not kill them and eat them, as the Cannibals do and they of Bressill. I will not leave out, the joining to this Country, there is a fair river or flood named Nigritis, 
Nigritis now called Senega.  and since named Senega, the which is of the same nature as is Nylle, from whence it proceedeth as many do affirm, the which passeth by high Lybia, and the kingdom of Orgunea, running through the midst of that Country, watering it as Nylle doth Egypt. And for this cause it was named Senega. The spaniards many times have assayed by this river, to enter into the Country for to subdue them, and sometimes they have entered well four score leagues: but for that they could not at no time addulciate nor appease the inhabitants, being strange and stout, for avoiding of further inconveniences that might happen and fall, they departed home again. The trade of these brutish men, is Oxen and Goats, specially their skins, and they have so great abundance, that for a hundredth weight of iron, you may have a couple of Oxen of the best. The Portugeses make their vaunt that they were the first, that have carried to this Caape verd, Goats, Cows and Bulls, the which have since so multiplied: also that they have carried thither divers plants and seeds, as of Rice, Citrons & Oranges. As touching Nill, it groweth in the Country plentifully. Near to this Caape verde, 
Island near to Caape verde, not inhabited.  next to the main land, there are three little Islands, others than those that we call Islands of Caape verd, of the which we will speak hereafter, being fair enough, because of the fair trees that they bring forth, nevertheless they are not inhabited. They that dwell there near, go thither to fish, from whence they bring such a multitude of Fish, that they use it in stead of bread, being once dried, and beaten to dust. In one of these islands is found a Tree, 
A strange tree.  the which beareth leaves like to our Fig trees: the fruit is a two foot long or there about, and great in proportion like to Cowcombers of the Isle of Cypress. Some eat of this fruit, as we do millions or Pompous, and within this fruit, there is a grain of the greatness of a Bean, wherewith some of them feed their Apes and Monkeys: others make collars to put about their necks, for it is very fair when it is dried and seasoned.   

Of the Wine of Palm trees. Cap. 11.  
Having written as much as is possible, that which merited writing of the promontory verde, being here before declared. I am now minded particularly to treat, seeing it cometh to purpose of Palm trees, and of the Wine and Beverage, that these black brutish men have learned to make: the which in their language they call Mignoll. We see how much God the father and creator of all things, giveth means and ways for the comfort of our life, in such sort that if one way faileth, he showeth us another. And although that in that Country the wine is not so good as in other places: and peradventure for that they have not been planted, or so diligently looked too, as it is in many places of Europe, nevertheless they have by Divine providence recovered by Art and some diligence, that which otherwise to them was denied. Now this Palm is a tree marvelous fair & well accomplished, be it in height in perpetual greenness or otherwise, (of the which) there are divers kinds, 
divers kinds of Palms.  & that grow in divers places. In Europe aswell as in Italy, these Palms grow abundantly, chief in Sicily, but they are barren: in some of the borders of Spain, they bear fruit unrelished and sour, not to eat. In Africa they are sweet, and also in Egypt, in Cypris, in Creta, and also in Arabia. Likewise in juda: the wine that thereof is made, is excellent, but it hurteth the brain. Of this tree there is male and female, the male beareth his flower at the branch, the female buddeth without flower. And it is a marvelous thing, and worthy of memory of that which Pliny and many others do recite, that in the Forest of Palm trees that naturally grow out of the earth, if that the males be cut, the females become barren without bearing any more fruit, as widows that want their husbands. This tree requireth a hot Country, a sandy ground, and brackish or salt, otherwise they salt the root before they plant it. As touching the fruit, it beareth meat outwards, the which groweth first, and within, a nut with a shell, the which is the grain and seed of the tree, 
Pliny. lib. 13. cap. 4.  as we see apples in our Country: and also there groweth little ones among these, without nut, growing all on a branch. Furthermore, this tree being dead, reviveth and springeth again of itself, 
Phoenix a bird, and why she is so named.  of the which it seemeth the bird Phoenix hath taken his name, the which in Greek signifieth Palm, for that he reviveth again of himself, without any other mean. And yet more this tree so much celebrated, hath caused this Proverb and argument, 
Proverb.  that is to carry the Palm, asmuch to say, as the triumph and victory, or for that in times past they used a crown of Palm in their victories, as a thing that is always green. And yet every play or game hath his tree, as the bay tree, the Myrrh tree, and the Olive tree, or for that this tree, as some say, was first consecrated to Phoebus before the Laurel or Bay, the which of antiquity hath represented the sign of victory. And the reason thereof reciteth Aulus Gelius▪ when he saith, that this tree hath a certain property, 
The property of the Palm.  that happeneth to worthy and virtuous men, that is, that the Palm tree never boweth nor bendeth, but to the contrary, the more that it is laden the more as by a manner of resistance it redresseth and beareth upward, the which Aristotle confirmeth in his Problems, also plutarch, Pliny, and Theophrastus, 
Lib. 7. Lib. 8. Lib. 16. Chapt. 42▪ Lib. 5. of plants.  the which seem to agree with the saying of Virgil. 
Shrink not at all though fortune at thee frown,  
But valiantly resist and beat her down.  Now to our purpose, in the which as well for the disposition of the air which is very hot being in the zone Torida distant 15. degrees from the Equinoctial line, as for the good nature of the earth, there groweth abundance of Palm trees, from the which they draw a kind of juice for their store and ordinary drink: 
The manner how to make Wine of Palms.  the tree being opened with a certain instrument a foot or twain from the ground, there proceedeth a Liquor, that they receive in an earthen vessel, and keep it in other vessels for their use. And for to keep it from corruption they salted it a little, as we do verioice in our country, so that the salt consumeth or taketh away the taast of the tree. As touching the colour & strength, it is like to the white Wines of Anion, the taaste is very good. 
The property of the Wine of Palm trees.  This likor is very good for to refresh and quench their thirst, to the which they are subject because of the extreme heat.  
The fruit of these Palms are little Daates sharp and sour, so that they are not toothsome to eat, nevertheless the juices of the tree is very pleasant to drink. And among them they esteem it as we do good wines. The Egyptians in times past before they did embalm the dead bodies having prepared them according to their custom, for to keep them from putrefieng, did wash them three or four times with this likor, and then anointed them with myrrh and Cinnamon. This drink is used in many countries of Ethiopia, for want of better Wine. In like manner certain moors make a kind of drink with the fruit of an other tree, 
Another kind of drink.  but it is as sour as verjuice before they be ripe: for to be short, I will leave many & divers fruits and roots the which the inhabitants use for their sustenance, that they have taken only by experience, so that they know how to use them in their sickness. For, even as they eschew voluptuousness, and superfluity, the which among us are very familiar, so also they are more harder and stronger for to endure outward injuries be they never so great. And to the contrary we, for that we are over delicate and dainty, are hurt with a small thing.   

Of the River of Senega. Cap. 12.  
ALthough that I am not minded in this my discourse as a true Geographer to set out the Countries, Towns, Cities, Floods, gulfs, Mountains, Distances, Situations, and other things appertaining to Geography, yet nevertheless it seemeth not contrary, to write and set forth at large the most notablest places when it cometh to purpose: as the things that I have seen for pleasure and contentation of my mind, that the reader might thereby receive some pleasure and profit. Now this flood so famous among other things, 
The Kingdom of Senega.  of the which the country and Kingdom that it watereth hath been named Senega, as our sea Meditarium, hath or requireth divers names according to the diversity of countries where it passeth, and in Libya, coming to the Caape verd, of the which we have spoken here before, from the which to the river, the country is very plain, sandy and barren, for the which cause there are not so many devouring beasts, as in other places. This flood or River is the first and most celebrated of the land toward the west side, separating or dividing the dry and barren country from the fruitful, and it extendeth even to the high Libya, and to many other countries and Kingdoms that it watereth. It containeth in breadth about a league, the which is very little in the respect of many rivers that are in America, of the which we will treat hereafter more at large. Before that it entereth into the west, it divideth, and entereth in by two mouths or openings being separated the one from the other about half a league, the which are of an indifferent depth, so that small ships may be brought in. Some in the old time as Solon in his book named Pollycistor, julius Caesar and others, 
The opinion of some of our elders upon the original of Nill and of Senega Hills of the Moon and of there lying. The original of Senega.  have written that the great flood of Nill, passing all over Egypt, hath the like spring or Original as Senega, & proceedeth out of the same mountains, the which seemeth not true. For the original of Nill, is far beyond the Equator, for it cometh from the high hills of Bede, otherwise named of the Ancient Geographers, hills of the Moon, the which separateth the old and new Africa, as the hill's Pyrannes', divide France from Spain. And these hills are in Cerenaique, the which is beyond the line .15. degrees. The source or spring of Senega, of the which we speak, proceedeth from two hills or mountains, the one named Mandro, and the other Thala, being distant from the hills of Bede, more than a 1000 leagues. And by this may be seen how greatly many have erred for that they have not sought out things, as we have done of late days. As for the hills of the Moon, they lie in the lower Ethiopia, & those from whence cometh Senega into Libya, 
Hills of Libya.  of the which, the chiefest hills are Vsergate, from whence proceedeth the River of Darda, the mount Mandro, being more spoken of than the others, for because that all the rivers that run from Salata, to Massa, being distant the one from the other about seventy leagues, take their original out of this hill. Furthermore, the mount Gyrgila, from whence their falleth a river named Sympho, and of Hagapole, cometh the flood Subo, being full of good fish and Cocodrils hurtful to their neighbours. True it is that Ptolomeus, having treated of many countries and strange Nations, hath said that which seemed him good, chiefly of Africa and Ethiopia. And among all the Ancient writers, I find none that hath had so perfect knowledge to my mind as he, when he speaketh of the Promentarie of Phraso, having fifteen degrees of latitude, & that is the farthest land of the which he hath had knowledge, as also describeth Glarean, in the end of the description of Africa. In his time the inferior world hath been described, 
None in times past hath had perfect knowledge of Africa in general.  nevertheless he hath not wholly speaken thereof, for that he knew not a great part of the land Meridional, which in our time hath been since discovered. And many things have been added to the writings of Ptolemy, that may be seen in the general table that is properly of him. Therefore the simple reader having not greatly turned in the Cosmography, nor had experience of things, shall note that all the inferior world is divided by the elders in three parts unequal, that is to wit Asia, Europa, and Africa, of the which some have written the truth, other that which seemed them good, without making any mention of the west Indies, that at this day make the fourth part of the world, discovered of late years, as also hath been the most greatest part of the east Indies Calicut and others. As touching those of the west, as France Antariike, Peru, Mexica, they are now commonly called the New World, 
The new world.  yea to the .52. degree and a half of the line, where as is the strait of Magello, and many other provinces on the North side, and of the South on the coast of Levant, & to the lower tropic of Capricorn in the West Meridional, and the North land, of the which Arian, Pliny, and others Historiographers, have made no mention that they have been discovered in their tyme. Some have made mention of certain Islands that were found out or discovered by the Carthaginians, 
The Isles Hesperideses discovered by the Carthaginians in times passed. The I'll Atlantike in the time of Plato.  but I judge them to be the Islands Hesperideses or fortunate. Plato also saith that in times passed there was in the sea Atlantike or West, a great main land or country, and that there was in like case an Island named Atlantike more greater than Africa or Asia together (the which) was swallowed up with an earthquake, the which I think rather to be a fable than otherwise, for if it had been true, others beside him would have written thereof, knowing that the land of which the elders have had knowledge, divideth in this manner. First of the east part it is next unto the unknown land, the which is next to the great Asia, and to the east Indies on the South side: they have had knowledge of a few, that is to wit, Ethiopia Meridional, named Agisimbra or the North side of the Islands of England, scotland, Ireland, and the hills Hiperbores, which are the Further parts of land Northward as some do say. Now to return to Senega, 
The divisitie of the country & the inhabitants manners in Senega.  on the one and on the other side of the flood, even as the ground is divers and differing, so are the inhabitants thereof: on the one side the people are very black, of great stature and strong of body, nevertheless the country flourisheth which fair trees bearing fruit, on the other side you shall see all contrary, the men of the colour of Ashes, & of little stature. As touching the people of the country of Senega, I can say no other thing than of those of Caape verd, but that they are rather worse, for that the Christians dare not so easily descend a land for to trade or to have refreshing, as in other places, unless they will be killed or taken for captives, and so to be made staves. All things among them are wild and contemptible saving only peace, the which they do somewhat esteem one toward another. In like case rest, with some excercise, sometimes in labouring the ground for to save Rice: as for corn and Wine there is none, as touching corn it cannot prosper nor come up as in other countries for that there falleth very little and seldom rain, which is the cause that the seeds cannot bud out nor flower because of the extreme heat and drieth. So soon as they see their ground watered or dewed, they begin to sow, and after they have sowed within three months the fruit is ripe ready to be cut. Their drink is the juice of Palm trees and water. 
A fruitful tree and Oil of divers properties.  Among the trees of this country there are found some of the greatness of our Oak trees, the which beareth fruit as great as dates: with the nut they make Oil that hath marvelous properties. The first is that it holdeth water in yellow colour like safferne, with the which they die or colour their little boulles, that they drink in, also there hats that are made of the straw of rice. Furthermore this Oil hath a smell like to March violets, and a savour or taast like olive Oil, therefore many eat of it with their Fish, rice, and other meats that they eat. Thus much thought I good to speak of this river and country of Senega, the which extendeth from the coast of Levant, to the land of Thuensar, and from the South part of the Realm Cambra, from the ponent, to the west sea, keeping always our course, certain days after we began to enter into the country of Ethiopia, in that part that is named the Kingdom of Noby, which is of a great circuit, with many Kingdoms and provinces, of the which we will hereafter speak.   

Of the islands Hesperideses, otherwise named Caape verd. Cap. 13.  
AFter that we had left our Promentary on the left hand, 
The lying of the Islands of Caape verd.  for to keep our course as right as it was possible, making the south-west a quarter of South almost a whole day, but about ten or eleven of the clock the wind came contrary, the which cast us on the right hand towards certain Islands the which are called by our card Marins, Islands of Caape verd, the which are distant from the Canaries, about two hundredth leagues, and from the Promentarie sixty leagues by sea, and a hundredth leagues from Budomell, in Africa, following the cost of Guinea toward the pole Antarctic. These Islands are ten in number, of the which there are two well peopled with Portugeses, that first discovered them & brought them to their obedience, one of them which they have named S. james Island, is better peopled than the rest, 
The isle of S. james.  also thither is made great trading by the moors as well of those that inhabit the main land, as of the others that sail to the Indies in Guinea, and of Manycongra, in the country of Ethiopia. This Island is distant from the Equinoctial line, fifteen degrees: an other likewise named S. Nicolas I'll, 
The isle of S. Nicolas, others as Flera, Plintana, Pintoria, and Foyon.  inhabited as the other: the others are not so peopled, as Flera, Plintana, Pintoria, and Foyon, in the which there are a certain number of people and slaves sent thither by the Portugeses, to labour the ground in some places where they find it best, and chief for to get goat skins of the which there is great store, & therewith make good trade & have thereof a great vent, and therefore the Portugeses pass twice or thrice in a year with ships and munitions leading with them dogs, and bringing nets, and snares for to chase and hunt wild goats, the which after they are skinned, they reserve only the skins, the which they season with salt and earth, in certain vessels made for that purpose, for to keep them for putrifieng, and so they carry them into their country, and therewith they make their Marokins, 
Marokins of Spain.  that are so greatly esteemed with us. Also they inhabitants of these islands are bound to render or pay for tribute, for every one to the King of Portugal, the number of six thousand goats wild and tame, being salted and dried, the which they deliver to those, that of the part or for the King's behoof make the voyage, with his great ships to the east Indies, as to Calicut and other places passing by these Islands: and these number of goats are bestowed for their sustenance during the voyage, which is two years long or more, for because of the distance of places and the great Navigation that they must make. Moreover the air in these Islands is Pestilent and unwholesome, so that the first Christians that began there to inhabit, were of a long time vexed with sickness, as well to my judgement for the untemperateness of the air that in such places cannot be good, as also the changing of diet and of country. Also the burning Agues are there very familiar & common to the slaves specially, and the bloody flux, of the which neither the one nor the other proceed not but of humours extreme hot, because of their continual travail and naughty nourishment: also of the hotness of the air, with the water that is next, and therefore they receive excess of these two Eliments.   

Of the Torterels, and of an herb that they call Orselie. Cap. 14.  
Sing that in our Navigation we are minded to write certain secrets observed in places where we have been, it shall not be hurtful to speak of Torterels, that these former islands do nourish in as great quantity as goats. There is found four kind of Torterels, 
Four kind of Torterels.  of the land & of the sea, the third living in fresh water, the fourth in marshes. Of the which I mean not to speak particularly, but only of those that are seen on the sea coasts that compass these islands. These kind of Torterels will leap from the Sea to the shore at his appointed time, making with his claws a hole in the sand, wherein after she hath laid her eggs, (being of the number of eight pair, of the which speaketh Aristotle,) covereth them so well, that it is unpossible to see them, or to find them until that the flood cometh that uncovereth them, then because of the extreme heat that is there of the Sun, they engender and open (as the Hen of her egg) the which consisteth in great number of Torterels, of the greatness of Crabs (which is a kind of Fish) the which the flood returning, beareth into the Sea. Among these Torterels, there are some of such a greatness, specially in these parts whereof I speak, that four men cannot almost bear one, as of a truth I have seen and understanded of men worthy of credence. 
Lib. 9 cap. 10.  Pliny showeth that in the Indian Sea, there are so great Torterels, that the shell is big enough to cover a mean house, and that at the Islands of the red Sea, they might make therewith vessels Navigable. The said author sayeth also, that there are the like at the strait of Carmania in the Persian sea. There are many ways to take them. Sometimes this great beast of a desire to swim more easily, 
How to take the Torterels.  seeketh the upper part of the water a little before noon, when the day is fair, where as having the back bare and uncovered out of the water, suddenly their shell is so well dried by the Sun, that they cannot descend to the depth of the sea, so that they floote above water, will they or not, and by this means they are taken. It is otherwise said that in the night they come out of the Sea seeking their repast, and after they are full and weary, they fall a sleep on the water near to the shore, whereas they are easily taken, for they are heard how they snort in sleeping, beside many other ways and means, which were to long to rehearse. 

The thickness of the shells of these Torterels of the Sea, and why they serve.  
Shields of the shells of Torterels.   As touching their cover and shell, I leave you to judge of what thickness it may be proportioned to his greatness. Also in the coast of the strait of Magelan, and of the river of plate, the Indians make them shields, which serve them for to receive the blows of arrows of their enemies. Likewise the Amazons on the coast of the peaceable Sea, make their Bulwarks when that they are assailed of the enemies. And for my part I may boldly say, that I have seen such a shell of a Torterell, that a hand gun could in no wise pierce. We need not to ask how many the Insulares, or Island dwellers of Caape verde do take and eat, as we would do here Beef or Mutton. Also it is like to Veal, and almost of the same taste. The wild man of India America will in no wise eat of them, persuading with themselves that it would make them heavy, as it is an heavy meat, which would be a great let or hindrance to them in the wars, for that being heavy, they cannot pursue lightly their enemies in the war, neither escape themselves. To conclude, 
A history of a Portugal gentleman.  I will rehearse a History of a Gentleman Portingalls, that was a Leper, who for the great pain that he received of his disease, seeking all the means he could to absent himself from his Country, as one being in extreme despair, after he had knowledge of the conquest of these fair islands by those of his country, was bend for recreation to go thither, so that he prepared himself in the best order he could, with ships, men, and artillery, and beasts alive, specially Goats, of the which they have quantity. And in the end he landed in one of the Islands, who for the taste that his disease caused him to have, or for that he was weary of eating of flesh, the which they use customably in their Country, he had a desire to eat eggs of Torterels, 
A Portugal healed of the Leprosy.  the which he did for the space of two years, in such sort, that in the end he was healed of his Leprosy. Now I would gladly ask, whether that by the temperateness of the air, he recovered his health, which he had changed, or the meat that he eat. I think verily, that both the one and the other was the cause. As touching the Torterell, Pliny who speaking as well for sustenance as for medicine, maketh no mention that it should be good against the Leprosy. Nevertheless, he sayeth that it is good against many poisons, specially against the Salmander by a Antipathia, that is between them two, and mortal enmity.  
Whether that this beast hath any hid property against this evil, I leave to the Philosophers and Physicians: and so ye may see that experience hath given the knowledge of many medicines. Of the which none can give any certain reason: wherefore I would that some would prove the experience of these of our Country, the which to my judgement should be more better & more sure than Vipers, so much commended in this affection, and of which is composed and made the great Theriaque, knowing that it is not sure to use Vipers, because of the poison that they bear, what so ever they say, the which thing was also first known by experience. It is also said that many upon the example of this Portugal have gone thither, to whom it hath also well succeeded. This much therefore shall suffice for Torterels, and as for the Goats that this gentleman bore thither, they have there so well multiplied, that at this present there are an infinite number, & some hold opinion that their original cometh from thence, & that before there was none seen. Now there resteth to speak of an herb that they name in their language Orselie: 
Orselie a herb.  this herb groweth on the tops of high and accessible rocks without any earth, of the which there is great abundance, and for to gather it, they fasten ropes on these Mountains or rocks, than they climb upward by the lower end of this cord or rope, and scraping the rock with certain instruments that they have, make it to fall as a chimney swéeper doth, the which they reserve, and let it down by a rope, in baskets or other vessels. The use of this herb, is for to make colours, as here before we have showed.   

Of the Island of Fire. Cap. 15.  

The isle of fire, and why it was so named.  AMong other secrets I will not leave out the i'll of fire, so named, for that it casteth continually a flame of fire, such a one, that if the elders had had thereof any knowledge, they would have written it among other things, aswell as of the Mountain of Veswe, and of the hill Aetna, of the which for a truth they rehearse marvels. As touching Aetna in Sicily, it hath cast the fire sometimes with a marvelous noise, as in the time of Marcus Emilius, & T. Flaminus, as writeth Orosa, the which many other Historiographers do affirm, as Strabo, the which affirmeth to have seen it, and diligently considered. The which maketh me to believe somewhat also in the respect of these men that have spoken thereof. Also they are not so far off, but that we may prove whether it be true or no. I know well that some of our writers would say, that one of the Islands of Canaria casteth continually fire: but let him take heed that he take not that, of which we speak, for the other. Aristotle in his book of marvels, speaketh of an Island discovered by the carthaginians not inhabited, which did cast flames of fire, beside many other wonderful things. Notwithstanding, I cannot think that they have known this, much less the hill Aetna, for it was known before the reign of the carthaginians. As for the hill of Pussola, it lieth on the main land, 
The Hill Pusola.  and if any one will say otherwise, I will not withstand them: as for my part I cannot find that ever it was found out, but since a M. D. and xxx with others as well near as far. There is also an other hill in Hirland, named Hecla, the which at certain times casteth stones, as thought they had come out of a fiery furnace, so that the ground within .v. or uj leagues about, is barren and unprofitable, because of the ashes that proceed out of this hill, wherewith the ground is covered. This Island of which we speak, containeth seven. leagues compass, by good right called the isle of fire, for the Mountain having of Circuit .679. paces, and of height a thousand and fifty fathom or there about, casteth continually fire at the top, the which may be seen thirty or forty leagues on the sea, much more clearer in the night than the day, for that by good Philosophy the greatest light shadoweth the least: the which maketh the Navigants afraid, that have no knowledge thereof before. This flame hath a very evil smell, and therefore ye need not to think such manner of fire strange, knowing that they are natural things, as the Philosophers witness, (that is) those places are full of fire, and hot Mines, of the which proceedeth a vapour hot and dry, like to fire, the which cannot be done without air. Also from thence proceed waters naturally hot: furthermore in Esclavonie by Apolonia, there is a fountain coming out of a rock, whereas is seen proceed a flame of fire, whereby all the waters adjacent are as boiling. This place or isle of fire is inhabited with Portugeses, as many other are in those quarters. And so, even as the burning heat of this hill doth in no wise let the fruitfulness of the land, the which bringeth forth divers kinds of good fruits, where as is a great temperateness of the air, lively springs and fair fountains, also the sea that compasseth it, doth not quench this vehement heat, as rehearseth Pliny of Chimaera, always burning, 
Lib. 2. cap. 106.  and quencheth with earth or hay, being cast upon it, but with water it is kindled.   

Of Ethiopia. Cap. 16.  
ALthough that many Cosmographers have sufficiently described the Country of Ethiopia, also among our writers, those the which have made many fair Navigations by this coast of Africa, in many and far Countries, notwithstanding this shall not let, but that according to my endeavour, I will declare some secrets observed in sailing by this said coast into the great America. Ethiopia therefore extendeth so far, 
The spreading of Ethiopia.  that it hath part both of Asia and Africa, and therefore they are divided in two. That part which is in Africa, is named India, or Levant of the red sea, and to the North part of Egypt & Africa toward the South part of the flood Nigritis, the which as we have said, is called Senega. 
Senega flood, in times past named Nigritis.  To the ponent it hath the whole part of Africa, the which extendeth to the bank side or brinks of the West. And so it hath been named by the name of Ethiops, the son of Vulcan, the which before had many other names. Toward the West it is hilly, small inhabited in the East, 
The description of Ethiopia.  others set it out after this sort following. There are two Ethiops, the one is under Egypt rich and large, and in the same is the isle Mirva, great among those of Nylle, and of the same part extending to the East, reigneth Prester john. 
Miroa an Island.  The other part is not so well known nor discovered, it is of such a greatness, saving only by the borders of the sea. Others divide it otherwise, that is to wit, the one part being in Asia, and the other in Africa, that now are called the Indies of Levant, compassed with the red Sea in Barbary, towards the north, to the Country of Libya in Egypt. This country is very hilly, of the which the hills are Bed, jona, Bardita, Mescha, Lipha. Some have written that the first Ethiopians and Egyptians, among other were most rude & ignorant, leading a wild life even as brute beasts, without lodging or remaining, but resting them whereas they were benighted, worse than at this day do the Masonists. From the Equinoctial toward the Antarctic, there is a great country of Ethiopians, that nourish great Eliphants, Tigers, Rhinoceros, beasts so named. There is another region bearing Cinnamon between the arms of Nylle: the realm of Etabecke, 
The realm of Etabecke and Ickthiophages.  on both sides of Nylle, is inhabited with Christians. The others are named Ickthiophages living only with fish, being in times past brought under the obedience and subjection of Alexander. The Anthropophages are near to the hills of the Moon, and the rest extending from thence to Capricorn, and returning toward the Caape of good hop, and inhabited with divers and sundry people, having divers similitudes and monstrous. Nevertheless they are esteemed to be the first borne into the world, also the first that have invented religion and ceremonies, and therefore they were never under the yoke of subjection, but have always lived at liberty. 
The love of the Anthropophages towards their King.  It is a wonderful thing to see the honour and amity that they bear to their King: for if it chance that he be grieved in his body, his subjects or household servants will be the like, esteeming it a thing unpertinent to remain whole, and their King grieved or offended.  
The greatest part of these people are all naked, because of the extreme heat of the Sun, others cover their privy parts with certain skins, others cover half of their body, 
Meroa the chief town of Ethiopia, anciently named Saba.  and others their whole body. Meroa is the head Town of Ethiopia, in the old time it was named Saba, and since by Cambyses, Meroa. There are divers kinds of religion. Some are Idolaters, as hereafter shallbe declared, the others worship the Sun when it riseth, but they despise the West. This Country aboundeth in miracles and wonders, it nourisheth toward India very great beasts, as great Dogs, Eliphants, Rhinocerous of a wonderful height, Dragons, Basiliscus and others: furthermore, trees so high that no Archer can shoot to the top, with many other wonderful things, as also Pliny rehearseth in the second book, the xvij Chapter of his natural History. Their corn is customably Mill and Barley, with the which also they make a certain drink, and they have few other fruits and trees, saving only certain great Palm trees. They have also in some places, good quantity of precious stones more than in other. Also it shall not be out of the way, to say that these people are very black, according as the heat is more or less vehement, and that that colour cometh of a superficial action, being the great heat of the Sun, 
Why the Ethiopians, and other are black.  the which is the cause also, that they are very fearful. The heat of the air being so violent, draweth out the natural heat of the heart, and other interior parts, & therefore they remain cold within being destitute of the natural heat, and only burned outward, as we may see in other things. The action of heat in what thing so ever it be, is no other thing than resolution or dissipation of the Eliments, when it persevereth and is violent, in such sort that the most subtilest Eliments being consumed, there remaineth but the earthly part, keeping colour and consistence of the earth, as we see Ashes and burned wood. Then to the skin of this people so burned, there resteth but the earthly part of the humour, the others being dispersed which causeth the colour. I said they were fearful, because of the inward coldness: for hardiness and manhood cometh not, but with a vehement heat of the heart. The which causeth the Englishmen, & those that are under the North Pole, which contrary are cold without, but marvelous hot within, to be hardy, courageous, & full of great boldness. Therefore these Neigers have their head curled, their teeth white, great lips, crooked legs, the women unconstant, with many other vices which would be to long to rehearse: therefore I will leave this to Philosophers. Let us come to our purpose. 
Indians and Ethiopians use Magic.  These Ethiopians & Indians use Magic because they have many herbs & other things proper for that exercise. And it is certain & true, that there is a certain Sympathia in things, and hid Antipathia, the which cannot be known but by long experience. And because that we coasted a country somewhat far in this land, named Guinea, I think good to write thereof particularly.   

Of Guinea. Cap. 17.  
AFter that we had refreshed us at Caape verd, it behoved us to pass further, having the wind at North-east, marvelous favourable for to conduct us right under the Equinoctial line, the which we ought to pass: but being come to the height of Guinea, lying in Ethiopia, the wind became clean contrary, because that in that region, the winds be very unconstant, with rain, tempest, and thunder, so that the Navigation on that coast is very dangerous. Now the fourth day of September we arrived into this Country of Guinea, on the West borders. But somewhat far within the land, it is inhabited with a very strange people, because of their Idolatry & dark ignorance. Before that this Country was discovered, and the people known, it was thought that they had lived like the Ethiopians, having the like manner of religion of those of the higher Ethiope, and of Senega: but it is found clean contrary, for all they that inhabit or dwell from the said Senega, 
The Inhabitants of Guinea, to the Cape of good hope, are all Idolaters.  to the Caape of good hope, are all Idolaters without the knowledge of god and his law. And these people are so blinded and ignorant, that the first thing that they meet in the morning, be it bird, serpent, or other wild or tame beast, they take it with them bearing it about them all the day, about what business so ever they have, as a God or protector of their work, if they go a fishing in any of their little boats of bark, they will put it in one of the ends of the boat well wrapped with some leaves, having an opinion and believing that it will bring them all the day good luck, be it on land or on water: nevertheless they believe in God, alleging that he is there above immortal, but unknown, for that he will not be known to them sensibly. The which error differeth nothing from the error of the Gentiles in times past, that worshipped divers Gods, under the colour of Images and similitudes. But yet this is a thing worthy to be noted, though it be superstitious and abominable: that these poor, ignorant, and brutish men, had rather worship corruptible things, than to be reputed without a God. Diodorus the Sicillian writeth, that the Ethiopians had the first knowledge of the feigned gods, to whom they began to vow, and to sacrifice. Also Homer signifieth that jupiter with other Gods went into Ethiopia, as well for that they were there honoured and sacrificed unto, as for the wholesomeness of the Country. The like you have of Castor and Pollux, 
Castor and Pollux, called the bright stars, and lanterns of the sea.  the which going on the sea at the request of the Greeks against Troy, were vanished in the air, and were never after seen again, the which giveth opinion to some to think that they were ravished & placed among the stars of the Sea: also many name them the clear stars of the sea, attributing their name's Caster & Polux, to two fair & bright stars. The said people have neither temples nor churches, nor other places appointed for sacrifice and prayer. Besides this, they are without comparison much more wicked than those of Barbary or Africa, in such sort that the strangers dare not aboard them, nor set foot on land, but by pledges: 
The manners and order of living of those of Guinea.  otherwise they would take them, and handle them like slaves. These Villains or wicked imps go all naked, saving some since the time that their Country hath been somewhat frequented, have worn a little shirt of Cotten, or some such thing, the which is brought them from other places. They make not so great trade with beasts, as in Barbary: there is very few fruits, because of the dryness & extreme heat, for this region is under the sign Taurus: they live a good many years, and yet seem not old, so that a man of a. C. years old, would be judged with us not above xl Nevertheless, they live with the flesh of wild beasts, without séething, roasting, or well preparing of it: they have also some fish, and great abundance of Oysters, more larger some than half a foot, but they are more dangerous to eat, than any other fish, they cast a liquor like to milk, and yet the inhabitants eat thereof without any danger, and they use as well salt water as fresh. They commonly make war with other nations: their weapons are bows and arrows, as the other Ethiopians and Africans. The women of this Country frequent the war as much as the men, and they bear for the most part, a large buckle of fine gold or other metal at their ears, lips, and also on their arms. The waters of this country are very dangerous, 
The air of Guinea, is unwholesome.  and also the air is unwholesome, for that to my judgement, the South wind being very hot and moist, and familiar in that country, is subject to all kind of putrefactions, the which we feel many times in this Country. And therefore they that of our Country, and of other Countries of Europe that travail to Gynney, cannot remain there long, without receiving some sickness, the which chanced to us, for many of our company died, and others remained a long time sick, and with great pain they recovered their health. For the which cause we remained not there long time. 
Maniguetta, a fruit much esteemed among spices.  I will not omit that in Guinea, the fruit that is most rife and common, and with the which the strangers of strange Countries lad their ships, is named Maniguetta, being very good, and well esteemed above other spices, with the which the Portugal's make a great trade. This fruit cometh up in the fields like an Onion. The other that cometh from Molucquer and Calicut, is not so well esteemed by a great deal. This people of Guinea trade with certain barbarians adjacent, gold and salt after a strange fashion. There are certain places ordained among them, where as each one of his part bringeth his Merchandise, those of Guinea, salt, and the others gold molten in lumps, and without any other talk together, because of the small trust and confidence one of another, as the Turks and Arabians, and some of America with their neighbours, they leave in the place before spoken, the gold and the salt of each part. This being done, these Ethiopians of Guinea if they find there gold enough for their salt, they take it away, otherwise they leave it, and let it lie. The which the other seeing that their gold will not satisfy, they add unto it until that there be sufficient: then they bear away that, that to each one doth appertain. You shall understand furthermore, that the Neigers hitherward are more civil and better nurtered than these of Guinea, because of the great resort of Merchants that trade thither: also they provoke others to barter for their gold, for things of small value, as knives, glasses, and such like. 
The trade of ivory.  Also the Portugeses trade and bargain with the moor of Guinea, beside other things, for ivory, that we call Eliphants teeth. And one among others, showed me that at one time they have laden twelve thousand of these teeth: among the which there was one found among the other, that weighed a hundred pound weight: for as we have said, the land of Ethiopia nourisheth elephants, the which they take at the chase, as we do here wild Boars, and so they eat the flesh, which many affirm to be very good: the which I had rather believe than taste, or to stand disputing thereof. I will not therefore in this place stand to reason or set out the virtues and properties of this beast, the most gentlest, and approaching to human reason than any other, 
Elephant, a beast approaching to human reason.  seeing that this beast hath been so much celebrated of our elders, and also by those of our time: and knowing that Pliny, Aristotle, & many others have sufficiently treated thereof, and of his flesh, the which some say is medicinable, and good against the Leprosy. The teeth that we call ivory, doth comfort the heart and the stomach, and it will also help with all his substance, the part or belly of the mother. I will not therefore write that which they have written, for that it is not to our purpose. Nevertheless I will not leave to speak that which I have seen: the which is, if that they can get any young elephants, they teach them many pretty knacks. For this beast is very apt, and of a good understanding.   

Of the Equinoctial line, and of the Islands of S. Omer. Cap. 18.  
Leaving therefore this part of Gynney on our left hand, after we had stayed there but a while for the infection of the air, as we have before showed, we kept our course, coasting always to the height of the Caape of Palms, and of that which is called the three points, where as runneth a fair River, able to bear great ships, by the reason whereof there is good trade all over the Country, 
A river or flood bearing Mines of gold and silver.  and the which beareth gold and silver abundantly in lumps, and therefore the Portugal's have landed there, and being in favour with the Inhabitants, they have builded there a fair Castle, the which they have named the Mine Castle: And not without a cause, for their Gold is without comparison more finer than that of Calicute, or of India America. It is on this side the Equinoctial about three degrees and a half. There is found a river that cometh from the Mountains of the Country named Cania, 
Cania and Rhegium rivers.  and another more lesser, named Rhegium, the which beareth or bringeth very good Fish, also Cocodrils very dangerous, as Nylle, and Senega, and they eat them as we do Venison. I will not forget what was showed me to have been seen near to the Mine Castle: a sea monster having the shape of a man, that the flood had left on the shore, the which was heard cry. 
Two sea monsters like to man and wife.  In like case the female came with the next flood, crying aloud, and sorrowing for the absence of her make: the which is a wonderful and strange thing. By this may be known, that the Sea doth nourish and bring forth divers, and strange kind of monsters, as well as the land. Being now by our journeys come even under the Equinoctial, I mind not to pass any further, without noting somewhat. This line Equinoctial, 
The description of the Equinoctial line.  or Circle Equinoctial, or else Equator, is a trace imagined, of the Sun by the midst of the world, the which divideth in two equal parts, two times the year, that is to wit, the fourth of September, and theleventh of March, and then the Sun passeth directly by the Zenithe of the earth, and leaveth us this imagined Circle, equal to the Tropics & others that may be judged between the two Poles, the Sun going from the East to the West: it is true that the sun goeth all the year by the Ecliptic to the Zodiac, saving on the days above named, & standeth directly over them that inhabit there. Furthermore they have right course, without the one of the Poles be more erected than the other: the day & the night are to them equal, & therefore they were named Equinoctial, 
From whence cometh the name Equinoctial.  and according as the Sun doth departed from the one to the other Pole, there is unequalities of days and nights, and elevation of the Pole. Then the Sun declining by little and little from this point Equinoctial, goeth by his Zodiac almost to the Tropic of Capricorn, and passing no farther, causeth the Solstice of winter: then returning, passeth by the said Equinoctial, till that he come to the sign of Cancer, whereas is the Solstice of Summer: therefore he maketh vj. signs parting from the Equinoctial to each one of these Tropikes. The elders have esteemed this country or Zone among the Tropikes to be unhabitable because of the extreme heat, as those that are near to the two Poles, because of the cold. Nevertheless, within these few years this Zone hath been discovered by Navigations, and inhabited for that it was found fruitful, and abounding in many good things (notwithstanding the heat) as the Islands of S. Omer and others, of the which we will speak hereafter. Some under this line comparing the coldness of the night, with the heat of the day, have taken this argument: that in that respect there might be good temperateness, 
The temperateness of the air, under the Equinoctial line.  beside many other reasons that I omit for this present. The heat that is there seemed to me no hotter than it is here at Midsummer. Furthermore there is much tempest, thunder, lightnings and rains, & therefore at the islands of S. Omer, as also in another Island named the isle of Rats, there is as much verdure or grenenesse as is possible. These islands under the Equinoctial line are marked in our cards Marins S. Omer, 
The isle of S. Omer, or of S. Thomas.  or S. Thomas, inhabited at this day by Portugeses, although that they be not so fruitful as certain others.  
Also there is gathered a certain sugar, but they trade with the Barbarians and Ethiopians, Gold melted, Pearls, Musk, Rhubarbe, Beasts, Birds and other things according to the country. Also in these Islands the seasons and times are unequal and differing from other countries, the people more subject to sickness than they of the North part, the which difference & unequality cometh of the Sun, the which showeth his qualities by the air being between him and us. It passeth as every one knoweth, two times the year customably thereby, and then the Equinoctial describeth him, in the months of March, and September. 
Abundance of divers fishes under the line.  About this line is found such abundance of fishes of sundry & divers kinds, that it is a marvelous and a wondered thing to see them above water, and I have heard them make such a noise about the ships side, that we could not hear one another speak: whether this is because of the heat of the Sun or for any other reasons, I leave that to the Philosophers. There resteth now to show that even about our Equinoctial, 
The sea water is sweet under the Equinoctial.  I taasted the water the which was more sweeter & pleasanter to drink than in other places, whereas it is very salt, though that many affirm the contrary, judging that it should be rather more salter, for that it draweth to the line whereas the heat is most vehement, knowing that from thence cometh the saltness of the sea, and therefore that should be more sweeter that is toward the Poles. I do verily think that from the one Pole to the other even to the line, that as the air is not equally temperate, so in like case the water is not temperate. But under the line the temperateness of the water doth follow the temperateness of the air. Therefore there is a good reason, why the water in that part is more sweeter than in other places. Being passed this line, we found the sea more and more calmer and peaceable, keeping our course toward the Caape of good hope.   

That not only all that is under the line is inhabited, but also all the world is inhabited contrary to the opinion of our elders. Cap. 19  

Man hath great desire to knew and see things.  IT is evidently seen how great the curiosity of men is, either for a desire to know things, or for to attain to possessions, or else to avoid Idleness, that they have hazarded themselves (as the wise man saith, and beside him the Poet Horace saith in his Epistles) to all dangers and travels, for to eschew poverty, to lead a more quiet life without trouble or pain. Notwithstanding it might be enough for them to know and understand that the sovereign workmaster, hath made with his own hands this world all round, so that the water hath been separated from the land, to the end that more commodiously every one might inhabit in his proper Eliment, or at the least in that place whereas he thought most best. Nevertheless not content with this, they would know if it be all over inbabited. Notwithstanding for such finding out, and diligence, I esteem them for my part as much and rather more worthy of praise, than our late writers and Navigators, for that they have first opened to us these things. Otherwise with great pain we could not have known them nor comprehended: but Thales, 
The opinion of many Philosophers, that say all the world is not inhabited.  Pythagoras, Aristotle, and many others as well Greeks as Latins have said, that it is not possible that all parts of the world should be inhabited, the one part for the great and unsupportable heat, another part for the great and vehement cold. Other Authors dividing the world into two parts called Himisperes, (one of the which) they say can in no wise be inhabited. But the other part in the which we are, must of necessity be inhabited. And so of four parts of the world they take away three, so that to their opinion there should rest but two, that be habitable. And for the better understanding thereof to each one, excepting those that have knowledge thereof, I will declare this more plainer, 
Five Zones by the which the world is measured.  minding therefore to prove that all the world is inhabited. They suppose that there is five zones in all the world, by the which they will measure, and compass all the earth, of the which two are cold, two temperate, and the other hot. And if you will know how they gather these five Zones, extend your left hand toward the Sun rising, being the fingers spread abroad, and by this mean Probus Grammaticus did teach, or instruct. Then when you have beheld the Sun, through the lower parts of your fingers, bow and bend them every one in form or manner of a Circle. By the thumb ye shall know the cold zone, which is the North, 
The cold zone.  the which by the excessive coldness (as they do affirm) is unhabited. Nevertheless the experience hath showed within few years, that all those parts well near to our Pole, also under the Paralezey Arctic joining to the Hyperbores, 
The temperate Zone.  as Scavia, Dacea, Swetherlande, Gotlande, Norway, Denemarcke, Thilia, Lyvonia, Pilapea, Pruse land, Russia, Muscovia, Ruthenie, whereas there is nothing but Ice, and continual coldness, to benotwithstanding inhabited with froward and brutish men. The which to our English Merchants is well enough known. Therefore the Ancient writers in this do greatly err, & are not to be believed, having only spoken by guess and thought, and not by experience. Let us speak of the other zones: the other finger next to the thumb, doth signify the tempeperat zone, the which is inhabited, & extendeth to the tropic of Cancer, though that in drawing near it be more hot than temperate, as that which is justly in the midst, that is to know between this tropic & the Pole. The third finger doth represent the zone placed between the two tropics named Torrida, 
Zone Torida.  because of the extreme heat of the Sun, the which resteth and burneth up all, and therefore it was judged unhabitable. The fourth finger is the other zone, 
Another temperate zone.  temperated of the Antipodes, a mean between the tropic of Capricorn, and the other Pole, the which is inhabited. The fifth which is the little finger signifieth the other zone cold, 
Another cold zone.  the which in like case they have esteemed unhabited for the like reason as they alleged for the former Pole, of the which we may say as much as we have said of the North part, for the like reason is of both. After than that this rule or example is known, it is easily known what parts of the World are inhabited, and which are not, according to the opinion of the Ancient writers. Pliny, diminishing that which is inhabited, saith, that of the five parts that are named zones, we must take away three because they are not inhabited, the which hath been showed by the thumb, the great finger and the little finger. Also he taketh away all that occupieth the West sea. And in another place he writeth that the earth that is under the zodiac, is only inhabited. The causes that he allegeth why these three zones are unhabited, is, the vehement cold, which for the far distance & absence of the Sun is in the Region of the two Poles, and the great and extreme heat that is under the zone Torrida, is because of the continual presence of the Sun. As much do our late Theologians affirm and write. The contrary notwithstanding, may be showed by the writings of these Authors before alleged, by the authority of Philosophers, specially of our time, by the witnessing of holy Scriptures, and then by experience which passeth all, the which by me hath been made. Strabo, Mela, & Pliny, although that they disprove the zones, writ nevertheless that there are men in Ethiopia, in the Island named by the elders Aurea, and also in the isle Tabroban, Malaca, and Zamotra, 
The zone Torida and hills Hyperbores are inhabited.  under the zone Torrida: also that Scandenavia, the hills Hyperbores, and the country adjacent near to the North, of the which we have before showed, are peopled and inhabited although according to the saying of Herodita, these hills are directly under the Pole. The first that found out the land contained under the two temperate zones to be inhabited, as plutarch writeth, was Parmenides.  
Many have written that not only the zone Torida, may be inhabited, but also well peopled. The which Aueroys proveth by the witnessing of Aristotle, in the fourth Chapter of his book entitled, of the world and of the firmament Avicen in the like case, in his second doctrine, 
The zone Torida, more commodious and wholesome than the others.  and Albertus Magnus, in his sixth Chapter of the nature of Regions, efforcing to prove by natural reason, that this zone is inhabited, yea more profitable for our humane life than those under the tropics. So that by this means we will conclude and say that it is better, more commodious, & more wholesome for our human life, than any others. For even as the cold is an enemy, so in like case the heat is friendly to our bodies, knowing that our life is nothing but heat and moisture, to the contrary death is cold and dryness. By this therefore ye may knew that all the earth is peopled, and is never without dwellers neither for cold, nor heat, but for barrenness, and whereas it is unfruitful it may be inhabited, as I have seen in Arabia, and in other countries. Also man was created of God for that he might dwell and live in what part of the world he would, were it hot, cold or temperate: for he himself said to our first parents: Grow, increase and multiply. The experience furthermore teacheth, (as many times we have said) how large the world is, and commendable to all creatures, the which we may see by the continual Navigations on the sea, and by the long journeys on the land.   

Of the multitude and divers kinds of fishes being under this line Equinoctial. Cap. 20.  
BEfore the departing out of our line, I think it good to declare particularly of the fish that is found about seven or eight leagues on this side and beyond the line of divers colours, and such a multitude, that it is not possible to number them, or to heap them together, the which are as a great heap of corn in a barn. And ye shall note that among these fishes many have followed our ships more than three hundredth leagues, specially the Dorades, of the which we will speak hereafter more at large. The Marsovins or sea Hogs, after that they had perceived our ship from far, did swim a main against us, the which gave to the Mariners a certain sign and forshewing of that part from whence the wind ought to come, for these Sea beasts (say they) will swim against one, and in a great company as four or five hundredth together. This fish is named Marsovin, 
Marsovin and why it is so named.  of Marissus, in Latin, which is as much to say as a sea Hog, because that he is like almost to Hogs on the earth, for he hath the like grunt or noise, and hath the snout like the end of a Can, and on the head a certain cundite or opening, by the which he yaunneth or purgeth, even as the Whale. The Mariners take many of them with certain gins of Iron being sharp, and pointed at the end and crooked, and they do eat but little thereof, having other better fish: but the liver and lights is very good & delicate being both like, and also in taste to a Hog's harscelet. When they are taken, drawing toward their death they cast great sighs as we see our country Hogs do when they are let blood. The female bringeth but two at a tyme. It was therefore a wonderful thing to see this great number of fish making a marvelous great noise without comparison, the which some peradventure will think strange and uncredible: but I will affirm it to be so, for that I saw it. As I said before, that there is fish found of all colours, red, as those whom they named Bonnites, the others Azure, & like gold, shining brighter than fine Azure, as those named Dorades, others green, grey, black. Yet I will not say, that out of the sea they should keep those colours. Pliny rehearseth that in Spain, 
A fountain that showeth fish like gold.  in a fountain, the fish are of the colour of gold, but out of the fountain they are like to others, the which may come of the colour of the water, being so between our eye and the fish, even as a glass being of a green or blue colour representeth the things that are within of the same colour. Now to return to our Dorade, many as well Ancients as others have written of the nature of fishes, but very homely, for that they have not seen but heard say, and specially of the Dorade, 
Aristotle and Pliny of the Dorade.  Aristotle writeth that she hath four fins, two above and two under, and that she maketh her young ones in summer, & the female remaineth hid a certain time, but he telleth not how long. Pliny to my judgement, hath borrowed or learned this of Aristotle, 
Lib. 6. cap. 16.  speaking of this fish, saying that she hideth herself in the sea a certain time, but in passing further he hath defined this time to be when it is extreme hot, for that it cannot endure so great a heat. There are found great ones like samon's, 
The description of the Dorade.  others that are lesser: from the head to the tail it hath a crest and all that part coloured like fine Azure, in such sort that it is unpossible to excogitate or think a more fairer colour: the inferior or lower part shineth like fire gold and for this cause it was named Dorade, also of Aristotle, in his language 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that the interpreters call Aurata, and it is very fierce on the flying fish, the which she followeth, and chaseth in the water, as the hound chaseth a haare in the fields, for she liveth by prey, casting herself high above water after this flying fish, and if that she faileth at one time she recovereth at another tyme. This fish followed our ships the space of seven weeks without once forsaking of them, yea night and day, until that she found the sea unsavoury or not for her nature. I know well that this fish hath been much celebrated and esteemed in times passed among Noble men, for that she is very delicate and pleasant, to eat. For we read of Sergius, that found the means to have one brought to Rome, the which was served at a banquet to the Emperor, 
Dorade the fish hath been greatly esteemed in times passed among the Romans. Among these Dorades those were most set by that were brought from Tarenta being made fat at the lake Licryn as witnesseth martial in the third book of his Epigrams.  whereas it was marvelously esteemed. And since that time hath this fish Dorade, been greatly esteemed among the Romans, so that there was no sumptuous banquet but that it was served for a great dainty dish. And whereas this fish is scant in summer, & hard to come by, Sergius the Senator, found the means to keep it with food alive, to the end that this fish should not fail them in no season: and for this curiosity it was named Aurata, or golden fish. This fish is in much better savour in Winter than in Summer, for all things have their season. Cornelius Celsus ordained this fish to the sick, specially, to those that had the Fever or Ague, for it is light fish and not heavy, but may be well digested: there are found more store in the West sea, than in the East sea. Moreover all kind of fishes are not found in every place of the sea. Helops a singular fish is not found but only about Pamphilia, Ilus and Scaurus, only in the sea Atlantike, and so of many others. Alexander the great being in Egypt bought two Dorades for two mark of gold, for to prove if that they were so delicate and fine meat, as it was showed him, so that there were two a live brought him from the West sea, to Nemphis, whereas he remained, as a jew being a Physician, showed me by a History being at Damasca in Syria. Thus much gentle Reader I have learned as touching the Dorade, for that thou shouldest see what the elders have written thereof, and among others, my lord William Pellicier Bishop of mountpelier, who hath treated of the nature of fishes as faithfully and truly, as any in our tyme.   

Of an Island named the Ascension. Cap. 21.  
THE twenty sixth day of October, being eight degrees beyond our line Equinoctial, we found an Island not inhabited, the which at the first we thought to name the isle of Birds, because of the great multitude of Birds that are in the said Island, 
The isle of the Ascension, an why it was s. named.  but looking in our card Marin, we found that before time it was found out by the Portugeses, and named the isle of the Ascension, because that on that day, they arrived thither. We therefore seeing those Birds flying on the sea, made us to think that there was some Island near hand, and the nearer we came, we saw such a multitude of birds of divers sorts with coloured feathers, that the like was never seen in our time, 
divers kinds of strange birds and in great number.  the which came flying to our ships, and would rest upon us, so that we might take them with our hands, and with great pain could we be rid of them. For if one had stretched out his Arm they would have rested upon it, even like tame birds, and not one of them like to the birds of our country, the which to some seemeth uncredible. Being cast of from our hands they flyed not away, but let themselves be taken again as before.  
Furthermore in this Island there is a certain kind of great birds that I have heard called Aponars, 
Aponars birds.  they have little wings, and therefore they cannot fly. They are great and high, like hearnshawes, the belly white and and the back black as coal, the bill like to a cormorant, when they are killed they cry like hogs.  
I thought good to speak of this bird among others, for that there are found a great number of them in an Island lying toward the Caape, of good Speed, on the cost or borders of new found land, 
Caape of good haste isle of Aponards and why it is so named.  the which was named the isle of Aponards: Also there are such a multitude, that on a time three great ships of France, going to Canada, did lad each of them two times their cockboates with these birds on the brink of the said Island, and it is no mastery to go into the Island and to drive them before them to their boats like sheep. This therefore hath given me occasion to speak so much thereof. As touching the rest of the isle of ascension, it is indifferent fair and pleasant, being of circute six leagues, with mountains garnished with fair green trees, herbs, and flowers. Not forgetting the number of birds, of the which we have spoken, 
The isle of thascension not yet inhabited as many others.  I suppose that if it were laboured and tilled with many others that are in the west, as well beyond, as on this side the Equinoctial, it would render as good profit, as Tenedos, Lemnos, Metelin, Negrepont, Rhodes, and Candia, or any others that are in the sea Hellespont, and the Cyclades: for in this great west sea, there are Islands that are more than .80. leagues compass, and some less, among the which the greatest part are desert, and not inhabited. Now after that we had passed this Island, there did appear four stars of a wonderful greatness made in manner of a cross, nevertheless far enough from the Pole Antarctic. The Mariners that sail that way name them charets. Some of them think that among these is the South Star, the which is fixed and unmovable, as the North star that we call the lesser bear, the which was hid before that were under the Equator, and many others that are not seen at this side to the Northward.   

Of the promentarie of good hope, and of many secrets observed in the same, likewise our Arrival to the Indies, America, or France Antarctic. Cap. 22.  
AFter that we have passed the Equinoctial live, 
India Meridional.  and the Island of S. Homer, following the cost of Ethiopia, the which is called India Meridional, it behoved to follow our course even to the Tropic of winter, about the which time we discovered the great & famous Promentarie of good hope, the which the Pilots have named Lion of the sea, 
Caape of good hope, why it is called Lion of the sea. Rhinoceros or beasts of Ethiopia.  because that it is feared and redoubted, being so great and difficil. This Caape on both sides is compassed with two great mountains and hills, of the which the one beholdeth the East, & the other the West. In this country are many beasts named Rhinoceros, for that they have a horn under their snout. Some call them Oxen of Ethiopia. This beast is very monstrous, and keepeth perpetual war and hatred with the Elephante. And for this cause the Romans have taken great pleasure to make these two beasts fight, for a spectacle of greatness, chief at the creation of an Emperor or some other high or great magistrate: as they do at this day mark Bears, Bulls, and Lions. He is not altogether so high as the Elephant, nor such as we paint him or set him out in our country. And that which moveth me to speak, is, that traveling from Egypt to Arabia, I saw a very Ancient monument, whereas was engraved certain figures of beasts in stead of letters as it was used in the old time, among the which was the Rhinoceros, being without horn and mails, not like as our painters setteth him out. This beast for to prepare himself to fight, as Pliny rehearseth, sharpeneth his horn against a certain stone, and always draweth to the belly of this Elephant, for that it is the part of the body that is most softest. There is also great quantity of wild Asses, and another bearing a horn between both there eyes of two foot long. I saw one being in the city of Alexandria, that is in Egypt, that a Lord Turk brought from Melcha, the which horn he said, had the like virtue against poison as had the horn of an Unicorn. Aristotle calleth these Asses with horn, Asses of India. About this Promentarie, is the departing of the way to the east and the west Indies, for they that will go to the east Indies, as to Calicut, Tabrobane, Melinde, Cannonor and others, they take on the left hand, costing the isle of S. Laurence, guiding the head of the ship to West or Southweast having the wind at west Northweaste. This country of the east Indies extendeth so far, that many judge it to be the third part of the world. Mela, and Diodorus, 
The spreading of East India.  writeth that the sea compassing these Indies, from the South to the east is of such a greatness, that with much pain they can pass though the wind be favourable in the space of forty days, but I dare affirm twice forty. This country therefore is on that side compassed with the sea, which because of that, is named, 
Sea Indique.  the Indian sea or Indique confining towards the North to the hill Cancasa, and is named India, of a River named Indus, as Tartary of the River Tartar, passing by the country of the great King Chan. It is inhabited with people of divers kinds as well in manners as in Religion. A great part is under the ohedience of Prester john, the which holdeth the Christian Faith: the others are Mahometists, as we have before showed speaking of Ethiopia: and others are Idolaters. The other way at the departing of this Caape that is on the right hand, leadeth to America, the which we followed having the wind good and favourable, nevertheless we remained a good long time on the water, as well for the distance of the places, as for the wind that afterward fell contrary, the which made us to linger even to the eighteen degree of our line, 
A sign to the Navigants that they drew near to America.  and then again it began to favour us. Before passing any farther I will show a thing that is worthy of memory. Aproching or drawing near to America, within fifty leagues we began to smell the air of the land, otherwise than the smell of the sea, with such a sweet and pleasant smell of the Trees, Herbs, Fruits, and Flowers of the country, that never balm were it the balm of egypt, that ever smell sweeter or pleasanter. Therefore I leave you to think or judge what great joy the poor Navigantes had, although that of a long time before they had eaten no bread, also being out of hope to recover any for their return. The next day which was the last day of October about nine of the clock in the morning, 
The hills of Croistmouron.  we descried the high hills of Croistmouron, although that was not the place whereas we pretended to go, wherefore costing the land a three or four Leagues, not minding to descend a land, being well informed that the inhabitants there are allied with the Portugeses, and therefore for nothing we would aboard or descend there, keeping on our way till the second of November, that we arrived to a certain place named Maqueh, 
Maqueh.  for to inquire of things, specially, of the King of Portugeses Army, whereas preparing our boats and barges, for to come a shore, and set foot on land, there appeared four old men of the country, for that the young men were gone to the war, the which old men at the first, fled away thinking we had been Portugeses, their enemies, but showing them a token of assurance in the end they came near us. Nevertheless staying there not above four and twenty hours, we hoist sail for to draw toward Caape de Fry, 
Caape de Fria.  distant from Maqueh, twenty five leagues.  
This country is marvelous fair, in times past inhabited by the Portugeses, the which gave it that name, which before was called Gekan, 
Gekan.  and there they reared a tort, minding there to remain, for because of the goodness of the place. But within a short time after, 
The manner of these Barbarous men is to eat their enemies.  for what cause I know not, but the Barbarous men of the country made them all to die, and eat them up as they use customably their enemies. And at our arrival they held two Portugeses, that they had taken in a little boat, and to them they though to do the like, to whom our coming was a pleasure, for by us they were recovered out of the hands of these cruel inhabitants. Pomponius Meleus, calleth this Caape, of which we speak, the front of Africa, for that beyond it bendeth like an Angle, and returneth by little and little into the North and East, there whereas is the end of the main land and of Africa, of the which Ptolomeus had never any knowledge.  
This Caape also is the chief or head of New Africa, the which toward Capricorn, extendeth to the mountains of Habacia and Gaiacia, the flat country is little inhabited, it is very brutish and Barbarous, yea monstrous, not that the men are so disformed as many have written, as though that in their sleep they had dreamt it, being not afraid to affirm that there are people of whom their ears hang to their heels, others with one eye in the forehead as Arismases, others without head, others having but one foot but of such a breadth, that therewith they may shadow themselves against the heat of the Sun, and they call them Monomeres, Monosceles, and Sciapodes, certain others being ignorant do write yet more strangeness yea: late writers, writing without judgement reason or experience. I will not altogether deny the monsters, which are unnatural approved by the Philosophers, and affirmed by experience. But I do impugn things that are so far out of reason: let us return to our Promentarie. There is found divers kinds of dangerous beasts, & venomous, among others the Basiliscus, hurtful to the inhabitants, also to the strangers and to those that go to fish on the Borders. This Basiliscus as every man may know, is a venomous beast, that killeth a man with his only look, the body about nine inches long, the head like fire, upon that which there is a white spot in manner of a crown, the mouth red, & the rest of the face of black colour, the which I know by the skin that I did see in the hands of an Arabian: he chaseth away all other Serpents with his hissing (as Lucian saith) for to remain alone master of the field. To be short, I may say with Sallust, that there dieth more people by wild beasts in Africa, than by any other inconvenience. This much thought I good to speak by the way.   

Of the Island Madagascar, otherwise of S. Laurence. Cap. 23.  
THE great desire that I have to let slip nothing that is necessary and profitable to the Readers, bindeth me that I think it the office and duty of a writer to treat of all things that pertain to his argument, without leaving one word out, the which thing hath stirred me up to set out in this place this Island so notable, having seventy eight degrees of longitude, no minute, and of latitude eleven degrees and thirty minutes, very well peopled, and inhabited with black wild men, (within a certain time) the which keep or hold the like manner of Religion as the Mahometists, 
The fruitfulness of the isle of S. Laurence.  some being Idolaters, but after another manner. It was first discovered by the Portugeses, and named S. Laurence, and before Madagascar in their language, rich and fruitful of all things, for that it lieth well. And also the trees bring forth fruit of themselves without planting, grafting, setting or sowing: nevertheless their fruits are as good, sweet and pleasant to eat, as if the tree had been grafted. We see in our country that the fruits of the fields, that is to wit, those that the earth bringeth forth without labouring, is rude, wild, sour, sweet, and without any good taste, the others are contrary. Therefore in this Island, is much better fruit than on the main land, although that it be under one Zone and temperateness, among the which there is one that they name in their language Chicorin, and the Tree that beareth them, is like to a feather tree of Egypt, 
Chicorin, a fruit that we name nuts of India.  or Arabia, as well in height as in leaves. The which fruit is seen here, the which the ships bring, and we call them Nuts of India, the which the Merchants hold dear, for they are very fair and proper to make bottles, for the wine being a certain time in these vessels, hath a marvelous sweet smell and pleasant, because that the fruit hath a smell like Musk. Furthermore, those that customably drink in these cups or vessels, as I was informed of a jew, are preserved from the head ache, & from the ache in the flanks, and provoketh urine. The which being noted of Pliny and others, they say that all kind of Palms, are healthful and good for many things. This fruit whereof we speak, is altogether good. The Indians & Ethiopians being visited with sickness, peel the fruit, & drink the juice or liquor, the which is white, like to milk, and therewith they are eased: also with this fruit, they make a kind of sustenance, being mingled with certain meal of dried roots or dried fish, of the which they eat after that it is well boiled together. This liquor is not to be kept long, but for the time that is may be kept, it is without comparison better for the party that taketh it, than any kind of conserves that may be found. And for the longer keeping of this fruit, they boil the liquor, the which when it is cold, they put into vessels therefore appointed: others put therein Honey, to make it pleasant to drink. The tree that beareth this fruit, is so tender, that if it be never so little touched or pricked with any sharp or pointed thing, the juice will come forth, the which is pleasant to drink, and very proper to quench thirst. All these islands that are found on the coast of Ethiopia, 
The isle of Prince.  as the Isle of Prince, having .35. degrees of longitude minute .0. and of latitude minute .0. Mopata, Zonzibar, Monfia. S. Apolin, and S. Thomas, under the line are rich and fruitful, almost all full of these Palm trees, and other trees bearing fruit, that are marvelous good. There are found divers other kind of Palm trees bearing fruit, although that not all, like those of Egypt, and in all the Indies of America and Perou, as well on the main land, as in the islands are found of seven sorts of Palm trees, all differing in fruit the one from the other. Among the which I have found some that bear Dates good to eat, 
Seven sorts of Palm trees in the Indies of America.  as those of Egypt, of Arabia, Felicia and of Syria. Moreover in this said Island, are Melons of a marvelous greatness, being as great as a man may compass or embrace, of a ruddy colour. Also there are some white, and others yellow, but much more wholesomer than ours in Europe. There are also divers kinds of good herbs and health some, among the which there is one, 
Spagnin a kind of herb.  the which they name Spagnin, the which they use for their wounds and sores, also against the biting of Vipers and other venomous beasts, for it draweth out the venom or poison. Furthermore there is found great quantity of good Saunders in the woods and groves. As touching beasts wild and tame, fishes and birds, our Island nourisheth of all sorts, and in as great quantity as is possible. In the which Island there is a strange bird, made like a puttock or ravenous foul, the bill like a Hawk, her ears hanging down to her throat, the feet very rough and full of feathers, being of a white shining colour like to silver, 
Pa a strange bird.  only the feathers on her head are blackish. This bird is named in their language Pa, in the Persian tongue Pie or Liege, and this foul liveth with Serpents, of the which there are great quantity, and of divers kinds. Also there are other kind of birds not like to those in our Country. As for beasts, there are a great number of Eliphants, and beasts with one horn being of two kinds. Of the which the one is the Ass of India, having the foot not cloven, as those that are found in the land of Persia, 
The Ass of India, Orix.  the other is named Orix or cloven foot. There are no wild Asses, but only on the dry land. Whether that there be any unicorns I know not, but being at the Indies of America, certain of the Indians came to see us above lx or lxxx leagues of: whom as we did question with of many things, they showed us that in their country there was a great number of certain great beasts, like to a kind of wild cows that they have, having one only horn in their forehead, about a fathom long, but to say that they are unicorns I am not sure, having no perfect knowledge thereof. I have before showed that this country or Island nourisheth great store of serpents & Lizards of a marvelous greatness, that which are easily taken without dangers. Also the Neigers eat these Lizards, so do the Indians of America. There are lesser ones of the bigness of a league, that are very good and delicate to eat, beside many good fish and foul, which they eat when they see time. Among other secrets, because of the multitude of fish, there are great store of Whales, out of the which the inhabitants of the Country draw Amber, the which many take to be grey Amber, a thing that is here very scant and precious. 
Grey Amber very cordial.  Also it is very hearty, and good to comfort the most notable parts of our humane body: and with the same they make a great trade with strange Merchants.   

Of our arrival to France Antarctic, otherwise named America, to the place named Caape Defria. Cap. 24.  
AFter that by divine providence, with so many travails common and ordinary to so long a Navigation, we were come to the main land, not so soon as our hearts desired, which was the tenth day of November, and in stead of taking our rest, it behoved us to discover & seek out proper places, to make or rear new sieges, being no less astonished or amazed, that the Trojans were at their arrival into Italy. Having therefore stayed but a while at the former place, where as we landed, as in the former Chapter we have showed, we spread again our sa-les, 
Caape Defria.  sailing toward Caape Defria, whereas we were well received of the Indians or wild men of the Country, showing according to their manner, evident signs of joy: nevertheless we stayed there but three days, they welcomed us one after an other, according to their custom, with this word Carainbe, which is as much to say as welcome, or ye are welcome. And for to show their good wills, 
Cahonin, a drink in America.  one of their great Morbicha Onassonb, that is to say, King, feasted us with a kind of meal made of roots, and with their Cahonin, which is a drink made of Mill is named Auaty, and it is great like a pease: there is both white and black. And for to make this drink, they let this Mill boil with other roots, the which after it is boiled, hath a colour like to Claret wine: and these Indians find it so good, that therewith they will be drunken, as men will be with wine in our Country. It is thick like to wine lées. Here I will show you a superstition that they use, to make this drink, after the strangest manner in the world. 
The superstition of these Indians in making this drink.  After that it hath boiled in carthen vessels made for that purpose, there shall come certain virgins or maidens that shall chaw or champ in their mouths this Mill being so boiled or sodden, than they shall put it into another vessel thereunto appointed, or if that a woman be called thereto, she must first abstain certain days from her husband: otherwise they think that this Byverige or drink, will never come to good perfection. This being done, they will make it boil again, until that it be purged or cleansed, as we see the wine boiling in the tun: & then within certain days after they drink thereof. Now after that they had entertained us after this sort, they brought us afterward to see a large stone of five feet long or there about, in the which appeared certain strokes of a rod or small wand, and the print of two feet, the which they affirm to be of their great Caraibe, whom they have in as great reverence, as the Turks have Mahomet, for because (say they) that he hath given them the use and knowledge of fire, likewise to plant roots, for before they lived but with leaves, as do the brute beasts. Being thus guided and led about by their King, we forgot not diligently to know and visit the place, whereas among other commodities requisite and necessary, we found that there was no fresh water to be had but far from thence, the which letted us to stay there any long time, for the which we were sorry considering the bounty of the country. 
A River of salt water.  In this place there is a River of salt water passing between two hills, separated the one from the other about a stones throw, and entereth into the country about .36. leagues. This River hath great quantity of good fish of divers kinds, chief great moulets, so that whilst we were there we saw the Indians catch of these fishes above a thousand in a short space. 
Birds with divers coloured feathers.  Furthermore there are many birds of divers kinds with strange feathers, some as red as fine scarlet, others white, ashey, and other colours. And with these feathers the wild men or Indians, make hats, and garments, either for to cover them or for beauty. When they go a warfare or when they have any skirmish with their enemies. Others also make them Gowns and Caps, 
A gown made of feathers brought from America.  after their manner: and for a manifest truth it may be known by a gown that I brought home, with the which gown I made present to Monsieur Troisteux, a gentleman of the house of my Lord, the right reverend Cardinal of Sens. Among these number of birds all differing from those of our Himisperia, there is one which they name in their language, Arat, the which is a very hearon in proportion, 
Arat a red bird.  saving that his feathers are red as Dragon's blood. Furthermore there are seen trees without number being green all the year long, of the which the most part rendereth divers kinds of gum, as well in coiour as otherwise. Also there is growing on the sea banks little vines (which is a kind of cockle of the greatness of a pease) the which the wild men bear or hang about their neck like pearls, specially when they are sick, for they say it provoketh the belly, and serveth for a purgation, some of them make powder thereof and eat it. Moreover they say, that it is good to stay a bloody flux, the which seemeth to me contrary to his purging virtue. Nevertheless it may have both, because of the diversity of his substances. And therefore the women bear it more oftener at their necks and arms than the men. Likewise there is found in that country, and on the sea borders on the sand great plenty, and a kind of fruit that the Spaniards name sea beans, being round like a Teston, but more greater and more thicker of a ruddy colour, so that if you saw them you would say they were Artificial: the people of the country set nought by them, nevertheless the Spaniards carry them into their country, and the Women and Maidens, commonly hang them about their neck, being set in gold or silver, the which they say hath virtue against the colic, the pain in the head, and others. To be short, this place is pleasant and fruitful, and they that enter farther into that country shall find a flat country, covered with strange kind of trees, the like are not in Europe, being also beautified with fair Rivers and springs and very clear waters: among the which there is a fish very monstrous for a fresh water fish, this fish is of the largeness and greatness of a herring, armed from the head to the tail, like a little beast of the earth, named Taton, the head without comparison greater than the body, having three bones in the chine, and very good to eat, at the least the Indians eat of them, and they name it in their language Tamonhata.   

Of the River of Ganabara otherwise called janaria, and how that the country whereas we arrived, was named France Antarctic. Cap. 25.  
Having no time to remain any longer at Cape de Fria, for the reason before showed, it behoved us to departed, so the we weighed our anchors, and hoist up sails to sail to some other place, to the great displeasure of the Indians of that Country, that thought we would have stayed a longer time, following the promise that we had made them at our first arrival. Therefore we sailed the space of four days until the tenth, that we found this great river of Ganabara, 
Ganabara so called, because of the likeness to the lake.  being so named of the inhabitants of the Country, for that it is like to the lake, or otherwise janaria, by those that first did discover it, being distant from the place from whence we departed .30. leagues: and by the way, the wind became contrary. Now therefore that we had passed many little islands on the sea coast, and the strait of our river being about a gun shot broad, we were determined to enter in at that place or strait, and with our barks to take land, whereas incontinently the inhabitants received us very courteously, and as having knowledge of our coming, they had reared fair Palace according to the manner of the Country, strewed & decked with leaves, and boughs of trees, and sweet smelling herbs, by a manner of honour, showing of their part great signs of joy, invitating us to do the like. The most eldest which are as Kings and governors, received us one after an other, and with an admiration they saluted us in their language according to their manner, and then they conducted us to the place that they had prepared for us, to the which place they brought us victuals of all sides, as meal made of a root, which they name Manihot, 
Manihot a rote that the wild men use to eat.  and other great & little roots, very good and pleasant to eat, and other things according to the Country. So that being there arrived, after that we had prayed and given thanks, (as the true Christian ought to do, to him that had pacified the Sea and the winds) to be short, to him that had showed & given us the mean to accomplish this voyage, we rested us upon the green grass: as the Trojans did after so many shipwrecks and tempests when that they met with the good Lady Dido, but Virgil saith that they had good old Wine, and not fair water. After that we had rested there the space of two months, & viewed as well the islands as the main land: the Country was named far about, the which by us was discovered France Antarctic, whereas we found no place so proper and well standing for to rear or edify a hold, as a little Island, containing only one league of circuit, lying almost at the original beginning of this river which we have before spoken of. The which Island with the hold that we there edified, was named Villegagnon. This Island is very pleasant, 
A pleasant and comfortable Island, in the which the Lord of Villegagnon fortified himself.  for that therein groweth Ceader trees, and many sweet smelling Trees that are green throughout the year. In deed there is no fresh water to be had near hand: nevertheless the Lord of Villegagnon fortified himself there, for to be sure and out of danger of the wild men that will be soon offended. And also against the Portugeses, lest they should at any time make thither, so that he strengthened himself in the Island, as well as was possible. Now as for victuals the Indians or wild men brought us thither such as the land or country bringeth forth: As fish or Venison and other wild beasts, for they nourish them privily, as we do here a dog or a cat. Also they brought us meal of those roots of which we have before showed, having neither bread nor wine. The which victels we had for a small value, as little knives, looking glasses, & nets to take fish. Moreover among other things noted in this river, near to the strait, there is a lake that proceedeth out of a high stone or rock, 
A rock from whence proceedeth a lake.  being of a marvelous height, being to look to, as high as the clouds and very large, the which is a thing almost uncredible. This rock is environed or compassed with the Sea.   

Of the fish that is in this great River before named. Cap. 26.  
BEfore that I proceed any further, I mean to treat particularly of the fish that is found in the fair River of Ganabara, otherwise named janaria, which are in great abundance, 
Oysters having pearls.  among the which there are oysters, of which the shell shineth like fine pearls, that which oysters, the wild men do commonly eat with other little fish that the children fish: and these oysters are like to those that bear pearls, of the which also there are found in that country, 
The manner of these wild men to take fish.  but not so fine as those of Calicut, and other places in the east. Moreover these wild men fish for other great fish, of the which there is great plenty. Their use and manner to take them is, that they being naked in the water, be it fresh or salt, shoot at them with their arrows, to the which they are very expert, than they draw them out of the water, with a cord made of cotton or of the pill of some tree, or else the fish being dead, floateth of himself above the water. Among these fishes there is one very monstrous, 
Panapana a kind of fish.  the which they name in their language Panapana, like to a Dog fish, the skin whereof, is very rough: this fish hath six holes or spurging on each side of the throat like to a Lampron, the head monstrous, and the eyes almost at the end of the head, so that from the one eye to the other, there is distant a foot and a half: this fish is geason, 
A kind of thornebacke.  notwithstanding the flesh is not so excellent to eat, for it hath the taste of a Dog fish. Moreover, there is in this flood or river, a great multitude of thornebacke & skaate fish, but not like to ours in Europe, they are twice as large and more longer, the head flat and long, at the end of which there is two horns, being a foot long a piece, and between these horns are the eyes, and her tail is two foot long, and slender like a Rat's tail: the wild men of the country will not eat of them for no good, neither of the Torterel. For they imagine and think that even as this fish is slow in swimming, it would also make them heavy and slow, by the which means they might be taken of their enemies, so that they could not run, nor follow nimbly the course. 
Inevonea.  They name this fish in their language Inevonia. The fish of this river generally is good to eat, so is the sea fish that coasteth that country, but not so delicate as the fish under the line, & in other places of the sea. I will not forget nor leave out now that I am in purpose of fish, to show a marvelous thing, and worthy of memory. In this land or country about the river before named, are trees growing on the sea borders or brinks, covered with oysters always to the very top: you shall understand, that when the sea swelleth, it casteth the flood very high, and far on the land twice in .24. hours, so that the water covereth oftentimes these trees, so that the oysters being brought in by these springtydes, take hold, 
Trees bearing oysters.  and close against the branches, being of an uncredible multitude, of the which when the wild men mind to eat, they cut the branches of the tree being so charged and laden with oysters, as we do here a branch of a pear tree, being laden with pears, the which they eat more commonly than greater oysters that are in the sea, for because (say they) that they are more wholesomer and have a better taste, and that they will not engender fevers, so soon as the others.   

Of America generally. Cap. 27.  
Now that I have treated particularly of the places whereas we did most remain after that we had taken land & chief of the whereas the Sieur of Villagagnon, doth inhabit with other French men even at this day. Likewise of this most notable river which we name janaria, the circumstances of the places, for that they lie in a land discovered and found out in our time, there resteth now to wright that, the which we have learned & known for the time that we remained ther. 
America not known of the Cosmographers in times past.  It is most true that this land was not known to the writers in times past, neither yet to the ancient Cosmographers that have divided the earth to be inhabited in three parts, Europa, Asia, and Africa, of the which they only had intelligence, but I am sure that they had no knowledge thereof, for if they had known it, they would have noted it for the fourth part of the world, for it is much more greater than any of the others. This land by good right is called America, taking name of him that first found it out, being named Americus Vespucia, 
Americus Vespucia did first find out America.  who was a very expert man in the Art of Navigation & in other high enterprises. But since him, divers men have discovered the greatest part lying towards Temistitan unto the Country of the Giants, and the strait of Magellan. Why it should be named India I know not, but the East country that is named India, hath taken his name of that notable flood or river Indus, the which is very far from America. It shall therefore suffice to call it America, or France Antarctic. It lieth between the two Tropikes even beyond Capricornus, the west side extending towards Temistitan and Moluques, 
The lying of America.  toward the South to the strait of Magellan, and on both sides of the West sea and peaceable: true it is that near to Darienna and Furna, this Country is very strait, for the sea on both sides entereth very far into the land. Now will I write of that part which we have most known and frequented, which lieth about the Tropic Brumal, and yet beyond that it hath been and is inhabited at this day, besides the Christians that have dwelled there since Americus time, 
What the inhabitants of America are.  with a marvelous strange wild and brutish people, without Faith, without Law, without Religion, and without any civility: but living like brute beasts, as nature hath brought them out, eating herbs and roots, being always naked as well women as men, until such time as being more visited and frequented of Christians, they may peradventure leave this brutish living, and learn to live after a more civil and human manner. And therefore we ought greatly to praise our maker that hath illuminated our hearts, not leaving us so brutish as these poor wild men. As touching the ground or land of America, 
America is a very fruitful country.  it is very fruitful in trees bearing very excellent fruit without labour or seed. And it is not to be doubted, that if the land were tilled, it would bring forth very good things, considering how it doth lie with fair mountains and dales, 
What part of America is inhabited by the Spaniards and Portugeses.  rivers bearing very good fish, fat Islands likewise firm and main land. At this day the Spaniards and the Portugeses do inhabit and dwell in a great part thereof, the Entilles on the West sea, Moluques on the peaceable sea, from the main land, unto Dareiena, Parias, and Palmaria, the others more toward the South as in the land of Bressill, so much thought I good to write of this Country in general.   

Of the Americans Religion Cap. 28.  
WE have before showed how that these poor people live without Religion, and without Law, the which is very true, but there is no creature living that is partaker of reason (so blinded) seeing the heaven, the earth, the Sun, the Moon so ordained, the sea, & the things that are daily seen, but that will judge these things to be made by the hand of some greater worckemaister than man. And therefore there is no Nation be they never so brutish, but that by their own natural reason have some religion, and some cogitation of God: they all therefore confess, that there is some power and sovereignty: but what a one it is, few there are that know it, and that hath caused the division of Religion. 
The Religion of the Americans.  Some have acknowledged the Sun for sovereign, others the Moon, some others the Stars, & others otherwise, as Histories do recite. Now to our purpose, these wild men of America, make mention and tell of a great Lord, whom they name in their language Toupan, 
Toupan.  the which they say is above, and maketh it rain and thunder, but they have not the mean to pray nor to honour him at one time or other, neither yet no place appointed. If one show them of God, as I have many times done, they will give an attentive ear thereunto with an admiration, and they will ask if it be not that Prophet that hath taught them to plant their great roots, 
Hetich roots.  that they name Hetich. And they have heard say of their fathers, that before they had the knowledge of the roots, they lived but with herbs and wild roots, like brute beasts: there was they say in their country a great Charaiba, 
Charaiba.  that is to say a Prophet, that which came to one of their young maidens, & gave her certain great roots named Hetich, showing her, that she should cut them in pieces, and then plant them in the earth, the which she did, and since they have always continued from father to son: the which roots have so well prospered, that now they have so great abundance that they eat little other food, and it is as common with them as bread is with us. Of this root I find two kinds of one greatness: the first when it is sodden or boiled becometh yellow, & the other white, and these two kinds have the leaf like to a mallow, it never beareth seed, and therefore these wild men do plant again this root, being cut in pieces, so that they being replanted multiply exceedingly. When that this country was first discovered and found on, 
America first discovered in the year. 1497  as before we have showed, which was in the year. 1497. by the commandment of the King of Castilia, these wild men being amazed to see the Christians in the order as they had never before seen the like: likewise their manner, gesture and doings, they esteemed them as Prophets and honoured them as Gods, until they perceived that they became sick to die, and to be subject to the like passions that they were, than they began to dispraise them, and to entreat them worse than they were accustomed as they that afterwards went thither Spaniards and Portugeses: so that if they be angered, they force no more to kill a Christian and to eat him, than if it were one of their enemies: but this is in certayned places, and specially among the Cannibals, that live with none other thing, 
The Cannibals are a people that live with humane flesh.  as we do here with beef and mutton. Also they have left calling them Carabes or half Gods, and now they call them as in reproach Mahira, the which was the name of one of their ancient Prophets, whom they did detest and abhor. As touching Toupan, they esteem him great, not resting in one place, but going about here and there, and they say that he declareth his greatest secrets to their Prophets. This therefore shall suffice for the Religion of these wild men, the which I knew and understood by a french expositor that had dwelled there ten years, who understood perfectly the language.   

The manner and custom of the living of these Americans as well men as women. Cap. 29.  
WE have here before showed speaking of Africa, the which we costed in our Navigation, that the Barbarians and Ethiopians, and others in India went customably naked excepting their privy parts, the which they cover with certain veils or aprons of cotton, or beasts skins, the which without comparison is more tolerable than in our Americans, 
How these Americans live.  that live all naked even as they come out of their mother's womb, as well men as women without any shame. If you would know whether they do it of indigency, or for the extreme heat, I answer that they may make themselves clothing of cotton as well as to make them beds thereof to rest in, either they might clothe them with beasts skins, as well as those of Canada, for they have great plenty of wild and tame, easy to be taken. They have this opinion, that being naked and without apparel, they are more nimbler and better disposed to all kind of exercises.  
Moreover if any time they be clad with any thine and light shirt, the which they have peradventure gotten by great pain: when they meet with their enemies they put it of before they set hand to their weapon (whose weapons) are a bow and Arrows, for they think that this garment or shirt would take away their dexterity in their fight, also that they could not easily fly nor remove their joints before their enemies: yea they say that they should be taken of their enemies by such garments. And therefore they had rather be naked, so ignorant are they and ill advised. Nevertheless they are very desirous of gowns, shirts, hats, and other clothing, and they esteem them so precious and costly, that they will rather let them mar & take harm, than once to wear them, lest that by that means they should hurt them. In deed sometimes they will put them on when that they remain at home, drinking and making good cheer after the death of their parents and friends, or in some solemnity after that they have obtained victory of their enemies. Moreover if that they have on any garment, they will put it of when that they sit down on the ground, and cast it on their shoulders for fear of soiling of it. There are old men & women among them, that hide their privy parts with leaves. Some have said that in Europe when it was first inhabited, the men and women went all naked, only their secret parts covered, as we read of our first parents. Nevertheless in that time the men lived longer than they do in our age, being not subject to so many diseases as we are, so that they have affirmed that all men ought to go naked as Adam and Eve our first parents did, when they were in Paradise. As touching this nakedness, we find it not by God's commandment, I know that there are certain heretics called Adamians, that maintain this nakedness, the which sect lived all naked, as these Americans of which we speak. 
Adamians a kind of heretics, that maintained nakedness.  And they assembled in their sinagogs for to pray, all naked, and by this ye may know their opinion to be false, for before the sin of Adam & Eve, as it is showed in the scripture, they were all naked, but afterward God gave them garments of leather to cover their nakedness, as the Canadians use at this day. 
The opinion of the Turlupins, and the Philosophers of Ciniques, concerning nakedness.  The which error others have maintained, as the Turlupins and the Philosophers named Ciniques, that which allege for their reasons, & do teach it publicly, that a man ought not to hide that, which nature hath given him. By this ye may see that these heretics are more impertinent, having had the knowledge of things than our Americans. The Romans though they were very strange in their livings, yet they never remained naked. As touching the statues and images, they were made and reared up in their temples all naked, as Titus Livius showeth, having neither hat nor coif upon their heads: as we find of Caius Caesar, who being bald before, was wont to bring his hair that grew behind, 
julius Ca●●● did wear a cap against the order of the Romans.  forward for to cover his forehead: and therefore he had licence to wear a cap or coif on his head, for to hide that part of his head that was bald. So much thought I good to speak, treating of the wild men of America. Moreover I have seen those of Perou use to wear little garments made of Cotten after their manner. Also Pliny showeth, that in the farther part of the East Indies, (for he never had no knowledge of America:) on the borders of Gangis, there is a kind of people clad with broad leaves, which people are of a little stature. I will say moreover as touching our wild men, that they have a very fearful look, bold of speech, their language is short and obscure, and yet more easier to learn than the Turkishs' speech, and others of the East parts, the which I may affirm by experience. They take great pleasure to speak distinctly, and to vaunt of the victories and triumphs that they have had over their enemies. The elders among them will keep their promiss, and are more faithful than the young men, & yet they are all subject to theft, not that they steal one from another, but if they find a christian or a stranger, they will rifle him (of their gold & silver they will take none) for they have not the knowledge nor use thereof, but their garments. They use great threatenings, specially when that they are angered, not only to smite but to kill. Though they be uncivil, yet are they prompt & ready to do one service, yea for a little reward, even to guide a stranger l or lx leagues into the Country for fear of difficulties and dangers, with other charitable and honest deeds (more than among Christians.) Now these wild men being naked, have a tawny colour, 
The stature and natural colour of the americans.  the reason thereof I leave to the judgement of natural Philosophers, & why they are not so black as the Neigers of Ethiopia. To the rest, well form and proportioned of their members, but their eyes are evil made, that is, black and louring, and their look like to the look of a wild beast: they are of a high stature, well disposed, quick & nimble, seldom grieved with sickness, unless they be hurt with arrows in the war.   

The manner of their eating and drinking. Cap. 30.  
IT is easy to be known, 
The wild me live without laws.  that these wild men of America have no more civility in their eating, than in other things, for as they have no laws to take the good, & to eschew the evil, even so they eat of all kinds of meats at all times and hours, without any other discretion. In deed they are of themselves superstitious, they will eat no beast nor fish, that is heavy or slow in going, but of all other light meats in running & flying, as Venison and such like, for because that they have this opinion, that heavy meats will hurt and annoy them when they should be assailed of their enemies. Also they will eat no salt meats, nor yet permit their children to eat any. And when they see the Christian eat salt meats, 
The americans detest and abhor salt meats.  they reprove them therefore as a thing impertinent, saying that such meats will shorten their lives: their ordinary meats are roasted after their manner, as Rats of divers kind, and great ones, a certain kind of Toads greater than ours, Cocodrils and others that they roast all whole, with the skin and the bowels, and this they use without any difficulty, yea these Cocodrils and great Lizards as great as a pig of a month old, 
The Lezard of America.  the which is a fine meat (as they say that have eat thereof.) These Lizards of America are so privy, that they will come near unto you, and take their repast, if that you will take it without fear or difficulty. Their flesh is like a Chickens flesh, & they kill them with shooting at them with their arrows. The meats that they boil, are Oysters and other shell fish of the sea. In taking of their food, they observe no hour, but all times and hours that they feel themselves to have a stomach or appetite, be it in the night after their first sleep, they will rise to eat, and then lay them down to sleep. In their repast they keep a marvelous silence, 
How these Americans keep silence at their meat.  the which is more to be commended, than amongst us that babble and talk at our tables, they do séethe and roast very well their meat, and eat it measurably and not rashly, mocking us that devour in stead of eating: they will not drink when they eat, nor eat when they drink, so that they will forbear drink a whole day. When they make their great banquets and solemnities, as when they have obtained some great victory on their enemies, than they will sit drinking a whole day without eating. They make drinks of great Mill white and black, the which they call in their language Auaty. 
Auaty a drink.  Nevertheless after that they have sat drinking, being once departed the one from the other, they will eat such as they can find. The poorest sort live more with sea fish, & other like meats than with flesh, they that are far from the sea, do fish in rivers. Also they have divers kinds of fruits, as nature bringeth them forth, & yet they live long in health and well disposed. Here you must note that our elders in times past lived with fish. The laws of Triptolomeus, as Xenophon writeth, did defend and forbid the athenians the use of flesh. Therefore it is no strange thing for to live with fish. first in our Europe, and before that the ground was tilled, men lived more hardly without flesh or fish, having not the mean to use them, and yet notwithstanding they were stronger, and lived the longer, 
The more delicate a man is nourished the less strength he hath.  being nothing so feminate as now in our age. Now these wild men use flesh and fish, as we have before showed. Some lie and eat in their beds, at the least they sit and eat in their beds, specially the master or chief of the family shallbe in his bed: and the others about him doing him service, as if nature had taught them to do honour & reverence to the aged.  
Moreover they have this honesty, that the first that hath taken any great pray, be it on water or land they will distribute to every one specially to Christians, if there be any, and they will request and desire them freely to eat thereof, esteeming it a great injury if you refuse it. Also so soon as you enter into their lodgings, they will ask you in their language Marabisser, what is thy name? and you may be well assured, that if they once know it, they will never forget it, their memory is so good. Were it Cyrus the King of Persia, Cyneas legate to the King Pyrrhus, Metridates, nor Ces●●, the which Pliny writeth of, to have been of so good a memory, and after you have answered them, they will ask you, Marapipo, what wilt thou say? and many other things.   

Against the opinion of those that think these wild men to be all hairy. Cap. 31.  
FOR because that many have this foolish opinion, that those people, whom we call wild men, as they live in the woods and fields almost like to brute beasts, so in like manner they are beary all over their bodies, as a Lion, a Bear, or such like. Also they are so pictured and painted in their tablets & clothes. To be short, in setting out a wild man, they set him out all hairy, even from the head to the foot, the which is altogether false and untrue. I have known some so obstinate, that they would affirm it with an oath, as those that had seen it of a truth. As for me I know and affirm the contrary, for that I have seen it. The wild men as well of the East Indies, as of America, come forth of their mother's womb as fair and as well polished as ours of Europe. And if that hair grow by succession of time on any part of their bodies, as it doth to us and others in what part of the body so ever it be, they scratch it of with their nails, saving only the hair of their heads, so greatly they do detest and abhor it, as well women as men. And the hairs that grow on their brows, 
A kind of herb that cutteth like steel.  the women do shave it of with a certain herb that cutteth like a razor: this herb is like to Sage or jouncke, that groweth by the water side. As touching the hair Amatory, and their beards, they pluck it of, as well as of the rest of the body. Within these few years they have found the mean to make little pincers, with the which they pull of their hair, for since that they have been frequented of Christians, they have learned the way how to forge Iron. And therefore believe not hereafter the common opinion of the painters nor their doings in this point, for they have liberty to paint things to their own discretion, even as poets have to forge and invent lies. If it should chance that a child should come forth of his mother's womb hairy, & that the hairs should grow & increase all over his body, as the like hath been seen in France, this were an accident of nature, as if a child should be borne with two heads or such like. 
A monstrous form of a child covered with scales.  These are not things so wonderful and strange, considering that Physicians can show the reason. I have seen a child in Normandy, covered with scales like a carp. These are imperfections of nature, according to the Gloze on the xiij Chapter of Esay, showing of certain monsters having the shape of men named Satyrs, living in the woods, hairy like wild beasts. And of this the writings of Poets are full of satires, Fauns, Nymphs, Dryads, Hamadryades, Orcades, and other kind of monsters, the which at this day are not to be found, as they were in times past: by the which means the Devil sought to deceive man, changing himself into a thousand similitudes and likenesses. But now that our Lord jesus of his mercy hath revealed himself to us, these wicked spirits have been chased and driven out, and hath given us power to resist them, as witnesseth the holy scripture. Moreover in Africa are to be seen at this day certain monsters disformed, for the reason that we have before showed in the beginning of this book, with others that at this present I will leave out. Further more as touching these americans, they make their hair grow as Monks were wont to do, the which passeth not their ears, they cut their hair of before, for this occasion as I have been informed, for if they should wear their hair long before, and their beard long, it should be occasion that they should fall into the hands of their enemies, which would take them by their hair and by their beard. Also they say that their ancestors have showed them, that to have their head and beard thus cut and shaven, causeth them to have a marvelous great audacity and courage. It would be thought, that if these wild men have frequented Asia, 
Abantes a people in Asia.  they should have learned this of the Abantes, the first found this invention of shaving or cutting of hear. For to be as they say, more valiant and hardy among their enemies. Also Plutarch showeth in the life Theseus, that the custom of the Athenians was, 
The manner of the Athenians.  that they that were constituted as tribunes in their common wealth, were bound to offer the locks or hear of their heads to the God in the Island of Delphos, so that Theseus having shaved the hear of, on the forparte of his head was thereto provoked by the Abantes, a people of Asia. Moreover we find, that Alexander the great, caused his men to take the Macedonians by the hear of their head, and by their beard: for at that time there was no barbers for to poll and shave, and the first barbers that were seen in Italy, came out of Sicily. This much as touching the hear of these Americans.   

Of a tree named in the Americans tongue Genipat, with which they make colours. Cap. 32.  

Genipat a tree, and the fruit.  GEnipat is a tree, the which the wild men of America do greatly esteem for the fruit that it beareth being of the trees name, not that it is good to eat, but profitable to other things that they apply it too. It is like of greatness and of colour to our peach, of the juice whereof, they make a certain colour, with the which sometimes they colour all their bodies. The poor brutish men not knowing the mean to draw out the juice or liquor of this fruit, are constrained to chew it, as if they would swallow it down, 
The manner how to make colour of this tree Genipat.  than they take it out & wring juice out with their hands, as you would wring water out of a sponge, the which liquor or juice is as clear as crystal, so that when they are minded to make any enterprise or feat, or to visit one another, and to make some solemnity, they wet all their bodies with this juice or liquor, 
The manner of these wild men to colour their bodies.  and the more it drieth upon them, the more perfecter colour it attaineth. This colour is between an Azure and a black, and never in his perfect colour, until it have been the space of two days upon their bodies, & so these poor people be as well content with that, as we be with Velvet or Satin, or any other costly garment when we go to a feast or a wedding. The women do more oftener colour themselves therewith than men. Furthermore ye shall note in this place, that if the men are minded to go ten or twelve leagues off to drink or make good cheer with their friends, they will pill some kind of Tree, where within shall be red, yellow, or some other colour and they will stamp it very small, and then they will take gum out of another tree, the which they name Vsub, 
Vsub a kind of Gum.  with the which they will rub all their body over, although it be good for wounds and sores, as I have seen by experience, & then upon this Gum they will pour of these colours before showed. Others in steed or for want of these trees or colours, will sow many little feathers together of all colours, some as red as fine scarlet, and others of others colours, & about their heads they will have garlands of these feathers maruelloves fair. This tree Genipat hath leaves like to a nut tree, and the fruit groweth at the end of the branches one upon another on a strange fashion and manner. There is also another tree named Genipat, of which the fruit is greater, and good to eat. 
another tree named Genipat.  There is another secret herb which they name in their language Petun, the which most commonly they bear about them, for that they esteem it marvelous profitable for many things, this herb is like to our Buglos. 
Petun an herb, and how it is used.  They gather this herb very charyly, and dry it within their little cabanes or houses. Their manner to use it, is this, they wrap a quantity of this herb being dry in a leaf of a Palm tree which is very great, & so they make rolls of the length of a candle, & than they fire the one end, and receive the somke thereof by their nose and by their mouth. The say it is very wholesome to cleanse & consume the superfluous humours of the brain. Moreover being taken after this sort, it keepeth the parties from hunger & thirst for a time, therefore they use it ordinarily. Also when they have any secret talk or counsel among themselves, they draw this smoke, & then they speak. The which they do customably one after another in the war, whereas it is very needful. The women use it by no means. If that they take too much of this perfume, it will make them light in the head, as the smell or taste of strong wine. The christians that do now inhabit there, are become very desirous of this perfume, although that the first use thereof is not without danger, before that one is accustomed thereto, for this smoke causeth sweats & weakness, even to fall into a Syncope, the which I have tried in myself. And it is not so strange as it seemeth, for there are many other fruits that offend the brain, though that the taste of them is pleasant & good to eat. 
A fountain at Lyncestis, and his property.  Pliny showeth, that in Lyncestis there is a fountain that maketh the people drunken, that take thereof, likewise an other of Paphlagonia. Some think this not to be true, but altogether false, the which we have spoken as touching this herb, as though nature could not give such power to things, yes truly much more greater, also to beasts, according to the Countries and Regions. Wherefore should it then leave this country void of such a benefit, being temperate without comparison more than others? And if there be any not content of this our witnessing or affirmation, let him read Herodita, which in his second book, maketh mention of a people in Africa, living only with herbs. Apian rehearseth that the Parthians being banished & driven out of their Country by Marcus Antonius, lived with a certain herb that took away their memory: nevertheless they had opinion that it did nourish them, though that in a short time after they died. Therefore ought not the story of our Petun be found strange.   

Of a tree named Paquovere. Cap. 33.  
seeing that we are now come to the rehearsal of trees of our America, I think it good to set forth some, not for the amplifying of this work, but for the great virtue and secretness of things, and for that there is found no such in our Europe, neither in Asia nor in Africa. Therefore this tree that the wild men name Paquovere, is peradventure the wonderfullest tree that ever was seen. 
The description of a tree named Paquovere.  It is not more higher from the ground to the branches, than a fathom or there about, and of greatness as much as a man may gripe with both his hands, when that it is come to his full groweth. And the tree is so tender, that it may be easily cut with a knife. As touching the leaves, they are in breadth two foot, and of length a fathom, a foot and iiij. fingers, the which I affirm and assure of a truth. I have seen almost of that kind, in Egypt and in Damascus returning from jerusalem. Notwithstanding, the leaves are not half so great, as those of America, likewise there is great difference in the fruit, for the fruit is a good foot long, I mean the longest sort, & great like a Cucumber much like unto it, as touching the proportion: this fruit which they name in their language Pacova, 
Pacova the fruit.  is very good when it is come to his ripeness, & of a good relish. The wild men gather them before they be ripe, which fruit being gathered, they bear into their lodgings, as we do our fruit. It groweth on the tree by clusters, thirty. or xl together, and close to another upon little branches near to the trunk. And that which is more to be marveled at, this tree never beareth fruit but once. The greatest part of these wild men that dwell far within the country, do nourish themselves with this fruit a good part of the year, and of an other fruit that cometh up in the fields, which they name Hoyriri, the which to look on, would be judged to grow on some tree. Notwithstanding it groweth in a certain herb that beareth leaf like to a Palm, as well in the length as in largeness, it groweth in the midst of the leaves very round, & within it be little Nuts, of the which the kernel is white & good to eat, saving that overmuch thereof, as well as of other things, hurteth the brain. The which force & strength is in the Coriander seed, if it be not trimmed and dighted. Likewise if the other were so dressed & trimmed, it would take away this vice. Notwithstanding the americans eat thereof, chief the little children. The fields are very full within two leagues of Cap de Fria, near to the great marish grounds that we passed, after that we had set foot on land at our return. This much will I say by the way, that beside the fruit that we saw by the way, we found a Cocodril dead of the greatness of a good calf, that was come out of the marshes, & had been there killed, for they eat the flesh of them, 
A dead Cocodrill. jacareabson.  also of great Lizards, of the which we have before showed: they name them in their language jacareabson, & they are greater than those of Nill. The people of the Country say, that there is a marsh being a.u. leagues compass, on the side of Pernomeri, distant from the line ten degrees towards the Cannibals, whereas there are certain Crocodrils as great as oxen, that cast out a mortal smoke by their mouth, in such sort, that if ye come near them, they will go near to kill you, as they have heard tell of their ancestors. In the place whereas groweth this fruit of which we speak, are a great number of Hares like to ours, but not so great, nor yet like in colour. There is also found another little beast named Agoutin, as great as a Hare, the hair like to a wild Boar bristled, the head like the head of a great Rat, the ears and the moosel like to a Hare or Wat, the feet cloven like to a Hog, and the tail not above a finger length, they live with fruits: also the wild men nourish them for their pleasure, their flesh is very good for to eat.   

How these americans or wild men do disforme them sleeves, esteeming it a great glory. Cap. 34.  
IT is not sufficient for these wild men to be naked, to paint their bodies, & to scratch and pluck of their hair: but also for to make themselves more disformed, they pierce their mouths being young with a sharp and pointed herb, so that the hole increaseth & groweth as their body, for they put therein a certain kind of fish, having the skin very hard, of which fish the greater end is within, & the lesser without (on the neither lip.) When that they are great, ready to be married, they put into these holes great stones, being much like to the colour of an Emerald, the which they do so esteem, 
A stone of the colour of an Emerald.  that it is not easy to recover any of them, without some great reward or present, for they are very rare and scant in their Country. Their neighbours & nigh friends bring these stones from an high Mountain, that is in the country of the Cannibals, the which they polish with an other stone for the purpose, so runningly, that it is not possible for the best & most expertest workman that is, to do it better. And I think there might be found in this foresaid hill very Emeralds: for I have seen of these stones, that you could not discern from Emeralds. These americans as I say, do disfigure themselves after this sort, & do disforme & mishap themselves with these holes & stones in their faces: in which they take as great delight & pleasure as a Lord or gentleman will do in a rich & precious chain of gold or some other jewel: so that among them that beareth the most, is esteemed their King or greatest Lord, and not only on their lips and mouth, but also on both sides the cheek: these stones that the men carry, are as broad as an Angel or sovereign of gold, and as thick as a finger breadth, which letteth their speech, so that one can scant understand their speech, for they speak as though their mouth were full of meat: when these stones are taken out, if that they speak, you shall see them slaver at these holes, the which is a filthy and ugly fight to behold. Also when these brutish beasts are disposed to mock, they will put their tongues out of these holes, the women & maidens are not so disformed. In deed they have hanging at their ears pretty little stones and shells, that they have in the sea, also bracelets of certain shells. They esteem much little beads of glass, that the frenchmen have carried thither. Because of their disformitie & changing of their natural colour, these men & women are for the most part black, for that they colour themselves with colours that they make of the fruit of trees, as we have before showed, they colour one an other. The women they colour & deck the men, we do not read that other nations have done the like. We find that the Scythians going to the funerals of their friends, did paint their faces with black. The women of Turkey do paint their nails with colours red & blue, thinking by this to be more fairer, but not the rest of their body. I will not here forget that these women of America do not only paint their children's faces with black, but also their bodies, and that with divers colours, specially of one colour like to a vernishing, that which colour will continue the space of four days, & with the same colour the women paint their legs, so that for to look a far of, you would judge them to be hosed with fine black kersey.   

Of visions, dreams and illusions, that these Americans have, and of the persecution that they receive of wicked spirits. Cap. 35.  
IT is a wonderful thing, that these poor men although they be not reasonable, for that they are deprived from the right use of reason, and from the knowledge of God, 
Why the americans are tormented of wicked spirits  are subject to many fantastical illusions & persecutions of wicked spirits. We have said that before the coming of our saviour jesus Christ, we were in like manner vexed: for the devil studieth only to seducte that creature that hath no knowledge of God. Even so these poor americans do oftentimes see a wicked spirit, sometimes in one form, 
Aguan a evil spirit in their language.  & sometimes in an other, the which they name in their language Agnan, the which spirit persecuteth them day and night, not only their soul, but also their body, beating them, and doing them much injury, so that you shall hear them make a pitiful cry, saying in their language, (if there be any christian by or near,) seest thou not Agnan the beateth me, defend me if thou wilt that I shall serve thee, and cut thy wood: for many times they will travail to the Brasel wood for a small reward. Therefore in the night they will not go out of their cabens or houses, without bearing fire with them, the which they say, is a sovereign defence and remedy against their enemy. And I thought that it had been a Fable when it was showed me first, but I have seen by experience this wicked spirit to be driven out by a christian, in invocating & naming jesus Christ. Also the people of Guinea, & of Canada are likewise tormented, chief in the woods, whereas they have many visions, and they call this spirit in their language Grigri. 
Grigri.  Furthermore these wild men of America being this disprovided of reason, 
The opinion of the wild men, as touching their natural dreams.  and of the knowledge of verity, are easy to fall into many foolish errors. They note & observe their dreams diligently, thinking that all that they have dreamt, should suddenly come to pass. If they have dreamt that they shall have victory of their enemies, or to be vanquished and overcome, you shall not persuade them the contrary, but they believe it assuredly, as we do the Gospel. Of a truth there be Philosophers which hold opinion, that some dreams will naturally come to pass, according to the humours that reign, or other dispositions of the body, as to dream of fire, water, black things & such like. But to believe and affirm the other dreams, as those of these Americans, it is a thing impertinent, & contrary to the true religion of jesus Christ: and to my judgement so are all other, Macrobius in the dream of Scipion, saith that some dreams come to pass, & happen because of the vanity of the dreamers. Other dreams come of things that we have too much apprehended. Others beside our americans, do give credit to dreams, as the Lacedæmonians, the Persians & certain others. These wild men have an other strange opinion which is an abuse, they esteem some among them to be very Prophets, whom they name in their language Pages, 
Pages. Prophets.  to whom they declare their dreams, & the others do interpret them, & they hold opinion that they tell truth. These may be compared to Philon the first interpreter of dreams, & to Trogus Pompeius, that therein was very excellent. I might here bring in many things of dreams & divinations, and what dreams are true or no. Likewise of their kinds & the causes thereof, as we have been instructed of our elders. But for that it is repugnant to our religion, and for that defence is made to give thereto any credit, we will leave it, and lean only to the holy scripture, and to that which is commanded us, & therefore I will speak thereof no more: but sure I am that for one that hitteth right, there are a numbered contrary. Let us return to our wild men of America, they bear great reverence to these Prophets, otherwise named Pages or Charaibes, which is to say, half Gods, 
Pages or Charaibes.  and they are truly idolaters, even as were the ancient Gentiles.   

Of false Prophets and Magicians, that are in this country of America, the which invocate and call upon wicked spirits, and of a tree named Ahovai. Cap. 36.  
THis people being so far from the truth, beside the persecution that they receive of wicked spirits, their errors and dreams, yet are they so far out of reason that they worship the devil, by the mean of some of his ministers named Pages, of the which sort we have spoken already. These Pages or Charaibes, 
What these pages and Charaibes are and of their deceit.  are men of a wicked life, the which are given to serve the devil for to deceive their neighbours. Such deceivers for to colour their wickedness, and to be esteemed honourable among others, remain not continually in one place, but they are vagabonds, wandering here and there, through the woods and other places, and returning with others, at certain hours, making them believe that they have conferred and counseled with the spirits, for public affairs, and that they must do so and so, or that this or that shall happen, and then they are received and entertained honourably, being nourished and entertained for this their doing: and they esteem themselves happy, that may remain in their favour and good grace, and give or offer to them some present. Likewise if it happen, that any of them have indignation or quarrel against his neighbour, they come to these Pages, to the end that they mare die with poison him or them to whom they will evil. Among other things they help themselves with a tree named in their language Ahovay, bearing fruit venomous and mortal, the which is of the greatness of a little chestnut, and it is very poison, specially the nut. The men for a light and little cause will give thereof to their wives, being angered, and the women likewise to the men: likewise these wicked women when they are with child, if their husbands have displeased them, they will take in stead of this fruit a certain herb, for to make their fruit of their womb to come before their time, this fruit being white with his nut, is made like this greek letter Δ Delta, and of this fruit the wild men when the nut or kernel is out, they make bells, and hang them on their legs, the which maketh as a great a noise as the Moris' dancers in our country. The wild men will in no wise give of this fruit to strangers being fresh gathered, likewise they forbidden their children in no wise to touch thereof before that the kernel be fallen away. This tree in height is like to our pear trees, the leaf of two or three fingers long, and two fingers broad, being green or springing all the year long, the bark is whitish. When there is a branch cut thereof, it rendereth a white juice or liquor almost like milk, the tree being cut it casteth a marvelous stinking smell, therefore the wild men will put it to no use, not to make therewith fire wood. I will forbear here to set forth the properties of many trees, bearing fruits marvelous fair, nevertheless as much and rather more venomous than this tree of which we speak. Furthermore ye must note that the wild men have these Pages in such honour and reverence, that they worship them or rather do Idolatry to them, specially when they return from any place: ye shall see this people go before them prostrating themselves, and praying them, saying, Make that I be not sick, that I die not, neither I nor my children, and such like things. And they will answer, thou shalt not die, thou shalt not be sick and such like. If it chance that these Pages speak not truth, and that things happen otherwise then they have predestinated, they make no difficulty to kill him or them, as unworthy of that title and dignity of Pages, every Village nourisheth of them, some one, some two or three, according to their greatness, and when it behoveth to know any great thing, they use certain ceremonies and devilish invocations, the which are made after this manner. First is made a new lodging, in the which never man before hath dwelled, and there within they will rear or make a new white bed and clean according to their manner. 
The ceremonies of these Prophets to call upon the wicked spirit.  Then they will carry into the said lodging great quantity of victuals, as Cahovin, which is their ordinary drink made by a virgin of ten or twelve years of age, likewise of their food made of roots, the which they use in stead of bread. So all things being thus prepared the people being assembled do guide this their gentle Prophet to this new lodging, whereas he shall remain alone, after that a maid hath given him water to wash withal, but ye must note, before this mystery he must abstain from his wife the space of nine days, being in the house alone: and the people gone a little back, he lieth flat down on the bed, and beginneth to invocate and call the wicked spirit for the space of an hour, and furthermore making his accustomed ceremonies, in such sort that in the end of his invocations, the spirit cometh to him hissing, and whistling, as they say. Others have showed me, that this wicked spirit cometh sometimes in the presence of all the people, though they see him not, but they hear a fearful noise, than they cry all with one voice in their language, saying: we pray thee to tell the truth to our Prophet, that tarrieth for thee there within: 
What the intorrogations are that they make to the wicked spirit.  their intorrogations is of their enemies, to know who shall have the victory, with the like answers, that say, who shallbe taken and eaten of their enemies? who shall be hurt or offended with any wild beast or such like. Some of them among other things, showed me that their Prophet had forshewed our coming. 
Hovioulsira.  They call this spirit Hovioulsira: this & many other things have Christians affirmed me of, that had dwelled there a long tyme. And they never take any great enterprise in hand, before they know the answer of their Prophet. When this mystery is accomplished, the Prophet cometh out, who being compassed about with people, maketh a long narration unto them, wherein he rehearseth all that he hath heard of this spirit: and God knoweth the greetings, rewards and presents that are made unto him. The Americans have not been the first that have practised magic, but before them it hath been common in many nations, until the coming of our Saviour jesus Christ, whose presence did efface and overthrow the power of Satan, by the which means the devil sought to beguile and deceive the world: it is not therefore without a cause, that it is forbidden by the holy Scripture, yea by Gods own mouth. Of this Magic, 
Two kinds of Magic.  we find two chief & principal kinds, one is in having familiar and secret talk with wicked spirits, who openeth & showeth the most secretest things of nature in deed, the one is more wickeder than the other, but they are both nought & full of curiosity. Why should we, seeing that by the providence of God we have all things that to us is necessary and needful, go about to seek out the secrets of nature and other things, which our Saviour jesus Christ hath observed to himself: such curiousness in us, showeth an unperfect judgement, want of faith and true Religion, 
Against those that believe sorceries and witchcrafts.  and yet the simple people that believeth such things is most abused: Surely I cannot but marvel, specially in a country (where good and politic laws are used) why such filthy and wicked abuses be left unpunished, with a company of old witches, which put herbs to arms, writings about necks, with other mysteries and ceremonies, as to heal Fevers and other things, which are very Idolatry, and worthy of grievous punishment. But at this day such wickedness may be found among those that are in Authority, of which sort we should have good counsel and judgement, but they themselves are first blind.  
Therefore it is no marvel, if that the simple and ignorant be soon seduced, seeing that men of wisdom and gravity, are so blinded. O blinded ignorance, wherefore serveth the holy Scripture? wherefore serveth Laws & other good sciences, the which our Saviour jesus Christ hath opened and showed unto us, if we live in error & ignorance as do these wild men, and more brutish than the very brute beasts? Nevertheless, we will be esteemed, to know much, & make a large profession of virtue. And therefore it is not to be marveled at, if our elders not knowing the truth are fallen into errors, seeking it by all means much less of these wild men, of which we speak: but the vanity of this world, shall cease when it pleaseth God. Now to our matter, we began to show, that there is a kind of Magic most damnable, that is called Thurgia, or Goetia, full of enchantementes, words, 
Thurgia a damnable Magic.  ceremonies, and invocations, having yet under her certain other kinds, of the which as it is said, was inventor Zabulus. 
Zabulus, Which is the right Magic.  As touching the true and perfect Magic, the which is to seek and know heavenly things, to celebrate and honour God, it hath been commended of many noble & grave personages, such had the three Kings that went to seek out Christ, and such Magic, is taken to be perfect and pure wisdom. 
What Magus in the Persian tongue signifieth  The Persians would not receive any into the dignity of their Empire unless he had learned this Magic, that is, if he were not wise. For Magus in their language is wise in ours, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in Greek is Sapiens in Latin. 
Zalmoxis Zorastria.  Of the which was the inventor as it is said Zalmoxis and Zorastria, not he that is so common, but he that was son to Oromasia. Also Plato in his Alcibiades saith, that he verily thinketh that the Magic of Zorastria, is no other thing, but to know and celebrate God, the which to know, and understand he himself with Pythagoras, Empedocles, and Democrites, hazarded themselves both by sea and by land, going into strange countries, for to learn and know this Magic. I know well that Pliny and many others have enforced themselves to attain thereto. As for me I thought good to speak thus much by the way, seeing it cometh now in purpose as touching our wild men.   

How these Americans believe the soul to be immortal. Cap. 37.  
THis poor people although they be ignorant & err, yet their error and ignorance is more to be borne with all, than the Arians of our time which being not content to have been created to the image and likeness of the eternal God, perfect above all creatures, against all scripture and miracles, they will show themselves like brute beasts without law or reason, and therefore because of their obstinate error, they should be handled like beasts, for there is no beast be he never so wild and brutish, but will obey and serve man, as the very image of God, the which we daily see. But it will one day come to pass, that these wicked Imps shall well know that there resteth somewhat after the death of this world that at the later day shall appear before the majesty of God, there to give account of their wicked and damnable error. Now therefore these poor people do think the soul to be immortal, the which they name in their language Cherepicovare, 
Cherepicovare The opinion of the wild men on the immortality of the soul.  the which I knew in ask of them what became of their soul when they were dead. The souls said they of them that have valiantly fought with their enemies, goeth with many other souls to places of pleasure, goodly woods, gardens, and orchards, but to the contrary those that have not well defended their country nor resisted their enemies shall go with Agnan, that is, to the wicked spirit that tormented them. On a time I boldened myself to ask or inquire of a great King of that country as touching the immortality of the soul, who was come above thirty leagues of, to see us, but he answered me fiercely in his language these words. Knowest thou not said he that after we be dead, our souls go into a far country whereas they be found altogether in fair & goodly places, as our Prophets do say that visit them oftentimes & speak unto them, the which opinion they believe and hold of a truth. Another time we went to visit another great King of that country named Pindahouson, 
Pindahouson a King in the wild country.  whom we found sick in his bed of an Ague, who among other things demanded of me what became of the souls of our friends, and others when they died, and I made answer that they went with Toupan, the which he did easily believe, upon the which he answered me these words: come hither said he, I have heard thee speak much of Toupan, 
This Toupan is to be understanded, the almighty God  that can do all things, speak to him for me that I be healed, and if I can be made whole, I will give thee many fair gifts, yea I willbe clad, and arrayed as thou art, bear such a great beard, and honour Toupan, as thou dost. And in deed when that he was whole, the Lord of Villegagnon was determined to have him baptised, and therefore he kept him always with him. They have another foolish opinion, the which is, that being on the water, be it sea or River, for to go against their enemies, if that in the mean time there arise a tempest or rage on the water, 
The superstition of the wild men.  as many times there doth, they think that it cometh of the souls of their parents or friends, but wherefore they cannot tell, and for to appease the tempest they cast some thing into the water, in token of a present or offering, thinking by this means to appease the winds? Furthermore, when any of them die, be he King or other, before that they lay them in their grave, if that there be any that hath any thing belonging or pertaining to the dead body, they will not keep it back, but will bring it and deliver it openly, & restore it before them all, for to be put into the earth with him: otherwise they do think, that the soul after that it is separated from the body, will come and molest them that keep their goods. I would to God, that many amongst us were of the like opinion, (I mean without error) then would they not keep back dead men's goods, from poor orphelins and others. Now they having restored to the dead man that which is his, he is surely bound with ropes of cotton, and of the pith of trees, so that it is unpossible as they think for him to revive and come again, the which they do greatly fear, saying, that to the elders it hath so chanced, and that hath made them since to look better to it.   

How these wild men make war one against another, specially against those whom they name Margageas and Thabaiares. Also of a tree which they name Hayri, of the which they make their weapons for war. Cap. 38.  
THese people of America are great quarrelers against their neighbours, chief against those whom they name in their language Margageas, & Thabaiares, & having no other mean to appease their quarrel, they fight cruelly one with another: They gather together upon a .6000. men, sometimes ten or .12000. village against village, or otherwise as they do meet, the like do those of Perou and the Cannibals. And before that they execute any great enterprise, be it in war or otherwise, they assemble and come together, chief the eldest sort, without their wives or children, with such a grace and modesty, that they will speak one after another, and be that speaketh shall be heard with attentive silence, who having declared his mind, giveth place to another, and so following in order, the Auditors sit down on the earth, unless it be some ancient men, that lie on their beds, the which considering with myself, cometh to my remembrance the most commendable custom of the governors of Thebes, an ancient City in Grecia, the which for to consult together of the affairs of the common wealth would always sit down upon the ground: the which manner of doing is esteemed an argument of prudence. Furthermore it is a strange thing that these Americans do never make amongst them any paction or concord, though that their hatred be great, as other nations do be they never so cruel & barbarous, as the Turks, moors, and Arabians: and I think that if Theseus, the first inventor of peace among the Greeks, were among them, he should be more troubled, than ever he was: this people have certain sleights of war to trap one another, as well as in other places. Therefore these Americans have perpetual enmity one against another at all times against their neighbours before showed, seeking their enemies, and fight as furiously together as is possible, the which causeth each village to fortify, & to make themselves strong with people and weapons. They will assemble together on the nights in great number for to keep watch and ward. For they are wont to skirmish togethers, more on nights than on days: if that they have knowledge thereof before hand, or otherwise do suspect the coming of their enemies, they will plant in the ground round about their lodgings the compass of a bow shot, sharp pointed pins of wood, the which are so set in the earth, that they are scant perceived: this kind of policy they use to gall & pierce the feet of their enemies, which are all bare and naked, as well as the rest of their bodies, to the end that by this means they might entangle their enemies for to kill some, others for to take prisoners. It is a great honour to them, the which depart out of their country, for to assail their enemies on the borders: and when that they have taken many of their enemies prisoners in their countries, he that hath taken most prisoners, is honoured and celebrated among others, as a great King or a great Lord: when he hath most killed, and when they mean suddenly to assail a town or village, they will hide themselves in the woods like Foxes, lurking there for a certain time, until they have espied the time and vantage to come forth suddenly to beset their enemies. When they be come to a village, they know the mean to set fire thereon, for to make them come forth with their wives & children, bag and baggage: being come forth, they assail one another shooting of their arrows: also with their Maces & Swords of wood, that to behold them it is a good pastime: they will bite one another with their teeth in all places whereas they can take hold, showing sometimes the bones of those whom they have vanquished and overcome before times in the wars, and eaten: to be short, they do the worst they c●n to fear & anger their enemies. Some ye shall see taken prisoners bound & manacled like thieves. And when those return from war far in their own countries (vanquishers) God knoweth the noise and pastime that they make. The women follow their husbands to the wars, not for to fight as the Amazoness do, but for to minister to their husband's food and other necessaries, requisite in the wars; for sometimes they make journeys of five or six months before they return: he that is greatest among them, hath most wives to serve him. And when they make any great journey, they set fire on their houses, and if they have any good thing, they hide it under the ground until their return. Their victuals that they have is such as the land beareth, that is, roots very delicate and pleasant to eat, and flesh of wild beasts, and fish dried in the smoke: their beds of cotton are carried with them: the men bear nothing but bows and arrows in their hands: their weapons are also great sword and Clubs of wood very heavy: their bows are as long as our bows in England: their arrows are made pointed, some of Canes that grow on the sea coast, and others are made of a kind of a wood named Hayri, 
Hairi a tree.  bearing leaf like to a Palm tree, the which is of the colour of black Marble: therefore many say it is hornbeame, but it seemeth to me otherwise, for the right and perfect hornebeame is more shining. 
Hornebeame a tree.  Furthermore the Hornebeame tree is not like this, for this is very thorney all over. The best Hornbeam is to be had in Calicut, and in Ethiopia This wood is so heavy, that it sinketh to the bottom of the water like Iron, therefore these wild men make therewith their sword and clubs, to fight with in the wars. It beareth a great fruit, somewhat pointed at one of the ends, within it a whit kernel, of the which fruit I have brought home with me a great many. Besides this the wild men make fair collars of this wood: also it is so hard and tough as I have before showed, that the arrows that therewith are made, 
The buckler that they use.  are so strong that it will pierce a good corselet or Harness: their third weapon or defence is a great buckler, the which they use in the wars, it is very long, made of the skin of a beast, like in colour to the Neat or Oxen in our country, & so divers in colours. The bucklers are of such strength as the bucklers Barcellonoys, so that they will bear out the shot of a handgunne. And as touching handguns, many of them have and carry with them to the wars, the which the Christians have given them, but they know not how to use them, but oftentimes they shoot them of only for to fear their enemies.   

Their manner of fight as well on the land, as on the water. Cap. 39  

The cause why the wild men fight one against another  IF you ask me why these wild men make war one against an other, seeing that they are not greater Lords one than another, also for that they do not esteem worldly riches, & that the earth bringeth forth more than serveth their necessity, you shall understand that the cause of their war is evil enough grounded, it is only a desire of vengeance, that they have without any other reason or cause, but even like brute beasts, that cannot agree one with another by no honest mean: & to conclude, they say, that they have been always their mortal enemies. They meet together then as we have said before, in great numbers, for to go and find out their enemies, (if that they have received any injury before hand) whereas they meet together, & shoot one at another, & after they join together, taking hold of their head, ears, & biting one another by the arms, yea buffeting one another with their fists. There is no speaking of horse. They are very obstinate and courageous, in such sort, that before they join to fight, being separated one from another the space of gun shot, sometimes for the space of a whole day or two, they will behold, & threaten one another, showing angry, cruel and fearful looks, shouting and making such a terrible noise, that ye could not here God thunder: also showing their affections by signs with their arms and hands holding them up, 
The wild men obstinate and courageous.  and shaking their sword and clubs of wood at their enemies. We are say they, valiant and hardy, we have eaten your parents, also we we will eat you, with many other threatenings. In this they observe (in my judgement) the ancient custom that the Romans used in their wars, who before they entered into battle made great boasts and cracks, with great cries and alarms, the which since hath been used among the Galls in their wars, as Titus Livius rehearseth, both the which doings I think differeth much from the doings of the Acaians, of the which Homer speaketh of, for that they being ready to give battle to their enemies would make no noise, but kept themselves from speaking. The greatest vengeance that these wild men use, 
The custom of the Americans is to eat their enemies.  and that seemeth to them most cruel, is to eat their enemies. When that they have taken any in the wars, if they be not strong enough to carry them away, then if that they can before any succour come, they will cut of their legs & arms, & before they will leave them, they will eat them, or at the least every one will carry a piece away little or much: if they can get any prisoners, that they may without danger lead into their country, they will in like manner eat them. The ancient Turks, moors, and Barbarians, used in times passed almost the like manner, (so that yet remaineth this proverb, 
A proverb.  I would I had eaten his heart with salt:) they use almost like weapons as our wild men do, but Christians have forged for them and have taught them to forge Armours, with the which we ourselves are now beaten, and it is in doubt that they will do the like to these Americans and others. Furthermore this poor people do venture themselves upon the water, for to find out their enemies, as those of the great river of janaria, 
The inhabitants of Morpion are enemies to those of janaria. Almadies made of the bark of a tree.  against those of Morpion, in which place do inhabit the Portugeses, enemies to the Frenchmen, as the wild men of that same place are enemies to those of janaria: the vessels that they use on the water, are little Almadies or boats made of the bark of trees, without nails or wooden pins, being in length five or six fathom and three foot broad. And you shall understand that they covet not to have them greater, thinking that then they could not make them row fast, for to escape or for to follow their enemy. They hold a foolish opinion and superstitious to unbarke these trees, 
The superstition of the men in taking of the barks of the trees.  that day that they do take of the bark, the which is done even from the root to the top, they will neither drink nor eat, fearing (as they say) that otherwise there would happen unto them some misfortune on the water. These vessels being thus made, they will set a float five or six score of them, and in every one forty or fifty men and women, the women serve to cast out of these little boats the water that cometh in many times with a little dish made of the fruit of some tree, the men are assured therein having their weapons, and row a long by the bank sides, and if they find a village by the way, they will set foot on land and spoil it, putting it to fire and sword, (if that they overcome it.) A little before our arrival those Americans that are our friends, had taken on the sea a little bark of Portugeses, being hard by the shore in some place, but what resistance so ever they made aswell with their guns as otherwise, nevertheless they were taken and the men eaten, saving a few that we ransomed, and bought at our arrival. By this ye may know that the wild men that are resident, where the Portugeses be, are enemies to the wild men, that inhabit where the Frenchmen arrived. Well to conclude, they fight as well on the water, as on the land, if it happen at any time the sea to rage and to swell, they cast therein Partridge feathers, or some other thing, thinking by this means to appease the waves of the sea. In like manner do the Turks and moors, being in the like danger, 
A foolish opinion of the wild men and of the Turks and moors.  washing their bodies with the water of the sea. Now our wild men, returning with victory, show all signs of joy, sounding Flutes Trumpets, Drums, and singing after their manner, the which is pleasant to hearewith their Instruments a like made of certain fruits hollow within, or with the bones of some beast, or else of their enemies: their instruments for war are richly decked with goodly coloured feathers, as we do ours in our country with banners of silk and such like. Their Fleutes, Drums, and other instruments, seemeth to relieve the spirits half gone, even as a bellows doth relieve a fire half dead. And to my judgement there is no other mean to stir up the spirits of men, 
Drums Flutes & other Instruments do stir up the spirits.  but only by the noise of these instruments, & not only men, but also beasts (nevertheless not making comparison seem to leap for joy) the which hath been observed at all times. It is of a truth, that these Americans and Barbarous men in their assaults and combats use great cries and fearful noise as here after shall be showed of the Amazons.   

How these Barbarous and wild men put their enemies to death, that they have taken in the war, and eat them. Cap. 40.  
Now that I have showed how that the wild men of America, lead their enemies prisoners, into their lodgings, after that they have taken them in the wars, there resteth now to show how they do entreat them at the last. Thus therefore they use them, the prisoners that they take and bring into their country, 
How they entreat their prisoners.  shall be very well entreated, a five days after shall be given him a wife, peradventure his daughter to whom he is prisoner, for to minister to him his necessities, as well at his bed as otherwise, in the mean time he is served with the best meats that can be found, minding to fatten him like a crammed Capon against he shall die, the which time he may easily know by a collar made of cotton, on the which they hang certain round fruits, or the bones of some beast of fish made in manner of beads, the which they hang about their prisoner's neck. And so many Moons as they are minded to keep him, the like quantity of these Beads will they hang about their necks, and so take of every Moon one, until that the Moons are expired. And some in stead of these Beads, will hang as many little collars about their necks, as they have Moons to live. Furthermore ye shall note, that these wild men do not reckon never above five, and they observe neither days nor hours, neither months nor years, but they count only by Moons. This manner of counting or reckoning, was in times past commanded to be used by Solon to the Athenians, that is to observe the days by the course of the Moon. Now to our purpose, if that of this prisoner, and of the wife that is given him, there are borne any children for the time that they shallbe together, they shall be kept and nourished for a time, and than they will eat them: saying, that they are their enemies children. This prisoner, after that he hath been well entertained and made fat, they will put him to death, thinking it to be a great honour. And for to celebrate this slaughter, they will send for their farthest friends and kinsfolks, for to eat their part thereof: the day before the execution, he shall be laid in his bed, and chained with Iron, the which use they have learned of the Christians, singing after this sort: The Margageas our friends, are good men, strong and mighty in the war, they have taken and eaten a good number of our enemies, likewise they will eat me when it please them. But as for me, I have killed and eaten his parents and friends, 
The wild men fear not death.  to whom I am prisoner, with many such like words. By this ye may know, that they fear not death. I have sometimes (for pleasure) devised with such prisoners being fair and strong men, demanding of them if they did no more care to be thus slain and murdered from day to day, to the which they answered, laughing and scoffing: Our friends said they, will revenge our death, showing a hardy and an assured countenance. And when that I did show them, that I would redeem them out of the hands of their enemies, they took it in mockage and derision.  

How the women and maiden prisoners, are entreated.  As touching the women and maids that are taken in the war, they are kept like prisoners as the men are for a certain time, & then used after that manner. They are not kept so much in captivity as the men are, but they have liberty to go about, and they are set to dress Gardens, and to fish and gather certain shell fish. Now when that they are returned from this slaughter or murder, 
Ceremonies against the execution of their prisoners. Cahovin a drink.  the owner of the prisoner, as we have already showed, will request all his friends to come to him against that day to eat their part of their booty, with good quantity of Cahovin, which is a kind of drink made of Mill, with certain roots. Upon this day of solemnity, all the assistants will deck themselves with feathers of divers colours, or else they will paint their bodies. Specially he that doth the execution, shall be decked after the best manner that is possible, having his sword of wood, wherewith he doth his office, richly adorned with fair Feathers: but the prisoner, the shorter time that he hath to live, the more greater sign of joy doth he show. He shall be brought surely bound with cords of Cotton into a public place, being accompanied with ten or twelve thousand of the wild men his enemies, and there he shall be smitten down like an Ox in the Shambles (after many Ceremonies.) This prisoner being dead, his wife that hath been given him, shall mourn a certain time for his death: but the body being cut in pieces, they take the blood, and therewith bathe their male children, for to make them the more hardy, as they say, showing them that when they come to age, they do the like to their enemies, as their fathers before them had done. By this ye may know, that the like is done to them, if they be taken in the war. The prisoner being put to death after this sort, and hewed in pieces, and prepared according to their manner, shall be distributed among them all, be they never so many, every one a morsel or piece: as for the bowels or inner parts, the women eat them up commonly, and they reserve the head to set it on a poll out of their houses in sign of triumph and victory. And above all other, they have a pleasure to use the Portugeses after this sort. 
The Cannibals are mortal enemies to the spaniards.  The Cannibals, and those of a river named Marignan, are much more cruel to the spaniards, making them to die a cruel death, and then they eat them.  
We find not in no History of any nation, be it never so strange and barbarous, that hath used the like cruelty as these have done: but only josephus writeth, that when the Romans had besieged jerusalem, under Titus, Vespasians son, after that the famine or hunger had devoured all, the mothers were constrained to eat their own children. And the Anthropophages, that are a people inhabiting in Scythia, lived also with human flesh as these wild men do.  
Now he that hath made the execution straightly, after that he hath done, goeth home to his house, and there remaineth all the day without meat or drink in his bed. Likewise he shall abstain certain days, and in three days after he shall not set foot on ground. If he be minded to go to any place, he is borne on men's shoulders, having among them this fond and foolish opinion, that if he should not so do, there would happen unto him some mischief, or else the like death. This being done, with a little saw made of the teeth of a beast named Agontin, he will raze his skin on his breast, or on other places, so that it shall appear all rent and broken. And the cause why they do these things, is as I have been informed of some of them, that they do it for pleasure, esteeming the murder that by him hath been committed against his enemy, a great glory and honour to him ward. Unto whom, minding to show the cruelty of the thing, disdaining my words, said unto me, that it was a great shame to us for to forgive and pardon our enemies, having once taken them in the wars. Moreover he said, that it is much better to put them to death, to the end that they move not war against us an other time. By this ye may see with what discretion these poor brutish men do rule and govern themselves. Also the maidens do use such Ceremonies with their bodies the space of three days continually, after that they have had the first purification of women, so that sometimes they are very sick. Also the same days they do abstain from meats, not coming out of their houses, nor setting foot on ground, as we have before showed of the men, sitting only upon a stone appointed for that use.   

How that these wild men covet greatly to revenge their harms and injuries. Cap. 41.  
IT is not greatly to be marveled at, if that these people walking in darkness, and ignorant of the truth, prepareth not only vengeance, but putteth it in ure: Considering that the Christian, although it be straightly forbidden him by express commandment, 
Vengeance is defended to Christians.  cannot keep himself from it, following the error of one named Melicius, who held opinion, that we ought not to pardon our enemies, the which error hath of a long time polluted the Country of Egypt. Therefore to prepare vengeance, is to hate our neighbour, the which is wholly repugnant to the law. But in these people it is not strange, the which as we have before showed, liveth without faith & without law. For all their war proceedeth only of a foolish opinion of vengeance without cause or reason. And think not but that this foolish opinion hath held them from the beginning, and shall do until the end, if that God for his mercy's sake illuminat not their hearts. This poor people are so ill taught, that only for the flying of a fly, they will prepare mischief. If that a thorn prick them, or a stone hurt them, they will stamp it in a thousand pieces, as if the thing were sensible or had understanding, the which cometh not but for fault of good judgement. Furthermore this is of a truth, the which I am ashamed almost to speak, that for to revenge themselves of Fleas and Lice, they kill them with their teeth, a thing more brutish than reasonable. And when they feel themselves offended or grieved, be it never so little an offence, they will never be reconciled without vengeance. Such opinions are taught, and be observed from age to age. Ye shall see them instruct and teach their children being a three or four years of age, to handle a Bow and an Arrow to learn to shoot: also they exhort them to manliness, to take vengeance of their enemies, and not to pardon any, whom so ever it be. Moreover, when they are prisoners one to another, think not that they require to be redeemed by any composition what so ever it be, for they hope no other thing than very death, esteeming it an honour and glory unto them. And therefore they can very well mock us, that deliver our enemies that we have in our power, for money or such like things, the which they say, is unworthy to a man of war. As for us say they, we use no such things. Upon a time it chanced that a Portugal being prisoner to these wild men, thought by fair words to have saved his life, so he began to preach to them by fair words as gentle and as lowly as might be. Nevertheless his flattering words could not prevail, 
A history of a Portugal, being prisoner to the wildemen.  but he to whom he was prisoner, shot him to death with his arrows: Go thy ways said he, thou haste not merited to die honourably as others, neither yet among company.  
On a time there was brought a young male child of these wild men of America, of the Country and lineage of those whom they name Tabiares, which are mortal enemies to those wild men, with whom the French men are in concord and peace by certain Merchants of Normandy, the which was afterward baptized, nourished and married at Rouen, living like a Christian man. But he was minded to return into his country with us, being of the age of two and twenty years. It came to pass that being there, he was discovered of his ancient enemies, by the means of certain Christians, who incontinently as mad Dogs furious and wood, ran to our ships which were at that time destitute of men, where as by casual chance they found him, so they fell upon him, and rend him in pieces, not touching any other of the company there present, who by the providence of God, enduring this pitiful death, exhorted them in the Christian faith, so this poor man died among their hands a good Christian man, whom they did not eat, as they did other of their enemies. What opinion of vengeance is more contrary to our law? Notwithstanding, there is found among us many, so obstinate that they will revenge as well as the wild men. Furthermore, this is among them, if one smite an other, let him be assured to receive as much again, and rather more, for they will not leave it unpunished: it is a fair sight to see them quarrel and sight together. As for the rest, they are faithful one to an other, 
The faithfulness of the wild men, but not to Christians.  but to Christians the most affectioned and subtellest thieves, although they be naked, that are possible, and they esteem it a great virtue, that they may steal any thing from us. This I speak, for that I have proved it myself, for being there about Christmas time, came a king of the Country to see the Sieur of Villegagnon. They of his company did steal away my apparel being sick. Thus much by the way concerning their fidelity, after I have showed of their obstination and desire of vengeance.   

How these wild men of America, are married. Cap. 42.  
THis honourable estate of Matrimony, showeth that we have brought some natural reason from our mother's womb. Otherwise we should be counted as brute beasts, if that God of his mercy did not illuminate our hearts. Therefore ye may be well assured, that these americans are no more discrete in their marriages, than in other things. They marry one with another, cousins with cousins, the uncle with the niece, but not the sister and the brother. A man, the more worthy and valiant he is esteemed, 
How they of America do marry.  the more wives is permitted to serve him, and to the other less: and for to say the truth, the women travail more than do the men, that is to wit, to gather roots, make meal, drinks, gather together the fruits, dress gardens, and other things that appertaineth to household. The man only goeth sometimes a fishing, or to the woods to take Venison for their sustenance. Others occupy themselves to make bows & arrows, leaving the rest for their wives to do. They will give you a maid to minister unto you necessaries whilst you be there, 
The deflowering of maids, before they be married.  or otherwise if ye will, and it shallbe lawful for you to restore her again when you think meet, and this they use customably. Assoon as you be come thither, they will say to you in their language: come hither, what wilt thou give me, and I will give thee my daughter that is fair, she shall serve thee to do thy necessaries and other things. But for to avoid this, the Sieur of Villegagnon at our arrival defended upon pain of death, not to acquaint ourselves with them, as a thing not lawful for Christians.  
In deed when the women are married, 
A defence made by the Lord of Villegagnon, that the French men should not acquaint themselves with the wild women.  it is not lawful for her to play the harlot with any others: for if she be taken in adultery, her husband will not stick to kill her, for they have such things in disdain. And to the man that is taken with her, he will do nothing, thinking that if he should touch him, he should procure the displeasure of all the others friends: for so there should engender and rise perpetual war between them: but he will put away his wife, which is lawful for them to do for adultery, and also if that they be barren, and can bear no children, and for other occasions. Furthermore, they have never company with their wives in the day time but only the nights, neither in public places, as many in our country think they have, as the Cryb, a people of Thracia, and other barbarous men in certain islands of the sea Magilanike, a thing very detestable and unworthy of christendom, to whom may serve for example these poor brutish men. The women for the time that they be great with child, shall not bear or carry any heavy burdens, neither shall do any great labour for fear to be hurt. The woman being brought to bed or delivered, the wives shall carry the child to the sea to be washed, or to some river, and then will bring it to the mother, who shall remain in her child bed twenty days, and four hours, the father shall cut the child's navel with his teeth, as I myself have seen: as for the rest, they handle and use the women in child bed, as tenderly as we do here: the nourishment of the little child is the mother's milk, notwithstanding that within certain days after his nativity, they will give it grosser sustenance. The father shortly after the child is borne, shall give him a bow and arrow in his hand, as a beginning and protestation of war and vengeance of their enemies. But yet there is one thing that marreth all, that is, that the fathers & mothers before they marry their daughters, will give them to be abused, to the first comer for a little value, principally to Christians, that trade thither, if they will couple with them, as we have before showed. We find in some histories of certain people, living in manner as these wild men do in their marriages. Seneca in one of his Epistles, and Strabo in his cosmography writeth, 
The ancient custom of the Lydians Armenians, and the inhabitants of Cypris.  that the Lydians and Armenians had a custom to send their virgins and maidens to the sea borders, there in offering themselves to all comers to get them husbands, or else their dowries. As much sayeth justinus, did the virgins of Cypris, for to get their dowries and marriages, which when they were quit and well justified, offered to the Goddess Venus, a present or offering. We may find at this day amongst us, that making great profession of virtue and religion would do the like, and rather more, without offering present or candle, the which I know of a truth. As touching the consanguinity in Marriage, Saint Jerome writeth, that the Athenians were wont to marry the brethren with the sisters, and not the Aunts with the nephews, the which is contrary to the order of the americans. Likewise in our country a woman of late had liberty to marry herself to five husbands, and not contraried. Beside this we see the Turks and Arabians took many wives: I speak it not for that it is honest and allowable, but for that we christians should avoid such things. To conclude, our wild men use the manner and order that we have showed, so that a maiden is seldom married, having her virginity, but being once married, they dare do no fault: for their husbands do look straightly to them, having a suspicion of jealousy: she may leave her husband if that she be evil entreated, the which oftentimes cometh to pass, as we read of the Egyptians that did the like before they had any laws. In this plurality of women that they use, as we have said, 
The wild men have many wives.  there is always one above the others, most favoured, which is not subject to so much travel as the others. All the children that proceed by the marriage of these wives, are reputed legitimate, saying, that the first Author of generation, is the father and not the mother, which is the cause that many times they kill the male children of their enemies being prisoners, because the such children in time to come might be their enemies.   

Of the ceremonies, burial, and funerals, that they use to the deceased. Capit. 43.  
seeing that I have showed you their doing and manner of living, and other their orders and ceremonies, there resteth to speak of their Funerals and burials. For all that these kind of people are brutish and uncivil, yet have they this custom and opinion to lay the dead bodies in the earth, after that the soul is separated from the body, in the place where as the deceased in his life time took most pleasure, 
The manner of the wild men to bury the dead.  thinking so as they say, that they can not put him in place more notable than in the earth that bringeth forth the men, that beareth so many fruits, and other richesses profitable and necessary for the use of man. There have been many lewd and unadvised Heathen Philosophers, that took no care what should become of their bodies after their decease, whether it were cast out to the beasts in the fields or birds of the air, they forced not: As Diogenes, 
The opinion of Diogenes for the burial of the body.  who after his death, commanded that this body should be cast out to the fowls of the air, & beasts of the field for to be eaten and devoured, saying that after his death, his body should feel no more pain, and that he loved much better that his body should serve for sustenance than to putrefy and rot. Likewise Lycurgus, among the Lacedæmonians, did give strait commandment, as Seneca writeth, that after his death his body should be cast into the sea, others that there should be burned to ashes. These poor people of America, though they be brutish and ignorant, show themselves after the death of their parents or friends, with out comparison more reasonable, than anciently did the Parthians, who for all that they had laws, in stead of putting their dead bodies into the earth, cast them out to be a pray for souls and dogs. Also the Taxilians, did cast their dead bodies to the souls of the air, and the Caspians in like manner. The Ethiopians did cast the dead bodies into the waters: the Romans did burn them to ashes, as many other nations have done. By this ye may see, that the wild men are not so void of honesty, but that they have some knowledge of good, considering that without law or faith they have this knowledge and advise, that is to wit, as much as Nature hath taught them, 
The funerals of the dead is approved by holy scripture.  Therefore they bury the dead bodies in the earth, as we have already said, in like manner as did anciently the Nasomones. Now the burial of the dead is approved as well by the old, as by the new testament: Likewise the ceremonies if they be duly observed, as well for that they have been vessels and instruments of the soul divine and immortal, as also to give hope of the resurrection to come. Here might I bring in many things as touching this matter, but for that it is not my argument I omit it, and let it pass. Now therefore among these wild men if that a householder happen to die, his wives, and his near kinsfolk and friends shall make a marvelous mourning, not for the space of three or four days, but four or five months, and this greatest sorrow is four or five of the first days: ye shall hear them make such a noise and harmony as dogs and cats, ye shall see as well men as women laid on their beds sorrowful, others sitting down with their bare buttocks on the ground, embracing one an other, saying in their language: Our father and friend was so good a man, so valiant in the wars, that hath caused many of our enemies to die, he was strong and mighty, he laboured so well, and dressed our gardens, he caught beasts, fowls, and fishes for our sustenance, alas he is dead, we shall see him no more, but after we be dead with our friends in the countries where our Pages say they have seen them, with many such like words, the which they will repeat above ten thousand times continually day and night for the space of four or five hours not ceasing to lament. The children of the deceased, a month after these mournyngs, will desire their friends to make some feast or solemnity for his honure, And there they will come together painted with divers colours, decked with feathers, and otherwise after their manner, making a thousand ceremonies and passetymes, with dances, plays,, tabor playing with Flutes made of the arms and legs of their enemies, and other instruments after the manner of their country. The others as the ancient sort, all the day long, will not cease to drink, without eating of any thing, and they are served by the women and kindred of the deceased: the which their doings is as I am advised, to stir up the hearts of young children, and to move and provoke them to war, making them bold against their enemies. The Romans used almost the like manner: 
The use and custom of the Romans and others at the funerals of a Citizen.  for after the decease of any Citizen that had greatly travailed for the common wealth, they made plays, pomps, and funeral songs to the praise and honour of the dead man. Likewise to give example to the younger sort, for to employ their might for the liberty of their country. Pliny saith, that one named Lycaon was the inventor of such things. Also the Argives, a people of Grecia, in memorial of the furious Lion overcome by Hercules, they made plays and games. 
Alexander the great.  And Alexander the great, after that he had seen the sepulchre of the worthy and valiant Hector, in memory of his worthiness, commanded, yea he himself did make many gambolds and solemnities. Here might I rehearse or bring in many histories how the elders in times past have diversly observed funeral rites according to the diversity of places, but for that I will not be tedious unto you, I omit it: it shall suffice at this present to know the custom of these wild men, for because that as well the elders in times passed, as also those of our time, have made many excess banquets in their funeral pomps, more for a vain and worldly glory, than otherwise: but to the contrary, ye must understand, that those that are made to the honour of the deceased, and for respect of his soul, is commendable, declaring him by this means immortal, and foreshowing the Resurrection to come.   

Of Mortugabes, and of the charity that they use toward strangers. Cap. 44.  
seeing that our argument is now of the savage men we will say somewhat of their order and living. 
Mortugabes, lodgings of the wild men and how they be builded.  In their country there is neither town nor Castle of any greatness, saving those that the Portugeses and other Christians have edified for their commodity, the houses wherein they dwell are little lodgings, the which they name in their language Mortuga●es, assembled by hamlets or villages, such as we see in some places here. These lodgings are of two or three hundred paces long, and of breadth twenty paces, or thereabouts, builded of wood, and covered with palm leaves, laid on so trimmely, as possible may be. Every lodging hath fair coveryngs, but they are so low, that one must stoop to go in, as he would do at a wicket, in every one there is many rooms, and every one for himself and his family, three fathom of length. This I find much more tolerable and less grievous than of the Arabians, and Tartarians, 
The Arabians and Tartarians have no place to remain in.  that never build nor edify a place for to remain and dwell in, but they stray about here and there like vagabonds: nevertheless they govern themselves by certain laws, but our wild men have none, but only as Nature doth govern them. Now therefore these wild men in these little houses, are many households together, in the midst of which their beds are hanged every one in his quarter unto pillars mighty strong and square, the which beds are made of good Cotton will: for thereof they have great plenty, the which a tree beareth, 
Trees that bear cotton.  being of the height of a man like unto great Buttons, or Acorns: but nevertheless they differ from those of Cypris, Malta, and Syria: The said beds are not thicker than a linen cloth of this country: and they lyde down therein all naked, as they are accustomed. This bed in their language is called Iny, 
Iny. Manigot.  and the Cotton wherewith it is made, Manigot. On both the sides of the bed of him that is master of the household, the wives make him fire day and night, for the nights are somewhat cold. Every household keepeth and layeth up in store a kind of fruit, great as an Ostrich egg, the which is of the colour of our Cucumbers that we have here in England, being fashioned like a bottle pierced at both ends, passing through the midst a stick of Hornebeame a foot and a half long, one of the ends being planted in the earth or ground, the other end is decked with fair feathers of a bird named Arat, 
Arat a bird.  that is altogether red: the which thing they have in such honour and reputation, as if it did merit no less. And they take this to be their Toupan: For when their Prophets come towards them, they make that to speak, that is within them, knowing by this means the secrets of their enemies, and as they say, they know & hear news of the souls of their friends deceased. This people about their houses nourish & bring up no domestical beasts saving certain hens & cocks, which are very rare & scant, 
Hens.  and they are but in certain places, whereas the Portugeses have first brought them: for before they had no intelligence of them, nevertheless they set so little store by them, that for a little knife ye shall have two hens: the women for no good will eat of them, taking great displeasure when they see a Christian eat at one repast four or five hens eggs, the which they name Arignane, thinking that for every egg they eat a hen, the which would suffice to repast two men: besides this, they nourish and bring up Popingays, the which they change in trading with the Christians, for small iron tools. 
popinjays.  As for gold and silver they use none: They having on a time among them taken a Portugal ship, where there was a great number of pieces of silver, that was brought from Morpion, 
No use of gold nor silver among them.  they gave all to a Frenchman for four hatchets and certain little knives, the which they esteem very much, and not without a cause: for they are necessary to cut their wood, the which before they were constrained to cut with stones, or to set a fire the trees, for to beat them down, and for to make their bows and arrows they use no other thing. Moreover, they are very charitable, and as much as their law of Nature doth permit them. 
The charity of the wild men one toward an other.  Those things that they receive of Christians, they set much store by, but of such commodities as groweth in their country, as sustenance, beasts, fruits, and fish, they are very liberal (for they have little other thing) not only to us, and among themselves, but also to any other nation, provided that they be not their enemies. For so soon as they shall see any a far off, enter into their country, they will present unto them victuals, lodging, and a maid for his service, as we have before showed. Also against this pilgrim or stranger, the women and maidens will come, and then they will sit down and cry and weep for joy, the which if thou wilt endure, casting out tears, they will say in their language: Thou art welcome, thou art of our best friends, thou hast taken great pains to come and visit us, and many other greetings. Also the father and chief of the family shallbe in their beds weeping even as the women: If they journey thirty or forty leagues be it by water or land, (they live common together) if one have, and others want, he shall distribute to the needful, the like do they to strangers. And moreover, this people are curious of new things, and wondereth according to the proverb, Ignorance is the mother of wonder: but yet for to get from a stranger that thing that he fancieth, they can so well flatter, that it is hard to say them nay. First the men, when any doth visit them in their lodgings or cabans, after they have saluted them, they will draw near to you, with such familiarity and assurance, that they will straight ways take your cap or hat, and putting it on their heads one after an other, they will behold and wonder at themselves, having opinion to be the fairest: others will take your dagger, sword, or other knife, if ye have any: and therewith will with words and jests threaten their enemies: And to be short, they will rifle you, and ye must refuse them nothing, for if ye do, ye shall neither have grace, favour, service, love, nor friendship, in deed when they have rifled ye, they will restore and give you again your trinkettes: as much will the women and maidens do, being much greater flatterers than the men, and always for to get to them some thing: this is of a truth that they will be contented with a trifle, they will come to you even with the like grace as do the men, with some fruits or other things of small value, with the which they use to make presents, saying in their language, Agatouren, which is as much to say, how good thou art, by a manner of flattery, Fory ass pia, show me such things as thou haste, being very desirous of new things, as little glasses, & little heads of glass. Also ye shall have following of you a company of young children, and they will ask in their language Hamaba pinda, Give us some fish hooks, the which they use to take little fish with. And they are well instructed in this term before said, Agatouren, Thou art good, if ye give them that which they demand, otherwise with a froward look, they will say to ye Hippochi, go thou art nought, Daganaiepa aionga, thou must be killed, with other threatenings and injuries, but they will not give any thing, unless ye give them. beside this, they will mark ye and know ye again, for the denial that you have made them.   

The description of a sickness named Pians, to the which are subject these people of America as well in the Islands as the main land. Ca 45.  
KNowing well that there is nothing, not from the earth unto the first heaven, what making or proportion so it hath, but that is subject to changing and alteration, the air then that compasseth us, being not simply an air, but made and composed, is not always like in all times nor in all places, but now of one fashion, incontinent of an other. And for that all diseases (as our Physicians show us) come or happen either of the air, or of the manner of men's living, I am determined to write and set out here a sickness or disease very rife and common in these countries of America, and of the West, discovered in our time. 
Pians a sickness in America, and his oirginall.  Now this sickness named pians, by the people of the country, cometh not of the corruption of the air, for it is there very good & temperate, which showeth by expeence, the fruits that the earth bringeth forth, with the benefit of the air, without the which nothing is made, be it of Nature or artificial. Also that the sickness proceeding of the corruption of the air, hurteth as aswell the young as the old, the rich as well as the poor, notwithstanding the internal or inward disposition. 
The wildmen are very lecherous and carnal.  Therefore it must needs be, that it proceedeth of some misgovernment, as to much carnal and fleshly frequentation the man with the woman, considering that this people is very lecherous, carnal, and more than brutish, specially the women: for they do seek and practise all the means to move man to lust. This sickness is no other thing than the pocks that reigneth, and hath power over all Europe, specially among the frenchmen: For of us it is named the French pocks, the which disease as the Frenchmen wright, 
The true original of the French pocks, as the French men writ.  was first taken at a voyage into Naples, and thither it was brought by the spaniards, from the West Indies. For before it was discovered and made subject to the spaniards, there was no mention thereof. It is not only here in Europe, but also in Grecia, in Asia, and in Africa. Well let us return unto the wild men's evil, and to the remedies that they do use therefore. Now this evil taketh the parties, as well wild men as Christians that are there, by contagion or touching, even as the pocks doth in the realm of France. Also it hath the like Symptoms, and it is so dangerous, that if it be waxed old, it is hard and dangerous to heal: for sometimes it doth afflict them even to the death. As for the Christians, which do inhabit in the land of America, if they couple themselves with the women, they shall never be rid of the same, but shall fall into the danger thereof, much more sooner than they of the country. 
The curing of this disease.  For the curing of this disease likewise for a certain alteration that oftentimes cometh with this evil, they make a certain decoction of the bark of a tree, named in their language Hivourahe, of the which they drink, 
Hivourahe a tree.  more easier to cure than with our medicine, and they are more easier to be healed than others, to my judgement for their temperateness and complexion, which are not broken out with infections, as the Frenchmen are. Thus much thought I needful to speak in this place. And he that will make any difficulty to believe my words, let him ask the opinion of the most learnedest Physicians of the original & cause of this disease, and what internal parts are soon grieved, where it is nourished. For I see at this day many contradictions (but not among the learned.) And to my seeming, I find very few that toucheth the prick, specially of those that take upon them to heal it: among the which, there are men and women so ignorant, that they cause many mishaps unto the poor pacientes: for in steed of curing and healing of them, they make them worse and worse. 
The wild men are afflicted with ophthalmies, and from whence they proceed.  There are other kind of diseases, as ophthalmies, of the which we have already showed, that comes of overmuch smoke, for that they make their fires in many corners and places of their lodgings, the which are great, for that they assemble a great number; for to take up their lodgings. I know well that all ophthalmies come not of smoke: but where of so ever it be, it cometh of the illness of the brain, 
All the pains of the eyes with ophthalmies.  being by some means grieved. Also all the diseases of the eyes are not ophthalmies, as may be seen among the inhabitants of America, of which we speak: for many have lost their sight, having no inflammation in their eyes. And this fullness and abundance of troubles of the brain, as I may learn and understand, cometh of the air, and southwinds hot and moist very common in America, 
The south wind and ill token.  the which suddenly filleth the brain, as Hypocrates showeth. Also we feel in ourselves, our bodies to wax heavy, specially the head when the wind is at south. For to heal this pain of the eyes, they cut a branch of a certain tree, very soft rind, like to a kind of palm tree, the which they bring home to their houses, and they let drop the juice being red, into the eye of the patient. Moreover, this kind of people is always subject to the leprosy, paralysey, and other exterior vices as we are in this country, but they are always whole and well disposed, walking with a great courage and boldness, their heads lifting up like a stag or hart. This much by the way of this sickness, the most dangerous that is in France Antarctic or America.   

Of the diseases most rife and common in America, and the mean that they observe to cure them. Cap. 46.  
THere is none be they never of so rude and gross memory, but that knoweth well, that these americans are made of four elements, as all natural bodies are, so that by this means they are subject to the like affections that we are. In deed diseases and sickneesss may be divers and contrary, according to the temperateness of the air, and manner of living. Those in that country that inhabit near the sea, are subject to rotten diseases, as Fevers, Catarrhs, and others. In the which these poor people are so persuaded and abused of their Prophets, of whom we have spoken, the which are called for to heal them when they have these diseases: and they have this foolish opinion, that they can cure them: 
The foolish opinion of the wild men in their prophets and of their diseases.  we can not better compare these imps, than to a company of new fond foolish & ignorant Physicians in our days here in our realm that persuade the poor people, & make profession that they can heal all kind of diseases curable and uncurable, the which I would very well believe, if that science were become ignorance. Therefore these Prophets make them to believe, that they do speak unto the spirits and souls of their parents, and that nothing to them is unpossible, also that they can cause the soul to speak within the body. Moreover, when soever any sick man feeleth his stomach to sweet by the occasions of some humours in the stomach and liver, the which by debility or otherwise he can not cast or vomit up, he thinketh that it is his soul that complaineth. Now these goodly Phrophetes for to heal this disease will suck with their mouth the place where the sore or disease lieth, thinking that by this means they draw it out. Likewise they suck one an other, but not with such belief and opinion: the women use other means, 
A method mean to heal the disease observed of these wild men.  they will put into the pacientes mouth a thread of cotton a two foot long, the which afterwards they suck, thinking also by this thread for to get away this disease or sickness. If one of them do hurt an other in earnest or otherwise, he is bound to suck his wound until the time that he be healed. And in the mean time, they do abstain from certain meats, the which they think is contrary: They have the mean to let blood between the shoulders, with a kind of herb very cutting, or with the teeth of some beast. The manner how to diet the patient is this: 
How the patient liveth when he is sick.  They will never give him no meat nor sustenance before he do ask it, and they will rather let him languish a whole month. They are not so often grieved with sickness as we be, although they go all naked day and night: also they use no excess or superfluity in their meats or drinks. In other things they are very curious to know the trees and fruits, they will not taste of any fruit that is perished, unless it be through ripe: The fruit of which they commonly eat in their sicknesses is named Nava, 
Nava, an excellent fruit.  being great, made in manner of a Pine apple, this fruit when it waxeth ripe, becometh yellow, the which is very excellent, as well for his sweetness as his relish, as pleasant as fine sugar and more: It is not possible to bring of them into this country, but conserved, for being ripe they will not long keep. Furthermore, it beareth no grain, wherefore they plant them by little slips, as the fruits that are grafted in our country: Also before it be ripe, it is so rough in eating, that it will pull of the skin of your lips: the leaf of this tree when it groweth, is like to the leaf of a large jounck or sages. I will not forget, that among their diseases they have one marvelous indisposition, which cometh by little worms that enter into their feet, 
Tom, a kind of worms.  named in their language Tom, that are little ones and I think that they engender in their feet: for there will be sometimes such a number in one place, that they will raise a knob as big as a bean, with dolour and pain in that place, the which pain also chanced to us: for being there, our feet and our hands were covered with little clothes, in the which when they were broken, was only one white worm with filth. And for to shun this grief, the wild men make a certain oil of a fruit named Hibonconhu, like unto a Date, 
Hibonconhu a fruit, and for what use.  the which is not good to eat: they preserve it in little vessels of fruits, named in their language Caramenio, and therewith they rub the places that are grieved, a thing very necessary as they do affirm against these worms. Also sometimes they anoint therewithal their bodies when they be weary. Besides this, the oil is proper for wounds and sores, as they have known by experience. Thus much as touching their infirmities, and the remedies that these Americans use.   

The manner how to trade among these people: of a bird named Toucan, and of the spicery of that Country. Cap. 47.  
ALthough that in America, there is divers kinds of people: nevertheless brutish and of divers sorts and fashions, accustomed always to make war one with another. Notwithstanding, they let not to trade & traffic as well among themselves, 
The traffic of the wild men.  as with the christians and strangers, specially those that are near to the Sea, with such commodities as is to be had in the Country. Their greatest trade is with Ostrich feathers, garnishings of swords made of feathers, & other feathers much set by and esteemed, the which are brought from the higher Country to the sea side, above a hundredth or six score leagues, also great quantity of colours white and black, also of the green stones that they bear hanging in their lips, as we have before showed. The others that dwell on the sea coast, where as the Christians to traffic receive certain hatchets, knives, daggers, sword, and other iron tools, beads of glass, combs, looking glasses, and other little trifles of small value, which they truck with their neighbours, having no other mean saving only to give one merchandise for an other, and they use after this manner: give me that, and I will give thee this, without any further talk. On the sea coast, the most frequented Merchandise, is the feathers of a bird, that is named in their language Toucan, the properties of which I will describe, seeing it cometh to purpose. This bird is of the greatness of a Pigeon: there is an other kind like to a Pie, 
The description of Toucan, a bird of America.  of like feathers that the other have, that is to wit, both twain black, saving that about the tail, there are some red feathers among the black. Under the breast, the feathers are yellow about four fingers broad, as well in breadth as in length, and it is not possible to find yellow more excellent, nor finer colour than is the feathers of this bird: at the end of the tail, there are little feathers as red as blood. The wild men take the skin of that part that is yellow, and they use it to make garnishings of sword after their manner, and certain garments, hats, and other things.  
I the author of this work, brought a hat of feathers very rich and fair out of America, 
A strange hat made of feathers  the which was presented to the King of France, Henry by name, as a precious jewel. And of these birds there are none found but in America, beginning from the river of plat, unto the river of Amazons. There are some seen at Perou, but they are not so great as the others. At new Spain, Florida, Messique, and new found land, there is none to be seen, because the countries are to cold, of the which they stand in great fear. Moreover this bird liveth with no other thing among the woods, where he maketh his residence, but with certain fruits that the Country doth bring forth: some might think that this were a water bird, the which is not so, for that I have seen the contrary. To the rest, this bird is disformed and monstruous, having the bill more greater and more longer than the rest of the body. I have also brought one of them from thence that was given me, 
Secrets brought by the author into France or America.  with the skins of many of divers colours: some as red as fine scarlet, others yellow, blue, and others of divers colours. These feathers be much set by of the Americans, with the which they traffic and trade, as we have before showed.  
This also is of a truth, that before the use of money, they traded after this sort ware for ware, so that the wealth and richesse of men, yea of Kings, Princes, and Magistrates, did consist in beasts, sheep, goats and Camels, of the which ye have examples in Berosus and Diodorus, the which show us by writings, the manner and use that the elders before us used to trade one with another, the which use I find to differ very little from the americans order, and other barbarous people. So that in times past one thing was given for an other, as sheep for corn, wool for salt, and such like.  
The traffic of one Country with an other, 
The order of the world, before the use of money.  if we consider it well, is marvelous profitable & necessary, for by it civil society is kept: also it is much esteemed throughout all nations. Pliny in his seventh book doth attribute the first invention and use thereof to be among the Venicians. The trade that many of the Christians use with the americans, is brasell wood, Popengayes, cotton and other things, 
What the christians and Americans do trade together. A kind of spice.  in truck and change of those things before showed: they bring also from thence a kind of spice, which is the grain of an herb or little tree of three or four foot high, the fruit is like to our country strawberries, as well in colour as otherwise. When it is ripe, there is within it a seed like to fennel seed. Our christian Merchants do load this kind of spice being nothing so good as the spice that groweth on the coast of Ethiopia, and in Guinea, also it is not to compare to the spice that is had at Calicut, or of Tabroban. And this ye shall note by the way, that though it be named Calicut spice, ye must not think that it is all of Calicut, 
Of the spice of Calicut. The Island of Corchel.  but cometh a fifty leagues off, from islands unknown, and chief from an Island named Corchell. Notwithstanding Calicut, is the chiefest place whether all the Merchandise of the East countries is brought, and there it is shipped, and therefore it is called the spice of Calicut, the which is better than the spice of America. The King of Portugal as every one knoweth, hath great profit of the spices, that he receiveth from thence, but not so much as in times past, for because that since the spaniards have discovered the Island of Zebut, 
The Island of Zebut.  rich, and of a great compass, the which ye shall find after ye have passed the strait of Magellan. This Island beareth a Mine of Gold, Ginger, and great abundance of white Purslane. afterward they found out Aborney, 
Aborney. The islands of Moluqus, and of the spice that cometh from thence.  five degrees from the Equinoctial, and many other Islands inhabited with Neigers, until they came to Moloqus, where as is Atidora, Terenata, Mata, and Machian little Islands somewhat near the one to the other, as are the Canaries of the which we have spoken. These Islands are distant from France, more than .180. degrees lying to the West, they bring forth many good spices, much better than those of America. This much by the way of Moloquus, having first treated of the traffic and trade that the wild men use of America.   

Of birds most common in America. Cap. 48.  
AMong many kinds of birds that nature diversly bringeth forth, setting out her gifts by particular properties, (truly worthy to be marveled at,) the which she hath given to every living beast. 
The description of Carinde, a bird of excellent beauty.  There is not one found that exceedeth this bird, commonly seen in America, named of the wild men Carinde, decked with so pleasant and fair feathers, that it is not possible for no man but to wonder at the like work. This bird exceedeth not the greatness of a Crow, and his feathers from the belly to the throat, is as yellow as fine gold: the wings and the tail, which are very long, are of the colour of fine Azure. To the likeness of this bird, there is another found of his greatness, but differing in colour, for in stead of having the breast feathers yellow, this hath them as red as pure scarlet colour, and the rest Azure. These birds are a kind of Parats, and of like form as well in head and bill, as in feet. The wild men of the Country sell them dear, for that three or four times a year, they pluck their feathers for to make hats, garnish bucklers, sword of wood, and other things requisite, the which they do commonly. The said birds are so privy, that all the day they will sit upon the trees, round about the wild men's lodgings. And when the night cometh, these birds withdraw them, some into the houses, and some into the Woods, but they fail not to return the next morrow, even as our privy or tame Doves or Pigeons, that will neastle in houses. They have divers other kinds of Popengayes differing in Feathers the one from the other. There is one kind more gréener than those that are brought into our Country, 
Aiouroub a green bird.  the which they name Aiouroub, others having on their heads blue feathers, others all green, the which the wild men do name Marganas: there are none found grey as in Guinea, 
Marganas.  and in high Africa. The americans keep all these birds in their lodgings, but they are not taught to speak, as they are with us, I mean being made privy when they are young, according to the custom of our elders, as Pliny showeth in the tenth book of his natural History speaking of birds, where he affirmeth that Strabo was the first that put birds into Cages, the which before had liberty to go and come. 
Who it was that first caged birds.  The women in like manner nourish some, the which they set such store by, that they call them their friends. Furthermore our americans do learn these birds in their language to ask for meal made of roots. But they teach them most commonly to say and proffer, that they must go a warfare against their enemies, for to take them, and for to eat them, and other things. They will for no good give them fruit to eat, neither great nor little, 
Great plenty of Popengayes in America.  for they say that it engendereth a worm that pierceth their heart. There is a multitude of other Popengayes that are in the woods, of the which they kill a great many with their arrows for to eat, and they make their nests in the tops of trees, for fear of stinging beasts.  
The time hath been, that these birds were not known to the ancient Romans, and other Countries of Europe, but even since as some do witness, that Alexander the great, sent his lieutenant Onesecriteus into the Island of Tabroba, who brought from thence a certain number, and since they multiplied so well, as well in the East country as in Italy, and chief at Rome, as Columella sayeth in his third book, of the sayings of the elders, that Marcus Portius Cato, (of whom the life and Doctrine was an example to all Rome), as he felt himself slandered, said on a day to the Senate.  
O Fathers overseen, O wicked Rome, I know not I, 
The exclamation of Marcus Cato, against the abuses of his time.  to what days we are fallen, seeing that I see in Rome such dissolute living, that is: for men to bear Popengayes on their hands, and to see the women nourish in their deliciousness, little dogs.  
Well, let us return to our birds, that are found there of an other kind, and more stranger, as that bird named Toucan, of the which we have before spoken, all differing from the colour of those of our Himisperie, as may be known by these before rehearsed, and of many others, of which I have brought home the bodies garnished with feathers, some yellow, red, green, purple, Azure, and of many other colours, the which were presented to the king as singular things, that was never seen with us in our realm. There resteth now to describe and set forth certain other kind of birds being rare and strange. Among the which there is found one kind of the like greatness and colour, as little crows, saving that before their breast, they have a spot as red as blood, & they are named Panon, his bill coloured like ashes, which bird liveth with no other thing, than which a kind of Palm named jerahwa, 
jerahwa, a kind of Palm. Quiapian a bird.  there are another kind found like to our Merlions, as red as Dragon's blood, the which in their language they name Quiapian, there are another kind of the greatness of a little Monkey, a bird so named, 
Anon a bird.  the which is all black, living after a strange manner. When he is full with Aunts, and another little worm that he eateth, he will fly to some little tree, and there will flutter from one branch to another without ceasing: the wild men name it Anon. Among all the rest of the birds that are there to be seen, there is found another kind that the wild men will not by no means kill nor hurt: 
Another kind of bird.  this bird hath her voice very pitiful, and these poor men say, that her song causeth them to remember their friends that be dead, thinking that this bird is sent by them, bringing to them good hap and fortune, and naughty luck to their enemies. This bird is no bigger than a stock Dove, being coloured like to ashes, and living with a kind of fruit, of a tree that they name Hivourahe. 
Hivourahe a tree.  I will not yet forget another bird named Govanbuch, 
Govanbuch, a bird very little.  the which is no bigger than a great Fly, the which for all that it is little, is so fair to see too, that it is unpossible to see a fairer: his bill is somewhat long and slender, and his colour grayish, and although to my judgement it is the least bird living under the sky, nevertheless it singeth very well, and pleasant to hear. I omit here the water birds, as well of the fresh water, as of the salt, which are all variable to those that are in our Country, as well in proportion of body, as diversity of feathers. I doubt not Reader, but those that have written of the kinds and properties of Birds, will find these things very strange that I have rehearsed, but without shame it may be reputed to their ignorance, being ignorant of these West parts, and also the small knowledge that they had of strange things. This therefore shall suffice thee which I have truly gathered of the strange birds that are in America, or France Antarctic, for the time that we did there remain.   

Of Venison and wild beasts that these wild men take Cap. 49.  
I Think it necessary gentle Reader, seeing that I have treated of strange Fowls, somewhat to speak as touching the wild beasts that are found in the woods, and hills of America, and also to show how the inhabitants of the country take them for their nourishment. I remember that I have said in some place, 
How the Americans take wild beasts.  that they nourish no domestical beasts, but there are in the woods great quantity of wild beasts, as Hearts, Hinds, wild Boars and others. When these beasts stray abroad to seek their living, they will make a deep hole covered over with leaves, in the place where the beast doth most frequent, the which is made so cunningly that with great pain shall he escape. And they will take him alive or kill him in that hole sometimes with their arrows. The wild Boar seemeth to me more dangerous, he is altogether like to the wild Boars in France, but more fiercer and more dangerous, and hath the tooth more longer and more apparent: he is altogether black and without tail, moreover he beareth a vent on his back like to a sword fish. 
The wild Boar of America.  This wild Boar will make a fearful noise, also ye shall here his teeth make a noise together when he is feeding or otherwise: the wild men on a time brought us one bound, the which notwithstanding escaped in our presence: the Heart and the Hind have not their bear so smooth and even, as with us, but more rougher and longer, 
The Heart of America.  the Hearts have their horns more short than ours, the wild men set much by these horns, for because that after they have pierced their children's lip, 
The property of a Heart's horn  they put most commonly into the hole a piece of Hearts horn for to increase it, thinking that therein is no poison nor danger, but to the contrary, it letteth and keepeth that at that place of the lip there will engender no evil. Pliny showeth that a Hearts horn, is a remedy against poison. Also Physicians put thereof among Medicines that are cordial, as a comfort to the stomach, as ivory and others: the smoke of this horn burned hath power to drive away Serpents. Some will say, that the Heart hath every year new horns, and casteth her old ones, and when he is without his horns, he hideth himself. The elders have taken it for an ill sign for a man, to meet a Dear, or a Hare, but we think the contrary: also the same superstition is foolish and repugnant to our Religion. The Turks and Arabians, 
A fond opinion of the wild men.  are at this day in that error. To this purpose: if our wild men take an opinion he thinketh it true and it shallbe hard to persuade them the contrary, the which is, having taken a Buck or a Do, they dare not bear it into their houses, before that they have cut of the haunches and the legs behind, thinking that if they should bear it with the four quarters, it would take from them and from their children the mean to take their enemies in running, beside many other foolish opinions, whereof their head is full. They have no other assurance thereof, but that their great Charaibe showed them so, as their Pages and false Seductors do affirm. They will dress their Venison by pieces, but with the skin, and after it is enough it shall be distributed to every household, that inhabit under one roof altogether, as scholars in colleges, they will never eat the flesh of no ravening beast, or that doth feed on unclean things, be he never so privy, but they will not force to keep privy such a beast, as one which they name Coary, as great as a Fox, 
The description of Coary a strange beast.  having the moosell a foot long, black like a Molle, and little like the moosell of a Rat, her hear rough, a slender tail like to the tail of a wild Cat, spotted white and black, having ears like a Fox. This is a ravenous beast, and liveth of pray or spoil, about the water side. Furthermore there is found kind of pheasants, as great as a Capon, 
A kind of pheasants.  but black feathered, only the head which is grey, having a little red comb, hanging like a Turkey Hen and red feet. Also there are Partridges, named in their language Macovacanna, that are greater than ours. 
Macovacanna. a kind of Partridges, Tapihire a beast.  Also there is found in America, great quantity of those beasts which they name Tapithire, the which is much desired for his deformity. Also the wild men follow them at the chase, not only for the flesh which is very good, but also for the skins, with the which they make bucklers that they use in the wars, and the skin of this beast is so strong and tough that a Crossbow can scant pierce it, and they take them as they do the Heart or the wild Boar, 
The description of Tapihire.  of the which we spoke even now. These beasts are of the height of a great Ass, but they have a greater neck, and the head like the head of a young Bull of a year old, the teeth sharp and cutting, nevertheless he is not dangerous. When she is chased, she maketh no other resistance, but to flee away, seeking some convenient place for to hide her, running more swifter than a Heart, she hath no tail, but a very little one of a finger length, the which is without hair, & of such beasts without tail there are found a great number, she hath cloven feet, with a very long horn almost as much before as behind, his bear is brown colour like some Mules and Oxen in our country. And for this cause the Christians that are there, name such beasts Kine, not differing much from Kine, saving only she wanteth horns: and truly to my seeming it is as like an Ass as a Cow. For there are few beasts of divers kinds that be like in all points, without some great difference. 
A kind of strange fish.  As also fishes that we have seen in the sea on the coast of America, one among the others had the head like a Calf, and the body slender. So that in this ye may see the industry of nature, that hath altered the beasts according to the diversity of their kinds, as well on the land as on the water.   

Of a tree named Hivourahe. Cap. 50.  

Hyvourahe a tree.  I Will not by no means leave out for his excellency and secretness, a tree named of the wild men Hyvourahe, which is as much to say as rare a new. This tree is of a high stature, having the bark shining like silver, and within half red. It hath almost the taaste of salt, the which I have many times tasted, the bark of this tree hath a marvelous property among all others: also it is in such reputation among the wild men, as the wood Gaiac: also some think it to be very Gaiac, the which I deny, for it is not to the purpose, that all that hath the like property that Gaiac hath, is Gaiac. Notwithstanding it serveth in stead of Gaiac to the Christians, for the wild men are not so subject to this common disease, of the which we will speak in another place more at large: the manner to use it is this, they take a quantity of the bark, the which giveth milk when it is separated from the wood, the which being cut in little pieces, 
The usage of the bark of this tree.  they make it to boil in water the space of three or four hours, till that the colour be changed like claret wine, & of this they drink the space of fourteen or twenty days continually, making or keeping a little diet, which helpeth well as I do understand. And the said bark is not only good for the said affection, but to all diseases for to bring out ill humours, of the which in like manner use our Americans in their diseases: and beside, 
The excellency of the fruit of this tree.  this drink is pleasant to drink in your full health. Another singular thing there is in this tree bearing fruit of the greatness of a little prune, as yellow as fine Angel Gold. And within it, is a little nut very pleasant and sweat, being good for sick folk to digest. But another thing is peradventure strange and almost incredible to those that have not seen it, that is, that it beareth not fruit, but from fourteen year to fourteen year: some would have made me believe, from twenty year to twenty. But I heard the contrary, being sufficiently informed of the ancient people of the country. I have caused them to show me one, and he that showed it me, said that in his life time, he had eaten but three or four times of the fruit. I remember of the good fruit of the tree named Loath, of which the fruit is so pleasant, as Homer showeth, that after that Scipions men had tasted, 
Loath in Homer.  they forced not but forgot to return to their ships to eat any other meats or fruits. Furthermore there are trees that bear Cassa, but it is not so excellent as that of Arabia and of Egypt.   

Of a tree named Vhebehason and of the honey Bees that frequent it. Cap. 51.  
GOing on a day unto a village distant from the place whereas was our remaining a ten leagues, being in my company five wild men, and a Christian to interpret, I was mindful to behold on all sides the ttées, of the which there were divers sorts, among the which I stayed to behold that of the which I mind to speak, 
The description of a tree named Vhebehason.  the which to see to, would be judged to be an artificial work, and not of nature. This tree is very high the branches passing one with in another, the leaves like the leaves of a Colwoort, every branch laden with his fruit, the which is a foot long. Therefore ask one of the company, what kind of fruit it was, he showed me and bid me behold a company of flies or honey Bees about the same fruit, the which then was green, with the which these honey Bees do live and nourish themselves, of the which Bees there were a great number in a hole that was in the tree, whereas they made honey and wax. There is two kinds of the honey Bees, 
Two kind of honey Bees.  one kind are as great as ours, the which cometh not only but of good smelling Flowers, also their honey is very good, but their wax not so yellow as ours: there is another kind half so great as the others, their honey is better than the others, and the wild men name them Hira, 
Hira honey Bees.  they live not with the others food, which to my judgement maketh their wax to be as black as coals, and they make great plenty, specially near to the river of Vasses and of Plate: there is also found a little beast named Hyrat, 
Hirat a beast.  which is as much to say as a honey beast, for that this beast seeketh but all parts of this tree for to eat the honey that these flies make. This beast is tauney, and as great as a Cat, 
The usage of honey much commended of divers people.  and knoweth the mean to draw out the honey with his paws, without touching the flies, nor they him. This honey is much esteemed in that country for because that the wild men give thereof to their sick people, mixed with meal, that they use to make of roots: as for the wax, they put it to no use, but to make their feathers hold together about there head, or else they occupy it about their great canes, in the which they put their feathers (the which) is the best and chiefest treasure that these Americans have.  
The ancient Arabians and Egyptians, did use to minister unto the sick, honey, more than any other medicine, as Pliny witnesseth. The wild men that inhabit about the River of Marignam, eat almost no other meat but honey, with certain boiled roots, the which honey in those parties droppeth down from the trees and rocks, as Manna from Heaven (the which) unto these Barbarous men is a good sustenance. To this agreeth very well Lactantius in his first book of Divine Institutions (as far as I can remember) that Melissus King of Creta, 
Melissus King of Creta.  the which did first sacrifice unto the Gods, had two daughters, Amalthea and Melissa, the which did nourish or feed jupiter with goats milk, 
Why the Poets have feigned that the honey Bees flied into jupiters' mouth.  when he was a child, and also with honey. So that the people of Creta, seeing and perceiving that honey was a good sustenance, began therewith to feed their children. The which thing hath caused this argument amongst the poets, to say that honey Bees did fly into jupiters' mouth. The which also being known of Solon, did permit that they might transport all kind of fruit out of the city of Athens and many other victuals, except honey. Likewise the turks have honey in as great estimation as is possible, thinking after this life that they shall go into some pleasant places replenished with all kind of sustenance, and chief of honey, the which opinion is fantastical and foolish. Now to return to our former tree, it is greatly frequented of these flies or honey bees, although that the fruit is not good to eat as many others are in that country, for because that it cometh not to his ripeness, but is eaten of these honey bees as far as I can perceive. Moreover this tree bringeth forth a red gum, 
Red gum.  good for many things, as they know well how to use it.   

Of a strange beast named Haut. Cap. 52.  
ARistotle and many others since his time have with all their diligence and industry enforced themselves to find out the nature of Beasts, Trees, Herbs, and other natural things. Notwithstanding it doth appear by their writings that they never had intelligence of America, 
America not known of the ancient writers.  for that it was not discovered before (nor in their time) nevertheless their writing hath given us some comfort and contentation. Therefore if we set out here and show of those that are unto us strange and unknown, I trust it will not be taken in ill part, but to the contrary I trust it will bring some contentation to the Reader, that loveth to hear of rare and singular things, the which nature will not shall be common to every country. This beast for to be short, is asmuch disformed as is possible, and almost uncredible to those that have not seen her. They name her Haver or Hauthy, 
The description of a beast named Hauthy.  of the greatness of a great Munky of Afeca, having a great belly, and the head almost in proportion of a Child's head. She being taken, casteth out sighs like a Child feeling pain, her skin coloured like ashes, and rough like a little Bear, having on each paw three nails or claws, a four fingers long, and made like the fyn of a carp, with the which she climbeth on Trees, abiding there more than on the ground. Her tail is three fingers long, with little hear thereon. Another thing there is worthy of memory, that this strange beast was never seen eating, for the wild men of the country have watched her to see if she would feed, but all was in vain, as they themselves have showed me. besides this I would never have believed it if I had not proved it, for a captain of Normandy, and the Captain Mognevylle, borne in Picardy, walking on a time in the great thick woods, did shoot with a Handgunne at two of these beasts, which were in the top of a tree, so that they fell both to the ground, the one sore hurt, & the other only amazed or astoned, the which was given to me for a present, so it was well kept the space of xxuj days, and in the mean time it would never eat nor drink, but always at one estate, but in the end it was strangled by certain Dogs that we brought thither: some think that this beast liveth only with leaves of a certain Tree named in their language Amahut, this Tree is the highest Tree in that country, bearing leaves very small and thin: and for that this beast is commonly in this Tree, she is named Haut. Furthermore this beast is very loving to man, when she is tame, coveting to be always on his shoulders, as if her nature were to remain on high places, the which doings the wild men of the country cannot abide for that they are wicked, for this beast hath very sharp claws, and longer than the claws of a Lion, or any other beast that ever I saw. To these wonders I have seen by experience certain Chameleons in Constantinople, 
Chamellion.  that lived only with the air. And by this I knew it was of a truth, that the wild men showed me as touching this beast: moreover if that this beast be abroad in the greatest rain that is, 
The wonderful works of Nature.  yet she will be always as dry as before. By this ye may see the wonderful works of nature, how that she can make things strange, great, incomprehensible, and wonderful to man's judgement. Therefore it is a thing impertinent, to seek out the cause & reason, as many daily go about to do. For this is a very secret of nature, the knowledge whereof is reserved and kept to the only creator: also of many others that might be here alleged, but for that it is not my argument, I omit it for to finish the rest.   

How these Americans kindle Fire: of their opinion of the drowning of the World, and of their Iron works. Cap. 53.  
NOw that I have showed you of some singular plants and unknown beasts not only to us, but as I think to all the world, for that this country was never known nor discovered but of late days, being minded to make an end of this discourse of America, I will show you the strange manner and practice that these Barbarous people use to get fire, as well as we do with a flint stone and a tinder box, the which invention truly is celestial, 
The manner of the wild men to get Fire.  given by divine providence to man for his necessity. Now these wild men have another mean, almost uncredible to get fire, greatly differing from our use, that smite a flint stone with an Iron. And ye must note, that they use customably fire for their necessities as we do, & rather more, for to resist the wicked spirit that tormenteth them, for them which cause they never lie down in what place so ever they be, but that they have first fire lighted by their bed's side. And therefore aswell in their houses or other where, be it in the forest or in the fields, whereas they are constrained to remain a long time, as when they go a warfare or hunt for Venison, they bear commonly with them their instruments to make fire. Therefore they will take two sticks unequal, the one which is the least shallbe a two foot long or thereabout, made of a certain dry wood, having a rind or pith, the other somewhat more longer. He that will make fire, will lay the lesser stick down on the ground pierced through the midst, the which he holding with his feet, will put the end of the other stick into the hole that is in the other, with a little cotton and dried leaves, then with turning of the stick, there engendereth such a heat, that the leaves and cotton begin to burn, so that by this means they light fire, the which in their language they name Thata, 
Thata. Thatatin.  and the smoke Thatatyn: and this manner or way to make fire so subtly, they say came by a great Charaibe, more than a Prophet, the which taught it to their Elders, with other things also, of which they before had no intelligence or knowledge. I know well there are many fables, as touching the invention of fire. 
The first invention of Fire.  Some say that certain pastors or shepherds were the first that invented to make fire, after the manner that these wild men use, with certain wood, being destitute of Iron and flint stone. By this we may evidently know, fire cometh neither of stone nor Iron, 
Vulcan inventor of Fire.  as Aphrodisius disputeth in his problems. Dioderus writeth, the Vulcan was the first inventor of fire, the which for this respect was elected King by the Egyptians. Also the wild men are almost of this opinion, the which before this invention of fire, 
The opinion of the wild men against a deluge.  did eat their meats dried in the Sun. And this knowledge was brought to them, as I have before showed, by a great Charaibe, one night in their sleep after a great deluge of waters, (the which) they maintain to have been in times past, although they have not memorial by writing, but only from age to age, so that they will bear in memory things four or five hundredth years past, the which is to be marveled at. And by this means they are very curious to teach & instruct their Children things done and passed, which are worthy of memory. The ancient men after their sleep in the night, do no other thing but declare ancient stories to the young men, so that to hear them, you will say they are Preachers or Readers of Lectures: now say they, the water was so exceeding great in this Deluge, that it covered the highest mountains in that country, so that all the people were drowned, the which they tell of a truth, and believe as steadfastly as we do, that which was in noah's time, that is read of in holy Scripture. Nevertheless it is easy for them to fail, considering they know nothing but by memory, and as they heave heard said of their Fathers. 
How the wild men do number.  Also they number by stones or other like things, for otherwise they cannot number, but only to five, and they count the months by the Moons, (as we have before made some mention) saying it is so many Moons since I was borne, and so many Moons since the Deluge was, the which time faithfully considered, cometh to a five hundredth years. They affirm and stiffly stand in opinion of their Deluge. And if ye say the contrary, they will efforce by certain arguments to sustain the contrary. They say after that the waters were gone back & retired, there came a great Charaibe, the greatest that ever was among them, that brought thither a people from a far country, that people being naked as they are at this day, 
The original of these Americans.  the which hath since so multiplied, that of them they say they are descended. It seemeth to me not repugnant to reason, that there hath been countries drowned since noah's time, (throughout the whole world) but seeing we have none but that the holy Scripture showeth, I will let it pass. 
How the wild men did first use to cut wood.  Therefore let us return to these wild men's fire, the which they use for many things, to roast and seeth their meats, to burn down Trees, until that they found since the means to cut wood with stones, and now of late days with Iron, the which they have learned of the Christians that have gone thither. I doubt not that Europa, and other countries have been without Iron. But Pliny writeth in the seventh book of his natural history, 
Dedalus the first inventor of a Forge. Pedris inventor of the Saw A kind of Fish.  that Dedalus was the first inventor of iron work, or forge, with the which he forged himself a wedge, an axe, a saw, & nails. Notwithstanding Ovid in the eight book of his Metamorphosis, saith, that one named Pedris, of the kindred of Dedalus, invented a saw like to the fin of a fish. And of that kind of fish (passing at our return under the Equinoctial line,) we took one that had the fin upon the back, above a foot long. Therefore these wild men desiring the use of iron work of late days, for to serve their necessities, have learned to forge, being first instructed by Christians.   

Of the river of Vases, likewise of certain beasts that are found thereabout. And of the land named Morpion. Cap. 54.  

The lying of the river of Vases.  THis River of Vases, being there so much esteemed as Charanta Loire, or the River of Sayne, being twenty five leagues from jenaria, where we did remain, and where as at this day do inhabit Frenchmen, is much frequented, aswell for the habundants of good Fish, as for the Navigation and other things necessary. This flood watereth a great country, aswell the hylls, as the plain. In the which is found a certain Mine of Gold, the which bringeth no great profit to the owner, for because that by the fire, it consumeth almost all into smoke. There about are many Rocks, and likewise in many other places of America, the which beareth great quantity of wedges, shining like fine Gold, but not so fine as those of the East country, also other little shining stones. There are found no Rubies, Diamonds, nor other rich stones: besides this, there is great plenty of Marble and jasper stones. And in the said place I hope may be found mines either of Gold, or Silver, the which as yet we dare not under take, because the enemies are near hand. In those hills are seen ravishing beasts, as Lybards, wild Stags, but no Lions, nor Wolves. There is also another kind of beast that the inhabitants name Cacuycu, 
Cacuycu.  having a beard on the chin like a Goat. This beast is greatly inclined to lechery. Also there is found another kind of yellow beast named Sagavius, not only in this place, 
Sagavius a beast.  but in other places, the wild men chase them for to eat them. And if they perceive that they are followed, they will get their young ones on their necks, and run their ways. Of the former beasts there are grey and black ones in Barbaria, and at Peru, like to the colour of a Fox. There are found no Apes as in Africa, but to the contrary, there are found great number of Tattons', 
Tatton a beast.  that are beasts armed, of the which some are of the greatness and height of a great pig, the others less, and this much will I say by the way, their flesh is tender and pleasant for to eat. As touching the people of that country, they are more warlike than in any other place of America, because they border their enemies, the which forceth them to excercise the fears of war. 
Quoniambe● a King redoubted.  Their King in their language is named Quoniambec, the most feared and redoubted that is in all the country, and so is he martial and a worthy warrior▪ And I think that never Menel●us King and ●uider of the Grecians Army, was ever so feared nor redoubted of the Trojans, as this King is of his enemies. The Portingalls, fear him above all others, for he hath caused many of them to die. Ye shall see his palaces which in a lodging made of purpose; but yet like to the others, hanged without round about with Portingalls head. For it is the custom to carry away the heads of their enemies, and to hang them at their lodgings.  
This King having knowledge of our coming, came straightways to see us at the place where we were, & there remained the space of eighteen days, occupying the most part of the time, specially three hours, to recite and tell his victories and noble acts against his enemies. Moreover, threatening the Portugeses, with certain jests and countenances, whom he named in their language Peroes. 
Peroes.  This king is the most renowned of all the country, his village & land is great: fortified all about with earth, planting therein certain pieces of Artillery, as Fauconnets, that he hath won from the Portugese's. As touching towns & houses of stone, there is none, but as I said before, they have lodgings very long & broad, the which at the beginning was not had, for the people that then were, did so little esteem to be in safeguard, that they forced not for walled Towns, nor strong holds, but they wandered abroad, as do the wild beasts, without having any certain place for to take their rest, but they rested them even in that place where the night overtook them, without fear of any thieves, the which the Americans do not though they be very wild. Now to conclude, this King of whom we speak, thinketh himself very great, & hath nothing else to rehearse, but his greatness, reputing it a great glory & honour, to have made to die many people, and to have eaten them by and by, yea to the number of five thousand as he said. I cannot remember that there hath been the like inhumanity, 
How many it is to be thought that julius Caesar hath slain in his battles.  as is in this people. Pliny showeth that julius Caesar in his battles as it is judged, hath slain ninety two thousand & eleven hundredth men. And there are showed of many other wars & great slaughters, but they have not eaten one another. Now to our purpose: this King and his subjects are in continual war with the Portugal's of Morpion, 
The description of the land of Morpion.  and with the wild men of the country. Morpion is a place bending towards the River of Plate, or to the strait of Magnellan, distant from the line twenty six degrees, being subject to the Portugese's, so that the King of Portugal hath there a Lieutenant general, with a great number of people of all estates, and slaves, whereas they behave themselves so well, that there cometh from thence great profit to the King of Portugal. 
The fruitfulness of Morpion.  At the beginning they began to plant great quantity of Canes to make Sugar. But since they have not greatly travailed therein, but have occupied themselves to a better work, since that they have found out mines of Silver. This place hath great quantity of good fruit, with the which they make Conserves, after their manner, and chief of a fruit named Navas. 
Navas.  Among these Trees and fruits, I will rehearse one named in their language Cochine, bearing fruit as great as Pompey, the leaves like to a Bay tree, the fruit made like an Estryge egg, it is not good to eat, but pleasant to behold when the tree is full. The wild men (beside that they make thereof vessels or cups to drink in,) they make a certain mystery as strange as is possible. After that this fruit is hollow, they fill it with certain grains of Mill, or such like, then with a stick having one end in the ground, the other end coming through, being decked all over with fair feathers, will keep every household after this sort in their house two or three of them with great reverence, thinking these poor idolaters in handling and sounding this fruit, that their Toupan speaketh unto them, and that by this means they have revelation of all, by the means of their Prophets, so that they esteem and think therein to be some divinity. And they worship no other thing sensible, but this instrument that soundeth when it is handled. And for a rare and strange thing I brought one of them home, the which I got secretly from one, with many skins of Birds of diverse colours, of the which I made present to Monsyer Nicolas of Nicolay, the King's Geographer, a witty man, and a lover, not only of the antiquity, but also of all virtuous things. And since he showed them to the King, being at Paris, in his house, who came of purpose to see the book that he caused to be printed of the east parts, and he showed me, that the King took great pleasure to see such things for that they were until then unknown. Moreover there is plenty of Oranges, Citrous, Canes of Sugar. To be short, this place is very pleasant.  
There is also a river not very great, whereas there are found little Pearls, and great store of Fish, chief of one kind, 
Piraipouchy.  the which they call Piraipouchi, which is as much to say as naughty Fish: it is marvelously disformed, breeding or ingendrieg on the back of a dog Fish, and being young followeth her as his principal tutor. Furthermore in this place of Morpion, the which is inhabited by the Portingalls, are now nourished many domestical beasts, the which the said Portingalls have brought thither, the which enrytcheth greatly, and setteth out the country, beside his natural excellency, and husbandry, the which is daily more and more exercised.   

Of the river of Platte, and the country adjacent. Cap. 55.  
seeing that we are so far in talk, 
The river of Platte, & why it is so named.  I think it good to speak a word or twain by the way of this fair flood of America, the which the Spaniards have named plat, either for his largeness, or for his Mines of Silver that are found hard by, the which in their language they name plat. The wild men of the country name it Paranagacu, which is as much to say, as Sea, or great congregation of water. This River containeth of largeness, twenty six leagues, 
The first voyage attempted by the Spaniards to the River of Platte.  being beyond the line, five degrees, and distant from Caape Saint Augustine, six hundredth and seventy leagues. I think that name of Platte, hath been given by those that first did discover it, for the reason before showed. Also at their first arrival thither they received a marvelous joy, thinking that this river so large, had been the strait of Magellan, the which they sought for to pass on the other side of Ameryca, nevertheless knowing the verity of the thing, they delibered to set foot on land, the which they did. The wild men of the country were marvelously amazed, having never seen Christian before so to aboard their limits. But by succession of time, the Spaniards acquainted them with the wild men, alluring them by gifts and otherwise, so that in viewing the Country, they found many mines of Silver, and after that then had thus viewed the Country, and marked the place very well, than they returned having laden their ships with Erasill. 
The second voyage.  With in a short time after they made ready three great ships with men and munitions for to return, being covetous of the mines, and being arrived at the same place where before they had been, they prepared their skiffs for to take land. First the Captain, having with him four score Soldiers, for to withstand the wild men of the country, if that they had made any insurrection. But the wild men at their arrival fled here and there of purpose, to catch the Spaniards in their danger, 
A slaughter of Spaniards.  so that when they were landed, there came upon them three or four hundredth of the wild men, which in their fury and rage like hungry Lions, they killed and devoured, as their custom and manner is, and afterward they showed their bones, legs and arms, unto the rest of the Spaniards that were in their Ships, threatening them with the like, if that they did descend on land: the which things were showed to me by a Spaniard that was in one of the ships. Also the wild men of the country will show thereof, as a thing worthy of memory, when it is in their minds. 
The third voyage.  After this, the Spaniards returned again thither with a band of two thousand men, with other ships, but for because that they were afflicted with sickness, 
The fourth voyage.  they could attempt nothing. But afterward the Captain Arual, in Anno. 1541. having with him only two hundredth men, made a voyage thither, 
The policy of Captain Aruall.  having also with him a fifty Horses, wherewith he used such policy, that he made the wild men of the country afraid, which thought that these Horses had been devouring beasts, (for to them they were unknown,) this being done, he caused his men to be armed with bright shining Armour, having painted upon their Harnies many dreadful Images, as heads of Lions, Leopards, Bears, Wolves, and such like, with their mouths gaping, & figures of horned devils, the which sight did so affraie the wild inhabitants of the country, that they fled away, & by this means they were driven out of their country, so that the Spaniards remained there Lords and Masters, beside many other lands adjacent, that since they have conquered even to Moluques in the Ocean, to the West of the other coast of America, so that at this day they have in possession a great deal of land about this fair River whereas they have builded Towns & holds. And some of the wild men adjacent, are reconciled with them, and become Christians, True it is that about a hundredth leagues beyond, there are other wild men that make war with them, being stout men and of great stature, 
Wild men as great as Giants.  almost like Giants. And they live with little other food than humane flesh as the Cannibals. This kind of people go so swiftly on foot; that they will easily take wild beasts in their chase: they live longer than any of the other wild men do, as a hundredth and fifty years, and the other less, they are very prone and subject to that damnable sin of lechery, heinous before God, the which I omit, not only for the respect of this country of America, but also many others. 
The richesse of the country about the river of Platte.  These Giants make war aswell with the Spaniards as the wild men about them. Now to our purpose. This River of Platte with the country adjacent, is now very rich aswell in Silver as in stones: this River swelleth or increaseth certain days in the year as doth Aurelana that is at Perou, and Nill in Egypt. At the mouth of this River there are many little islands, of the which some are inhabited, the others not: this country is very full of Hylls and Mountains, from the Caape S. Marry, unto the white Caape, specially that towards Saint Helenes point, distant from the River .65. leagues, and from thence to Arnes Gowrdes .30. leagues, then from thence to Basseas, to the other land so named because of the great valleys that there are. And from Basseas to the Abbey of Fonda .75. leagues. The rest of the country hath not been frequented of christians, extending to the Caape Saint Dominik, or Caape Blank, and from thence to the promontory of the eleven thousand Virgins .52. degrees and a half beyond the Equinoctial, and thereby is the strait of Magellan, of the which we mind hereafter to speak.  
As touching the flat country, it is at this present very fair, by an infinite number of Gardens, Fountains and Rivers of sweet fresh water, in the which are great plenty of very good Fish. And to the said Rivers, there haunteth a kind of beast, that the wild men name in there language Saricoviemia, 
Saricovieme a dainty beast.  which is as much to say, as fine or dainty beasts; the which beast remaineth more in the water than on the land, and is no bigger than a little Cat. The skin of this beast which is intermeddled with grey; white and black, is as fine and smooth as velvet, his feet made like the feet of a water Fowl. And as for his flesh, it is very pleasant and good for to eat. More over, in this country toward the strait, there are many strange and monstrous beasts, but not so cruel as in Africa. And to conclude, this country now is brought to so good a form, that it would not be taken for a strange country: for the wild men of the country have invented of late days by the means of Christians, arts and sciences very ingeniously, so that they may be a very spectacle to many people of Asia, and of our Europe, I mean of those that curiously observe and keep the damnable law of Mahomet, and other fond and devilish Doctrine.   

Of the strait of Magellan, and of Daryen. Cap. 56.  
seeing that we are come so near to this notable place, it shall not be out of the way to write somewhat thereof. Now this strait, called in Greek Poeidinos, as the West between two lands, named in Greek Istmas, a strait or a point of land between two waters, as that of Daryen confineth America toward the South, and there separateth with an other land discovered but not inhabited, even as Gebaltar doth Europe with Africa, and that of Constantinople doth Europe with Asia, being named the strait of Magellan, by his name that first did discover it, 
The lying of the strait of Magellan.  lying fifty two degrees and a half beyond the Equinoctial, containing of breadth, two leagues by one only height strait East and West, two thousand two hundredth leagues from the North to the South, furthermore, from the Caape of Essead, which is at the entering of the strait, unto the other South Sea seventy four leagues, until the first Caape or promontory, which is forty degrees. This strait hath been long time desired and sought, more than two thousand, eight hundredth leagues, for to enter by this strait into the Sea of Magellan, to attain to the Islands of Moluques.  
Americus Vestucia, one of the best Pilots that ever was, hath coasted almost from Ireland unto the Cape of Saint Augustin, by the commandment of the king of Portugal the year .1501. And since another Captain the year .1534. sailed unto the Region named of Giants. In this Region between the River of plat, and this strait, the inhabitants are very mighty, named in their language Pategones, Giants, because of their high stature, & form of bodies. They which first discovered this country, took one of them finely, being twelve foot long, who was so uneasy to hold, that .25. men had enough to do about him, and for to keep him it behoved them to bind his feet and hands in their ship, notwithstanding they could not keep him long alive, but for sorrow & thought (as they say) he died for hunger. This Region is of like temperateness as Canada and other countries near to our Pole, and therefore the inhabitants are clothed with the skin of a certain beast named in their speech Su, which is as much to say, as Water, for because (to my judgement) that this beast for the most part remaineth in the waters and floods. This beast is a ravenous beast, made after a strange manner: besides this if she be chased or pursued, as the people of the country use to do, for to have the skin, she taketh her young ones on her back, and covering them with her tail that is thick and long, saveth herself with running. Nevertheless the wild men of the country use a policy for to take this beast, making a deep pit in the ground near to the place where she maketh her most residence, the which they cover over with green leaves, so that in running knowing not of this pit, the poor beast falleth in with her young ones: and she seeing herself thus taken, in her rage she killeth her young ones, and maketh such a terrible noise, that she maketh the wild men afraid. But for all this, in the end, they kill her with darts and arrows, and then they take her skin. Now to our purpose. This captain Fernandus of Magellan, a courageous man, 
The voyage o● Frrnandus of Magellan.  being informed of the riches that might be found in the Islands of Moluques, as great quantity of spice, ginger, musk, grey amber, myrabolanes, rhubarb gold, pearls, and other richesse, specially in the Islands of Matel, Magian, Tidora, and Terenata, near enough the one to the other, thinking by this same strait to find a way more shorter and necessary, was minded to attempt it, departing from the Canaries, to the Islands of Caape verde, keeping his right course to the promontory of saint Augustine eight degrees, beside the line, 
The Caape of Virgins.  coasting near to the Caape of Virgins, distant from the Equinoctial fifty two degrees, near to the strait before spoken. And after he had sailed the space of five days from the east right to the West on the Ocean, the which in swelling or flowing, carried them without sail right to the South, the which made them joyful & glad, although the most part of their men were dead by the incommodities of the sea & the air, but chief by hunger & thirst. In this strait are many fair islands, but not inhabited, the country about is very barren: full of hills and mountains, and there is found nothing but ravishing beasts, birds of divers kinds, chief Estriges, wood of divers sorts, cedars, and others. Also an other kind of tree bearing fruit almost like a cherry, but much more pleasant to eat. This is the occasion, and how this strait was found out: since they have found out an other way, sailing upon a great river on the coast of Perou, in the land of Chagra, four leagues from Panana, and from the gulf S. Michael .25. leagues. Not long after a captain having sailed a certain time upon these floods, adventured to visit the country. And the king of the wild men of that country, 
Therea.  named in their language Therea, received him very gently with presents of gold and pearls, as certain Spaniards have showed me, that were in their company, although that in going on the land they were not without great danger, as well for the wild beasts as other incommodities. They found afterward a certain number of the inhabitants of the country very wild, and more to be feared than the first, to the which for the small trust and confidence that they had in them, they offered and promised their service and friendship, specially to their King, whom they call Atorizo, 
Atorizo.  of whom also they received certain presents, as great pieces of gold, weighing ten pound. After that they had given to him also of such things, as they had and thought would be most to his contentation, the which was small iron work, shirts and gowns of small value: In the end with good guide they came unto Daryen, 
The straight of Daryen.  from thence they entered in, and discovered the south sea, on the other coast or side of America, 
The Islands of the Moluques.  in the which are the Moluques, where as they having found the commodities before showed, have fortified themselves hard by the sea, so that by this strait of land, they have without comparison shortened their way, without entering into the strait of Magellan, as well for their trade as for other commodities. And since that time they traffic and trade to the Island of Moluques, the which are great, & at this present inhabited and converted to the christian faith, the which before was peopled with very cruel people, much more cruel than those of America, which were blinded in ignorance, and having no knowledge of the great riches and treasure that the country brought forth. About this place of the west sea, there are four islands desert inhabited (as they say) only with satires, therefore they have named them islands of satires. Likewise in this same sea are found ten islands named Manioles, inhabited with wild men, the which are of no religion, near to the which there are great rocks that draw the ships unto them, because of the iron wherewith they are nailed. For the which cause those that trade into that country there, are constrained to use small ships or skiffs pinned with wood for to eschae the danger of these rocks or adamant stone. Thus far as touching the strait of Magellan. Now as touching the other land named austral, 
The land of austral.  which in costing the strait is left on the left hand, is not yet known of christians, but only of an English pilot, being a man aswell seen & esteemed in navigation as any that can be found, who having passed this strait, showed me that he had descended on land so that I was bold to demand of him what people did inhabit in the country, he showed me that they were mighty black men, which I know to be contrary: knowing that this land is almost of the height of England & Scotland, for the country is of such a temperateness, that it is subject to winter with continual frosts and snows.   

How that those that inhabit from the river of Plate unto the strait of Magellan, are our Antipodes. cap. 57  
ALthough we see as well in the sea as in rivers, many Islands divided & separated from the main land, yet nevertheless the element of the earth is esteemed to be one alone, and only body, the which is no other thing than this largeness of the earth, the which seemeth unto us all full for his great and wonderful amplitude. And such was the opinion of Thales Milesius, one of the seven wise men of Grecia, and other philosophers, as Plutarch showeth. Oecetes the great philosopher, 
To know that there are two worlds or no.  and Pythagoras ordained two parts of the world, that is, this wherein we inhabit which we name Hemispheria, and that of the Antipodes, which we likewise call the lower hemisphery. Theopompus the historiograph saith after Hermogenes, that Silena's showed king Midas, that there was an other world and globe of earth than this which we are in. Macrobius last of all, doth most amply treat of these two hemispheries and parts of the earth, to whose works ye may have recourse if that ye mind to know farther on the opinions of Philssophie. But thus much must be known, whether that these two parts of the earth ought to be altogether separated as earths that differ, and so to be judged to be two worlds, the which is not true, considering that there is but one element of the earth, the which we must judge, is cut by the sea in two parts, as Solin writeth in his polyhistor, speaking of the people Hyperbores, but I had rather say, that the whole world is separated into two equal parts by this imagined circle which we name equinoctial. Furthermore, if ye behold the image and figure of the world in a globe or a earde, ye shall clearly see how the sea divideth the earth in two parts, not altogether equal, which are the two hemispheries, so named by the Greeks, one part of the world containeth Asia, Africa, and Europe, the other containeth America, Florida, Canada, and other regions comprehended under the names of the occidental of West Indies, in the which many think our Antipodes to inhabit. 
divers opinions of the Antipodes.  I know well that there are many opinions of the Antipodes: some judge and think that there are none, others that there are, and that they are those that inhabit the other hemisphery, which to us is hid. As for me, I am of this advise, that those that inhabit under the two Poles (for we have showed that they are inhabited) are Antipodes, one to the other. For example, those that inhabit the north, the nearer they draw to the pole, the higher it is: 
What people the Antipodes and Antichtones the one to the other.  the pole opposite is abased, to the contrary, so that it must needs be, that such are Antipodes, and the others, the farther they withdraw to the Poles, approaching to the Equinoctial, are less Antipodes. Therefore I take for right Antipodes, those that inhabit the two Poles, and the two others taken directly, that is to wit, east and West, and the others in the midst Anticthones, rather than Antipodes, to those that inhabit in Lima, Luzco, Eariquipa, or Perou, to those that about this great flood Indus, in the country of Calicut, the Island of Zeilan, and other lands of Asia, the inhabitants of the islands of Moluques, from whence the spices come, to those of Aethiopia, now called Guinea. And for this reason, Pliny hath well spoken, that it was Tabroban, where as were the Antipodes, 
A difference between Antipodes and Antictones.  confining as many Antipodes, with Anticthones. For truly those that live in these Islands are Anticthones, to the people that inhabit that part of Aethiopia, taking from the river of Nill, unto the Island of Meroa. Although that those of Mexicona, are directly Antipodes, to the people of Arabia, Felicia, and those that are at the ends of the Caape of good hope. Now the Greeks have named those Antipodes, that go with their feet overthwart one over an other, as those of which we have showed. And Anticthones, 
Anteci.  those that inhabit a land divided, as those whom they call Anteci, as the Spaniards, Frenchmen, and Almains, to those that inhabit near to the river of Plate, and the Patagones', of the which we have spoken in the former Chapter, which are near to the strait of Magellan, are Antipodes, the others named Pateci, 
Pataeci.  that inhabit one only zone, as Frenchmen, and Almains, contrary to those that are Antaeci. And although that these two properly are not Antipodes, notwithstanding they are commonly called so, and many mix them one with an other. 
The manner of going of the Antipodes was not well known nor approved of the elders.  And for this reason, I have noted that those of the Caape of good hope, are not to us altogether Antipodes, but those whom they call Anteci, the which inhabit a land not opposite, but divided, as those that are beyond the Equinoctial, to us that are here, even to come to the Antipodes. I doubt not but that many do mistake this manner of going of the Antipodes, which hath been the cause that many have not approved it. 
Saint August. lib. 15. of the City of God.  Also S. Augustine in the xu book of the City of God. chap. ix. but he that would diligently consider shall find it very easy to comprehend. If it be so that the earth is round like a globe, hanging in the midst of the world, it must needs be, that it be beholden of the firmament on all sides. Therefore we that inhabit the higher hemisphery, as touching us, we see one part of the firmament to us proper & particular. The others inhabiting the lower hemisphery,) we being to them superior) they see the other part of the firmament which to them is appropried. There is like reason of the one as of the other: but ye shall note that these two Hemispheries have one only and common centrie in the earth. Thus much of the Antipodes: now to our matter.   

How these wild men exercise husbandry and make gardens of a root named Manihot, and of a tree that they name Peno absou. Ca 58.  
Our Americans in the time of peace, have little other occupations but to make gardens, 
The common occupations of the wild men.  or when the time requireth, they are constrained to go to the wars, but some of them as we have before showed use certain trades, nevertheless necessity constraineth them to labour the earth as we in our countries. And they in a manner follow the custom of the elders, who after that they had endured and eaten the fruits that proceeded from the earth without any labour or industry of man, so that being not sufficient to nourish and sustain all that lived on the earth, it caused rapines and invasions, preparing each one a certain portion of land, which they separated by certain limits, and then among men began the state of the people and common weals. 
How these wild men labour the earth  And thus our wild men of America have learned to labour the earth, not with oxen and horses or other domestical beasts as we have here, for they have none such, but with the sweat and labour of their bodies, as the like also in other provinces, notwithstanding that which they labour is very little, as certain gardens distant from their houses about two or three leagues, where as they sow only Mill, and no other grain, but they plant certain roots, the which they gather two times a year, at Christmas, which is their Summer, when the Sun is in Capricornus and at Pentecost: this Mill is as great as a pease, commonly white and black, 
Mill white and black.  the herb that it beareth is like to sea reeds. Now the fashions of their garden is after this sort and manner; When after that they have cut seven or eight acres of wood, leaving nothing but the foot or body of the tree about a man's height, they put the fire therein, and burn it, and the grass about it, being all in a valley or low country: they scratch the earth with certain instruments of wood, or of iron, since that they have had the knowledge, than the women plant this Mill and roots which they name Hetich, 
Hetich.  making a hole in the ground with their finger, as we plant Beans in this country: To fatten and amend the earth, they have no practice, but it is fruitful enough of itself, being never left untilled, as we do many lands in our Europe. Notwithstanding, it is a wonderful thing that it will not bear our corn, such as we have and use. I myself have sometimes▪ sowed, for we carried corn with us for to prove, but it would never profit. And to my judgement, it is not long of the ground, but of some other little vermin that eateth it in the earth: Nevertheless, those that are remaining there, may in time make a surer trial and experience. 
In America no use of corn. Husbandry hath been of a long time.  As touching our americans, it is not to be marveled, though they never had the use of corn: For likewise in our Europe, and in other countries, at the first men lived with such fruits as the earth brought forth of herself without any man's labour. True it is that husbandry is very ancient, as appeareth in Holy Scripture by Abel and Cain. 
The first use of Corne.  But though that they had corn since the beginning, yet they knew not the use thereof. Diodorus writeth, that the first bread was seen in Italy, being brought thither by Isis, Queen of Egypt, the which showed the mean how to grind corn, and to bake bread: for before they did eat the fruits of the earth, as Nature brought them forth, whether that the earth was laboured or no: but that all men universally on the earth have lived like as do the brute beasts, it is rather a fable than a true story feigned by Poets, and of such as imitate them, as Virgile showeth in Georgicon. But I believe rather the holy Scripture that maketh mention of Abel, and of his first fruits that he offered to God. Well the americans make meal of those roots that are called Manihot, which are as great as my arm, 
Meal of roots Manihot.  a foot and a half long, and they are writhe or crooked most commonly. And this root is of a little tree in height from the ground about four foot, the leaves are like to those which we call Patallionis, which are in number six or seven at the end of every tree, and every leaf half a foot long, & three fingers broad. Their manner to make this sustenance or meat is this: they bruise these roots either dry or green, with a large bark of a tree, garnished about with very hard stones: this being done, they make it hot in some vessel of earth on the fire with a certain quantity of water, so that it gathereth into small lumps, and it is very good when it is thus used, and a good nourisher. And ye shall understand, that from Perou, Canada, and Florida, in all the lands and countries between the Ocean and Magellan, as America, Cannibal, even to the strait of Magellan, they use this kind of food, the which is very common, and yet there is distant from the one end to the other more than two thousand leagues by land, and they use it with their flesh and fish as we do bread. These wild men use a strange manner in their eating, 
The strange manner of eating of the wild men.  for they never bring their hands to their mouths, but cast their meat into their mouths more than a foot off, to the which they are very apt. Also they mock christians that use otherwise. All the labours about these roots are remitted to the women, thinking it not decent for men to occupy themselves therein. 
A kind of white beans  These Americans do plant beans, the which are all white and flat, more large and longer than ours. Also they have a kind of white gourds, not differing to those that grow in Turkey and Italy, they boil them and then eat them with salt, 
How they make salt.  the which salt is made with salt water boiled, when it is consumed to half, with an other thing they make it turn into salt.  

Bread made of spice and salt.  Likewise with this salt and a kind of spice of grains, they make loaves of bread as big as a man's head, of the which many eat with flesh and fish, chief the women. Beside this, they mingle many times spice with their meal, not beaten to dust as we do, but as it is gathered. 
Bread of dry fish.  Moreover, they make bread with dried fish very good to eat, with other things mingled with it, which I do not know: I will not forget here a kind of colewort leaves, almost like to the broad leaves that grow on rivers sides, the which they call Nenuphar, 

Nenuphar, a kind of colewort.  
Peno absou a tree.   with an other kind of herb, growing like our thistles. Now there resteth to speak of a tree, which they name in their language Peno absou. This tree beareth a fruit of the greatness of a good big apple round like an egg, the which is not good to eat, but rather dangerous, as poison. This fruit hath within six nuts like our Almonds, but somewhat more larger and flat, in the which is a kernel, which (as they say) is good to heal wounds and sores, when that they have been hurt in the war with the Arrows of their enemies or otherwise. I have brought of them into France, which I have given unto my friends: the mean to use them is this: First they draw out of this kernel certain oil, the which they put upon the wound. The bark of this tree hath a very strange smell, and the leaf always green, of the thickness of a testorne, and made like the leaves of Pourslane. In this tree frequenteth a bird, having a great bush of feathers on her head as yellow as fine gold, 
A bird of a strange and wonderful beauty.  the tail black, and the rest of her feathers yellow and black, with some strikes of divers other colours, red about the chaps, between the bill and the eyes like scarlet, and she keepeth this tree only for her food, which is little worms that she findeth in the said tree. To make short, leaving many kinds of trees, I will say thus much, that there are five or six kind of palm trees bearing fruit, not as those of Egypt, that bear Dates, for these bear none, but other kind of fruits, some as great as an egg, the others less. Among the which palm trees, 
Gerahwa. Iry.  is that which they call Gerahwa, another named Iry, the which beareth another kind of fruit, differing: there is also that doth bear their fruit all round, and as great as a prune or damsyn, being of the like colour when it is ripe, the which before hath a taste like verjuice: it beareth a white kernel of the greatness of a hasyll nut, the which these wild men do eat. Thus much as touching our America, the which I have thought good to set out after that I had known the secrets thereof, the which we may hereafter set forth more at large. Likewise of many trees, herbs, and other secrets with their properties, according to the experience of the people of the country, the which we have left out to avoid prolixity. Also we have thought good by the way somewhat to speak as touching the land of Brasile.   

How and after what sort the land of America was discovered, and brasil would found: with many other trees seen no where but in that country. Cap. 59  
THis we know of a truth, that Americus Vesputia is the first that discovered the main land between the two seas, 
The land of Brasile discovered by the Portugese's.  though not all the land, but the most part. And since the Portugeses many times being not content with their limits, have always hazarded themselves to discover and find out countries, even as they found the commodities, and as they were entertained of the people of the country. They therefore visiting the countries, and seeking as the Trojans did in the land of Carthage, they saw divers forms and manners of feathers, with the which they did trade and traffic, specially red ones, which were coloured, so that they were desirous to know the mean how to make this colour. The people of the country showed them the Brasille tree, which they do name in their language Oraboutan, 
Oraboutan, the brasile tree.  and is very fair to look on, the bark thereof is of a grey colour without, and the wood is red within, and chief the heart, the which is more excellent than the rest, whereof they do occupy most, so that then the Portugese's brought home their ships laden therewith. And since that we have had the knowledge of it, thereof is made a very great trade. The Portugese's can not abide that any other people or Nation should trade thither, for that they were the first that discovered that country which is of a truth. This brasil tree beareth leaves like unto box, so little but very thick, it rendereth no gum as others do, neither beareth it any fruit: It hath been better esteemed than it is at this present, specially in the east countries: at the first it was thought, that this was of that kind of wood that the Queen of Saba brought to king Solomon, as is showed in the first book of the Kings. 
A voyage into the east country by Onesicritus captain to Alexander the great.  Also the great Captain Onesicritus, in a voyage that he made into the Island of Tabroban, lying in the Ocean sea, toward the east Indies, brought a great quantity of this wood and other things requisite, the which his master Alexander did highly commend and esteem. As touching this brasil, that which is on the side of the river of janaria, Morpion, and Caape de Fria, is better than that of Cannibal, and on the coast of Marignan. When that the Christians are there for to laade brasil, the wild men of the country cut it themselves, and sometimes they bring or carry it three or four leagues to the ships. I leave to your judgement their pain and travel, and all for to get some poor or coarse weed and shirt. Moreover in that country is found an other wood yellow, with the which some make their sword. Likewise an other of the colour of purple, 
Yellow wood. Wood of the colour of purple  with the which to my judgement may be made fair and goodly works. I am in doubt whether it be that wood which Plutarch speaketh of, saying that Caius Marius Rutilius, the first dictator of the public weal among the Romans, caused to be drawn in a purple wood a battle, 
A battle drawn in purple wood.  wherein the personages were not greater than my three fingers. And this wood was brought from high Africa. Furthermore, there are found other trees, of which the wood is as white as paper, 
white wood.  and very tender, and therefore the wild men set not by them. The property of which trees I could not otherwise learn, saving only it cometh to my remembrance of white wood, whereof Pliny speaketh, 
L●●. 10. ca 19 Betula.  the which he nameth Betula, white and tender, of the which were made the wands that were borne before the Magistrates of Rome. And even as there are found and seen divers kinds of trees differing in form, colour & other properties, so in like manner is found diversity of ground and earth, some fatter than others. 
Diversity in earth.  Also clay ground, of the which they make earthen vessels, after their manner as we do for to eat and drink. Thus much as touching our America, though not so much as I have and might have seen, but so much as I thought worthy to be noted and written, for to satisfy and content the gentle good will of the loving Readers, if that it please them to take as great pleasure and patience to read it, as I have taken pains after so many travails and pains in this hard and dangerous voyage to set it forth. I am sure that some will find this my discourse t● long, others to short. Therefore I seek to keep a mean to satisfy and content every man's desire.   

Of our departing from France Antarctic, or America. Capit. 60.  
WE have here before gathered together, and showed amply and at large of these nations, the which of ancient Historiographers was unknown. Now therefore after we had remained there in that country, as long as opportunity did serve, and also needful for the contentation of the mind, we began to make provision for our return, being not minded to remain there any longer. Therefore under the conduct of Mounsieur Albois the County, 
How the Author returned from America.  Captain general of the French kings ships into America, a worthy Gentleman, and well seen in navigation, as if all his life time he had exercised it, beside other virtues. We took a clean contrary way to that which we came, because of the winds that are proper to return: but our return was longer by five hundredth leagues than the way we went, and more dangerous: so the last day of januarie at four of the clock in the morning, we took shipping with those that carried back the ships, we sailed out of the River of janaria, into the great sea on the other side, drawing toward the West, leaving upon the right hand the coast of Aethiopia, the which we coasted thitherward. At the which departure, the wind was to us very favourable, but not of long continuance: for suddenly the wind did change even right a head to the North, and Northwest, the which with the sea raging and unconstant in those parts, kept us from our right course, casting us now here and there, until at the last with great difficulty, we discovered Cape de Fria, where as we came a land at our first coming thither. And again, we stayed there the space of eight days, And the ninth day the south wind began to blow, the which did conduct us ninety Leagues into the Main sea, leaving the lower country, and coasting a far off Mahovac, because of the dangers. For the Portugeses keep that quarter, and the wild men, which unto us are both enemies (as I have showed) where as within these two years, they have found mines of gold and silver, which hath caused them to build in that place, and to strengthen themselves there to inhabit. Now we sailing continually upon the sea with great peril, until we came to the height of Caape saint Augustine, 
Caape Saint Augustine.  the which to double we remained the space of two months or thereabout, being very great, lying far out into the sea: 

Caape of good hope, why it is called Lion of the sea.  
Caape of saint Michael.   And no marvel, for I know some of good memory, that have been doubling of this Caape three or four months: and if the wind had not been favourable, we had been in danger to have stayed longer, although there had happened no other inconvenience. This Caape is of length .8. leagues distant from the river from whence we be departed .302. leagues. It entereth into the sea nine or ten leagues at the least, and therefore it is as much feared of the navigants or sailors on that coast, as the Caape of good hope, on the coast of Ethiopia, the which for this cause they have named Lion of the sea, as I have already, showed: Or like to that which in the sea Aegee, in Acaia, the which is now called Moorelande. Also Caape S. Angel, the which also is very dangerous. 
Very dangerous lands discovered by captain Pynson.  This Caape was so named by those that first did discover it, which was as some say, one Pynson, a spaniard. Also it is so marked in our Card Marins. This Pynson with his son have marvelously discovered unknown countries, not before found out. The year .1501. Emanuel king of Portugal sent him into the base America, for to find the strait of Forna, and Daryens, that they might pass more easier to Moluques, without going to the strait of Forna, and Daryens, that they might pass more easier to Moluques, without going to the strait of Magellan. And they sailing on that coast discovered this fair promontory, whereas setting foot on land they found the place so fair and temperate; although it be but .340. Degrees of longitude minute .0. and eight of latitude, minute .0. that they there stayed, to the which place since are gone other Portugeses, with a number of ships and people, and by succession of time, having alured the people of the country by gifts, and pacified them, they made a hold named Castle Marin, 
castle Marin. Fermanbow.  & since they have edified another near unto this named Fermanbow, trading there one with another. The Portugeses laade cotton, wild beasts skins, spices, and among other things prisoners that the wild men of the country take in the wars of their enemies, the which they carry into Portugal for to sell.   

Of the Cannibals as well of the main land as of the islands, and of a tree named Acaion. Cap. 61.  
THis great promontory being this doubled and affronted with great difficulty it behoved us to attempt fortune and to shorten our way as much as was possible, not keeping far of from the main land, chief ceasting somewhat near to the Island of S. Paul, 
The Ilrude of S. Paul.  and other little Islands not inhabited near to the main land, whereas are the Cannibals, the which country divideth the King of Spayns land from the King of Portugal, as hereafter shallbe showed. Seeing that we are come to these Cannibals we will speak our word. This people from the Caape S. Augustine, and beyond, near to Marignan, is the most cruelest, and inhuman people that are in America. These imps eat most commonly human flesh, as we do beef or mutton, & have thereunto more appetite and delight: and this is of a truth, that when they have any of their enemies in their hands, it is hard to get them from them, for the great desire that they have to eat them, like Ravening Lions. There is no beast in the wilderness neither in the deserts of Africa or Arabia, that longeth so sore or that is so greedy of human flesh, as these wild and brutish people. Also there is no nation that can be acquainted w●th them, neither Christians nor others: And none can trade into their country without leaving of pledges, so mistrustful they are, thinking themselves of more credit than others. For this cause the Spaniards and Portugeses, have played them some ill tricks, in memorial whereof, when that they may get any of them, God knoweth how they are handled, for there is no other way but death, and so to be eaten and devoured of these imps. Therefore there is continual war between them and these people, and many Christians they have devoured. These Cannibals have on their lips, 

Continual war between the Spaniards and the Cannibals.  
The fruitfulness of their country.   stones green and white as the other wild men have, but without comparison more longer, for they descend even to their breast. Moreover the country is fruitful enough, better than belongeth to such wicked beasts, for it beareth great quantity of fruits, herbs and wholesome roots, with a great number of trees, named by them Acaion, bearing a fruit as big as my fist, fashioned like a Goose egg: some of them therewith make a kind of beverage, although the fruit is not good to eat, at the top of this fruit groweth a kind of nuts, made like a Cunneys' tail, & the kernel within is very good to eat, after it hath had the heat of the fire. The shell is very full of oil, having a sharp taaste, with the which the wild men may make more store and plenty, than we can of our nuts: the leaf of this tree is like to the leaf of a pear tree, a little more pointed and red at the end: the bark of this tree, is tauney and bitter, the wild men put this wood to no use, for that it is somewhat tender and soft. In the Islands of the Cannibals, whereas there is great plenty of these trees, they cut the wood to burn, for that they have little other wood, and also Gaiac. This much as touching this tree Acaion. There are also other trees whereof the fruit is dangerous to eat, among the which there is one named Haovay. Furthermore this country is full of hills & mountains, 
Haovay a venomous tree.  with good mines of gold. There is a high and rich mountain, where these wild men get their green stones, that they bear at their lips, and therefore it is not unpossible, but that there may be found emeralds and other riches, if this obstinate people would permit, that we might go in sa●egarde: likewise, there is found white Marble, 
The riches of the country of Cannibals.  and black, jasper, and Porphire. And in all this country from the Caape S. Augustine, unto the river of Marignan, they use all one manner of living, as the others do, at Caape de Fria: the same River separateth the land of Perou, from the Cannibals, 

The river of Marignan separateth Perou from the Cannibals.  
Aurelane a River of Perou. The Island of the Trinity very rich.   and hath in breadth at the mouth fifteen leagues or thereabout, with some Islands peopled and rich in gold, for the wild men have found, a mean how to try it, and to make broad rings like to buckles, and others, that they hang on their nostrils, and on their cheeks, the which they carry for magnificence. The Spaniards say, that the great river that cometh from Perou, named Aurelane, and this, do meet: upon this River there is another Island named the Trinity, distant ten degrees from the line, having in length about .30. leagues, & in breadth about .8. leagues, the which is the richest Island that may be found in any part, for that it beareth all kind of metals. But for that the Spaniards, landing there many times for to bring it to their subjection and obedience, have cruelly handled the inhabitants, therefore they have been rudtly repulsed, and the better part destroyed. This Island bringeth forth abundance of a certain fruit, 
A kind of tree like to a Palm tree.  the tree whereof is like to a Palm tree, with the which they make drink. Furthermore, there is found good Frankincense, and Gaiac: likewise in many other Islands near to the main land. Also there is between Perou, and the Cannibals, many Islands named Cannibals, somewhat near to Zamana, of which the chiefest is distant from the Spanish Island .30. leagues, all the which islands are under the obedience of a King, whom they call Sassique, of his subjects he is well obeyed. The greatest Island hath in length .60. leagues, and of breadth .48. rude and full of mountains, almost comparable to the Island of Corsa, in the which their King keepeth customably. The wild men of this Island are mortal enemies to the Spaniards, after such a sort, that they can by no means trade.  
Also these people are ugly to behold, high minded, and courageous, very subject to theft, there are many trees of Gaiac, and another that beareth a fruit of the greatness of an Egg, very fair to behold, nevertheless it is venomous, therefore they temper therewith their arrows, that they use to aid themselves with against their enemies in the juice or lykor of this fruit.  
There is yet another, of the which the lykor that cometh forth is poison, notwithstanding the root is very good to eat, and therewith they make bread as in America, although that the trunk, the branches, & the leaves do not greatly differ. The reason why this tree should bear both sustenance and poison, I leave to the Philosophers to judge & contemplate. Their usage in war is, as the Americans and other Cannibals, of which we have showed.   

Of the River of Amazons, otherwise named Aurelane, by the which ye may sail into the country of Amazons, and into France Antarctic. Cap. 62.  
Whilst that I have pen in hand for to write of places discovered and inhabited beyond our Equinoctial, between the South and the West, for to bring things to light, and to give more evident knowledge, I am determined to set out in writing a voyage as far, as difficile and hard and most dangerously adventured of the Spaniards, as well by water as by land unto the Territory of the peaceable sea, 
The seapacifick or peaceable or the sea of Magellan.  otherwise called Mare Magellan, or the sea of Magellan, whereas are the Islands of Moluques and others. And for that ye shall note this better, ye shall understand, that the King of Spain hath under his obedience much land in the West Indies, as well in islands as main land at Perou & America, the which by succession of time he hath obtained and gotten, by which means at this day he receiveth great profit from thence. Now among others, a Spanish Captain being in his prince's behoof at Perou, 
Mhe lying of the River of Plate.  minded on a day to discover as well by land as by water to the River of Plate, the which is distant from Caape S. Augustine. 700. Leagues beyond the line, and from the said Caape to the Islands of Perou, about three hundredth leagues. This Captain not weighing the difficulty that there was in the long way, neither in the excessible high mountains, neither yet in the people nor in the wild beasts, but only in the executing of this high enterprise, beside the wonderful riches, which being done he should get himself an immortal fame, for him and all his posterity.  
This Captain having therefore made all things in a readiness, and in good order as the case required, carrying with him certain Merchandise whereby to get victuals by the way, and other munitions, having in his company fifty Spaniards, with a certain number of slaves, for to labour and to do other service, with certain Indians, that had been made Christians, as well for to conduct them, as for to intreprete the languages set forward with certain Carvels or small Skifs on the river of Aurelana, 
The lying and wonderful greatness of the River of Aurelana,  the which I may well testify is the most longest and largest, that is in all the world, his breadth is .59. leagues, and his length more than a thousand. Many call it the sweet sea, the which proceedeth from the sides of the high mountains of Molubeba, with the river of Marignan: notwithstanding their entry or beginning is distant .104. leagues one from another, and they are mixed above six hundredth leagues, within the plain country, the sea or flood entering in above .40. leagues.  

The original of Nill.  This river increaseth at certain times of the year as doth Nill, that passeth by egypt, proceeding from the mountains of the Moon, according to the opinion of some, the which also I think to be so. It was named Aurelana, by the name of him, that first made upon it a long Navigation. 
Aurelana or the River of Amazons.  Nevertheless, before it was discovered by some, that have named it in their Cards, the river of Amazons: it is very dangerous because of certain rocks, and other inconveniences which cannot be avoided but with great difficulty. Being entered somewhat far into the river, there are certain fair islands, of which some are peopled, the others not.  
Moreover this River is dangerous all a long, for that it is peopled as well in the Islands as on the banks, with many strange and Barbarous people, the which of a long time have had enmity and hatred to spaniards, and others strangers, fearing least they should aboard their country, and spoil them. Also if that by misfortune they get any, they kill them without remission. And eat them roasted and boiled, as they do other flesh.  
Therefore taking ship in one of these Islands of Perou, 
The Island of the Holy Cross.  named the Holy Cross, in the great Sea, for to get the strait of this flood or river, with a fair wind they set of, coasting near enough to the land, for to view and know the country, the people, and for many other commodities. Coasting then in their Navigation now here now there as the commodity did permit, the wild men of the country showed themselves in great number on the banks, with certain signs of admiration, seeing this strange Navigation, and array of people, vessels and munitions proper for war. In the mean time, the Navigantes were not a little astonied for their part for to see such a multitude of uncivil people and altogether brutish, which by their countenance showed, that they would distress them, the which occasion caused them to sail & row a long time without casting anchor, or setting foot on land. Notwithstanding, at the last, famine and other necessities, caused them in the end to strike sail and let fall anchor. The which they having done, about a handgunne shot from the land, there rested no other thing, but with flattering signs, and other means to win the favour of the wild men, for to get some victuals, and space to rest their weary bones. So that some of the wild men being in their little boats made of the bark of trees, being alured with these fair shows, did jeopard themselves to approach, not without some doubt, having never seen Christian come so near to their limits. Notwithstanding their fear, the Spaniards made sign of more friendship, showing them knives and other small Iron works shining, the which caused them to approach. And after that they had made unto them presents of small value, this wild people went with all diligence to purchase and get them some victuals, so at length they brought them great plenty of fish, fruits of marvelous excellency according as the country brought forth. Among other things one of these wild men having been the day before in skirmish, 
The stature of these wild men.  had taken four of his enemies Cannibals, and presented to them two members roasted, the which the Spaniards refused. These wild men as they said, were of high stature, fair bodied and all naked as others are, bearing on their stomachs broad pieces of Gold, the others great pieces shining of fine Gold well poolished in form of round looking Glasses. Ye need not demand, if that the Spaniards change their merchandise for such riches, I believe truly they escaped not so, at the least they did their good will. Now these poor Pilgrims, being thus refreshed and vitteled for that time, reserving somewhat for after claps, before they took their leave, they gave more presents as before, and then for the continuance of their voyage it was needful to set sail and to shorten way. From thence they sailed more than a hundredth leagues, before they took land, beholding about the River side divers kinds and a multitude of wild people, as before, the which I will not stay to describe for to avoid prolixity: but it shall suffice to understand the place, where as at the second time they aboorded.   

How certain spaniards arrived into a country, where they found amazons. Cap. 63.  
THe said spaniards did so much by their journeys, that they arrived in a Country, where as were inhabiting amazons, 
amazons of America.  the which would never have been thought, for that Historiographers have made thereof no mention, because they knew not this country late found out. Some may say, that they are not Amazonists, but as for me I judge them such, seeing that they live even so, as we find the Amazonists of Asia to have lived. And before passing further, ye shall note, that these Amazons of which we speak, are retired, inhabiting in certain islands which are to them as strong holds, having always perpetual war with certain people, without any other exercise, even as those of whom have spoken the Historiographers. Now than these warlike women of our America being fortified in Islands, are most commonly assailed of their enemies that seek them on the water, with barks and other vessels, and there they fight with bows and arrows: contrariwise, the women defend them with the like courageously, with threatenings, noise and countenances, the most fearful that is possible: they make their bulwarks of defence with mighty great shells of Torterels. And because it cometh to our purpose, to speak of the Amazonists, we will write somewhat in this place. The poor people find no great comfort among these rude and savage women. I find by the histories, that there are three sorts of Amazons, 
Three sorts of Amazons.  all a like, differing only in places & dwellings. The most anciest sort were in Africa, among the which were Gorgonists, that had Meduse for their Queen. The other were in Scythia, near to the river of Tanais, which since have reigned in a part of Asia, near to the river of Hermodoon: and the third sort of Amazons, are those which we do treat of. There is divers opinions why they were called amazons. The most common is, for because that these women did burn their breasts in their youth, to be more apt in the war. 
Many opinions on the naming and Etymology of Amazons.  The which I find very strange, and report me to medicines whether they can burn those parts without death, knowing that they are tender, and also near to the heart, nevertheless the most part are of this opinion. If it were so, I would think that for one that escapeth death, there dieth a hundredth. Others take the Etymology of this vowel A. privative, and of Maza, that signifieth bread, for that they live not with bread, but with other things, which is as absurd as the others: for in that time they might call many that lived without bread amazons, as the Troglodytes and many others, in like manner all the Indians. The others of A. privative & Mazos, as those that have been nourished without woman's milk, the which is most likeliest to be true, of which opinion is Philostratus, 
Philostratus.  or else of a nymph named Amazoni, or of an other named Amazon, virgin to Diana, and Queen of Ephesus, which I do better believe, than burning of their paps or breasts, let them that list, dispute of the contrary. 
Amazons are warlike women  Well, how so ever it is, these women are named warlike: and moreover ye shall note that the Scythians which we name Tartarians, being driven out of Egypt, subdued the better part of Asia, and made it all tributary, and under their obedience. In the mean time whilst the Scythians remained in this long conquest, and expedition of Asia, their wives being wearied of their so long absence, (as the good Penelope, of her husband Vlixes,) did admonish them by many gracious letters and messages to return, otherwise, that this long & untolerable absence would constrain them to make new alliances with their next neighbours, considering that the ancient lineage of the Scythians began to decay. Notwithstanding without having regard to the sweet requests of their wives, kept & inhabited Asia with an obstinate courage, 
Asia tributary to Scythia, the term of .500. years.  yea until the time that Ninus did deliver it from this miserable thraldom & bondage. During which time, these women never made alliance of Matrimony with their neighbours, esteeming and thinking that Matrimony was not a mean of liberty but of thraldom. But they with one accord & virtuous enterprise, consented to take their weapons & begin war, thinking that they were descended of that mighty Mars, god of wars, which they executed so virtuously under the government of Lampedo & Marthesia, their queens that governed one after another, 
Lampedo and Marthesia, the first Queens of Amazons.  that they not only defended their country from invasion of their enemies, in maintaining their liberty, but also made many goodly conquests in Europe & in Asia, even unto the river of which we showed before. In which place, specially at Ephesus, they caused to be made many castles and holds. This being done, they sent some of their bands into their country, with the riches, booty, and spoil of their enemies, and the rest remained in Asia. Finally these good women for to keep their stock and posterity, did willingly offer themselves to their neighbours, without any other kind of marriage. And of the fruit that proceeded, they killed the male children, keeping always the female for the wars, the feat whereof they would learn them with all diligence, they exercise the feats of chivalry and hunting above all other things. Their weapons were bows and arrows, with certain bucklers, of which Virgil speaketh of in his Aeneidos, when that during the siege of Troy, 
How the Amazons of America lived.  they went to help the Trojans against the Greeks. Some say also that they were the first that begun to ride a horse, and to fight on horseback. Well, now it is time to return to the Amazons of America, and to the Spaniards. In that part they are separated from men, and frequent them very seldom, but at sometime secret in the night, or at some appointed time. These women inhabit in little lodgings and caves against the rocks, living with fish and wild beasts, with roots & some good fruits that this land bringeth forth. They kill their male children incontinently after they are delivered, or else they deliver him to the man, to whom they think it doth pertain. If it be a female, they retain it to themselves, even so as did the first amazons. They make war ordinarily against some other nation. 
How these Amazons put their enemies to death.  And those whom they take in the war, they use most cruelly and inhumainely for to make them die, they hang them by one leg on a tree, and leaving them after this sort, they go their ways, and if it happen that they be not dead, when they return, they will shoot at them above ten thousand times, but they eat them not as others do, but they burn them until they be consumed to ashes. 
The original of the Amazons of America are uncertain.  Furthermore, these women when that they approach to fight, they make marvelous cries & shoots for to affray their enemies. Of the original of these Amazons in that country, it is uncertain: some think that after the war of Troy, for thither they went (as we have before showed) under the conduct of Pantasilla, they scattered abroad, and wandered here and there. Others think that they are come from certain places of Grecia i● Africa, from whence a cruel king chased them. We have many histories of their acts and feats of war, and of other women, the which I will leave for to continue our purpose: for there are many Histories, Greeks, Latins and others, that show thereof at large. We have begun to show how that the spaniards remained there but a while, for to rest them only, 
How the Spaniards arrived into the country of Amazons, and how they were received.  and to get victuals, for that these women as all amazed to see such an array (which unto them was strange) came together above ten thousand of them, in less space than three hours, maids and women all naked, saving bows and arrows in their fasts, beginning to make a great noise, as though they had seen their enemies, so that they began to lose of their arrows: the which the Spaniards seeing, would make no resistance but retiring, weighed their anchors, and hoist sail: but at their departing saying Adieu, they saluted them with certain gun-shot, among the thickest of them, so that these women escaped not without some loss and detriment.   

How the spaniards continued their voyage to Morpion, and of the river of Plate. Cap. 64.  
FRom thence they continuing their way, well a Cxx. leagues, they knew by their Astrolobia, 
How the spaniards continued their voyage to Morpion.  what height the place was where they were. The which is so necessary for the good Navigation, that those that sail into far Countries, can have no assurance of their voyage, if that this practice fail them: wherefore this Art of the height of the Sun exceedeth all other arts. And this cunning our elders have greatly commended and practised, also Ptolemy and other great authors. These Spaniards leaving their skiffs and carvels they sunk them, than every man jaded themselves with the rest of the victuals, munitions, and other merchandise, chief the slaves that were there for that purpose, they went for the term of ix days, by and over mountains and dales decked with all sorts of green trees, herbs, flowers and fruits. In so much that at the last by their journeys, they came to a great river proceeding from the high Mountains, whereas they found other wild men, among the which some for fear fled their ways, others climbed upon trees, and there remained in their lodgings none but a few old men, to the which in sign of friendship and favour, they made presents with certain knives and glasses, the which to them were agreeable, so that they went and called the others, showing them that these strangers new arrived were some great Lords, that in no wise would hurt them, but make to them presents of their riches. The wild men being moved with this liberality went to fetch them victails, as fish, venison, and fruits according as the country brought forth. The which the spaniards seeing, were minded there to pass away the winter, & in the mean time to discover the commodities of the country, and to see if that there might be found any Mine of gold or silver, or any other thing whereby they might gather any profit. By this means they remained there vij months together, and seeing things fell not out according to their mind, they took their journey forward, having to guide them eight of these wild men, that brought them on their way about lxxx leagues, passing always through the midst of other wild men, more rude & less tractable than they before, for the which their guides were unto them as necessary as profitable. Finally, they knew of a truth, that they were come to the height of a place named Morpion, then inhabited of Portugeses, some of them being weary of so long a voyage, were determined to repair to the place before named: others to the contrary, said it were better to persever & go forward to the river of Plate, distant farther by land .300. leagues. In which, 
Division of their company, for to k●pe on to the river of Plate.  for to make agreement according to thadvise of the captain, the one part kept their way to Plate, and the others drew toward Morpion. Near to which place, these poor pilgrims beheld if they could espy any booty, until that they found a river running at the foot of a hill, in which they that drank, 
A very good Mine of silver.  did perceive certain stones shining like silver, of the which they bore a certain quantity to Morpion, distant from thence .18. leagues, which place after proof was found to bear good & natural silver. And since the king of Portugal hath had from thence an infinite deal of silver after that he had sounded the Mine, and brought it to good perfection. After that these Spaniards had rested themselves at Morpion, with the Portugal their neighbours, they set forward to follow the others, & to keep the way to Plate, being distant from Morpion, by sea .250. leagues, 

Mines of gold and silver.  
Plate a river, and why it is so named.   and by land .300. whereas the Spaniards have found many Mines of gold and silver, and have named it Plate, which signifieth in our language, silver. And for to inhabit there, they have edified certain castles and holds: and since some of them with other Spaniards, newly come to that place, not content with this fortune, have enterprised to sail even to the strait of Magellan, 
The strait of Magellan.  so named by him that first found it out which joineth with America toward the South. And from thence entereth into the peaceable Sea on the other side of America, 
The peaceable sea.  where as they have found many fair islands: and in the end they came to Moluques, 
islands of Moluques inhabited by the spaniards.  which they keep and inhabite●t this day. By the which means there cometh a great tribute of gold and silver unto the King of Spain. This much in effect of this voyage, the which I thought good to note by the way, being showed me in my Navigation, by those that of a truth had been in the voyage.   

How the lands of the king of Spain, and of Portugal are separated. Cap. 65.  
THe kings of Spain and of Portugal, after that they had obtained many happy and fortunate victories, as well in the East, as in the West in places by sea and land, not before known or discovered, deliberated for the greater assurance to divide and limit all the country that they had conquered, 
The cape of three points.  and also to avoid quarrels that here after might rise, as they did of the mine of gold that they had at the Cape of three points which is in Guiney as also the islands of Cape verd, and many other places. Also every one may know, that one kingdom will not have two kings, no more than the world will receive two Suns. 
The lands of the king of Spain in the Indies.  So it is that from the river of Marignan, between America and the islands of Antilles, that join at Perou, unto Terra Florida, near to new found land, belongeth to the King of Spain, the which hath also great Lordship in America, coming from Perou toward the South, on the West side toward Marignan, as is before showed. 
The land that the king of Portugal hath in the Indies.  To the King of Portugal did befall all that is from the said river of Marignan towards the South unto the river of Plate, which is .36. degrees from the Equinoctial. And the first place toward Magellan, is named Morpion, the second Mahanhoc, in the which place hath been found many mines of gold and silver. The third Port Sigoura, near to Caape S. Augustine. Fourthly the point of Cronest Mon●ou, castle Marin, and Fernanbow; bordering the Cannibals of America. To declare particularly the places from one river to an other, as Curtana, Caribes, near to the sweet or fresh river, and royal. Likewise their liings with other things, I will forbear at this time. It shall suffice only to know, that in those places before named, the Portugeses are inhabited, and cantel how to entertain the wild men of the country, so that they live together in peace, & trade many rich merchandise. And there they have bartered and builded houses and castles to resist their enemies. Now to return to the Prince of Spain, he hath done the like for his part, 
Countries not yet discovered.  the which is as we have showed from Marignan towards the West unto Moluques, as well on this side, as beyond in the West, & in the sea peaceable, the islands of these two seas, and Perou in the main land, so that altogether extendeth of a great compass, beside the country adjoining that in time may be found out, as Cartagera, Cata, Palmaria, Parisa, great and little. The which two nations, specially the Portugeses have discovered much land in the East country for their trade, the which notwithstanding they enjoy not, as they do many places of America and Perou: For to bear rule in that Country, they must get the love and favour of the Indians: otherwise if that they revolt, they will destroy all that they find, so that they must frame themselves so to their ways, that they by no wise may be offended. Now ye must note that their attempts and discovering, was not without great bloodshed: specially of poor Christians, that have ieoperded their lives without having respect to the cruel inhumanity of these people. To be short, there is no difficulty be it never so dangerous, that withdraweth a man's manly heart. We see in our Europe, how much the Romans at the beginning, minding to enlarge their Empire but with a little land, to the respect of that which hath been gotten within this sixty years, have shed the blood as well of themselves as of their enemies. What furious and horrible dissipations of laws, disciplines & honest conversation hath reigned throughout the world, beside the civil wars of Sylla and Marius, Cina, and of Pompey, of Brutus, of Anthony & Augustus, more hurtful than the rest: also hath followed the ruin and decay of Italy by the Goths, Hunns, and Wandallians, which also have invaded Asia, and overthrown the kingdom of Grece, to the which purpose, Ovid seemeth to have spoken these words.  
We see how things do change and come to pass,  
And now a people reign that nothing was.  
And he, the which had might and pour,  
Doth them homage, obey, and eke honour.  
To conclude, all humane creatures are subject to change more or less according as they be, rich or poor, high or low, little or great.   

The division of the West Indies in three parts. Cap. 66.  
BEfore that I pass any farther to describe this country by good right (as I think) named France Antarctike, or before America for the reasons that we have alleged, because of his largeness which is without comparison, I am minded (for that I would the reader should the better understand it) to divide it in three parts: for since the time that other Countries have been discovered, all the Country of America, Perou, Florida, and Canada and other places adjacent, to go from the strait of Magellan, have been commonly called the west Indies, and is for because the people live all naked, barbarous and rude, as those that are yet in the East Indies. The which Country meriteth well the name of India, of the flood or river Indus, as we have before showed. This fair river entering into the East sea called Indique by seven mouths or openings, as Nill doth into the sea Meditarium, taketh his original of the Mountains Arbiciennes and Beciennes. Also the river Gangis in like case entereth in by .v. openings into this sea, dividing India into two parts, separating the one from the other. Therefore this region being so far from America, for the one is in the East, and the other comprehendeth from the South unto the west, we cannot say that others than those that have first discovered these lands, have added this name of India, seeing the beastly behaviour and cruelty of this people, so brutish without faith & without law and not unlike to divers people of the Indies of Asia and of Ethiopia, of which Pliny maketh most ample mention in his natural history. By this means hath America obtained the name of India to the likeness of that which is in Asia, for that they agree in manners, beastly brutishness, & other things, as we have before showed of the Occidental people, to those of the East parts. Therefore the first part of this land, containeth toward the South unto the strait of Magellan, which is .52. degrees .30. minutes of the Equinoctial line, I mean of the Austreall line, comprehending no part of the other land that is beyond the strait, the which was never known nor inhabited of us, saving only from that strait coming from the river of Plate. From thence drawing toward the West, far between these two Seas, are the provinces of Patalia, Paranaguacu, Margageas, Patagones' or region of Giants, Morpion, Tabaiares, Toupinambou, amazons, the country of Brasil, unto the Cape of S. Augustin, the which is eight degrees beyond the line, the Country of Cannibals, Anthropophages, the which regions are comprehended in America, compassed with the Ocean sea, and on the other side toward the South of the peaceable sea, which is otherwise the sea of Magellan. We will therefore end this Indian land, at the river of Amazons, the which even as Ganges maketh the separation of one Indies from another towards the East: also this notable flood, the which hath of breadth .50. leagues, may make separation of India, America, and of Perou. The second part shall begin from the said river, containing many kingdoms and Provinces at Perou, the strait of land containing Daryens, Furna, Popaian, Anzerma, Carapa, Quimbaya, Cali, Pasta, Quito, Canares, Cuzco, Chila, Patalia, Parias, Temistitan, Mexica, Cataia, Panuco, the Pygmies even to Florida, which lieth .25. degrees of latitude on this side the line. I leave the islands out, not comprehending them, although that they are of no less compass and greatness, than Sicilia, Corsica, Cypris or Candia, nor yet of less value, therefore shall this part be limited towards the South to Florida. There resteth now only to describe the third part, the which shall begin at Nova Espania, or new Spain, comprehending all the provinces of Anavac, Vcatan, Eulhuacan, Xalixa, Thalco, Mixtecapan, Tezeuco, Guzanes Apalachen, Pancho, Aute, and the kingdom of Micuacan, from Florida unto the land of Bacalles, which is a great Region, under the which also is comprehended the land of Canada, and the province of Chicora, (which is .33. degrees on this side the line) the land of Labrodor, new found land, compassed with the frosty Sea on the north side. This Country of the West Indies being thus divided, not specifying many things from the one end to the other, that is to wit, many things from the one end to the other: that is to wit, from the strait of Magellan, at the which we have begun, unto the end of the farthest land of the Indies, it is more than .4800. leagues of length, and by this ye may discern the breadth, excepting the strait of Parias before named, therefore they are now called the great Indies, being without comparison more greater than the East Indies. As touching the rest, I desire the reader to take in good part this little division, until it please God to give us mean to make one more greater. Likewise to treat more at large of this country, but thus much I thought needful in the mean time to bring to light.   

Of the Island of Rats. Cap. 67.  
Leaving these Cannibals for the small comfort that there was to be had, having the wind at South, we sailed to a very fair Island, distant from the line four degrees, the which is very dangerous in the aboarding of it, for it is no less dangerous to a front than some great Cape or promontory for that it entereth far into the sea, and for rocks that are about it, and ranged on the coast side. This Island was unluckily found out to the mishap of those that first did discover it. Some Portugal ship passing by on that coast, for default of good government, 
The shipwrak of a Portugal.  striking against a rock near to this Island, broke in pieces and drowned, excepting xxiij men that saved themselves in this Island, in which place they remained the term of two years, whereas they died only two excepting, which in the mean time lived with Rats; Birds, and other beasts. And as on a time there passed by a ship of Normandy, that returned from America, they set their skiff out for to rest in that Island, whereas they found these two poor Portingalls, that were only left of this shipwreck, 
The Island of Rats & why it was so named.  the which they brought away with them. And these Portugeses had named it the Island of Rats, because of the multitude of Rats of divers kinds that there are, so that they say, that their companions died only being vexed with these vermin. These beasts live with eggs of Torterels, that they make on the Rivage of the Sea, and with birds eggs, whereof there is great store. Also when we went for to seek fresh water, whereof we had such great need, that some amongst us were constrained to drink their own water or bryn, the which dured the term of three months, and the famine four months, we saw there so many birds, and so privy, that we might have laden therewith our ships, nevertheless we could not recover fresh water, unless we had entered very far into the country. As for the rest it is fair decked with many fair trees, being green the most part of the year, even like a goodly green meadow in the month of May, although it be within four degrees of the line. Though that this Island is not inhabited, 
The commodities of the Island of Rats.  yet it is not unpossible no more than others in the Zone, as the Islands of S. Homer, under the Equinoctial, & others. And if it were inhabited, I am well assured, that it would make one of the fairest places in all the World and rich, there might be made very good Sugar, Spices and other things of great value. 
The Zone between two tropics are inhabited.  I know well that many Cosmographers have had this opinion that the Zone between the two tropics was unhabited for the extreme heat of the Sun, notwithstanding that experience showeth the contrary without any farther contention, even as the Zones to the two Poles, because of the cold. Heroditus and Solon, affirmeth that the hills Hiperbores, are inhabited, and likewise Canada, drawing near to the North: and other count yet more near approaching the cold Sea, 
A boundance of Rats.  of the which we have already spoken. Therefore let us return to our Island of Rats. This place by good right is so named, for because of the abundance of Rats that live there, of the which there are divers kinds, one kind among the rest that the wild men of America eat, named in their language Sohiatan, and they have their hair grey, 

Sohiatan a kind of Rats.  
Hiexousou another kind of Rats.   the flesh good & delicate, like a little leveret. There is another named Hiexousou, greater than the others, but not so good to eat, they are as great as those of Egypt, called Pharaos' Rats. Others there are as great as Wezels, that the wild men eat not, for because that when they are dead, they stink like carrion, the which I have seen: also there are found diversity of Serpents named Gerara, 
Gerara a kind of Serpent. Theirab.  the which are not good to eat, but there are others named Theirab, that are good, for of these Serpents there are divers kinds, that are nothing venomous, nor like to those of our Europe, so that their biting is neither mortal, nor any thing dangerous: there are to be seen red ones scaled of divers colours: likewise I have seen green ones, as green as the bay leaf, they are not so great of body as the others, notwithstanding they, are very long. Therefore it is not to be marveled at, how these wild men there abouts eat these Rats without danger, and Serpents even as they do Lezardes, as before we have showed. Likewise near to this Island is found a kind of fish, and also upon the coast of America very dangerous, also much feared and redoubted of the wild men, for that she is a ravening fish, and as dangerous as a Lion or a Wolf famished: this fish is named Houperou, in their language, and eateth other fish in the water, excepting one that is as great as a little carp, the which followeth him always, as if there were so●●● Sympathia or secret love between them, or else he followeth him for to be preserved and kept sure from other fishes. So that the wild men fishing all naked, as they do always fear him, & not without a cause, for if he catch them, he will either drown them, or strangle them, or look where he toucheth, he carrieth away a piece with his teeth. Also they will take heed how to eat of this fish: but if that they can take him alive, as they do many times, for to be revenged of him, they kill him with arrows. Being therefore there a certain space of time, turning here and there, I beheld many straungs fishes that are not in Europe: among the which, I saw two very monstruous, 
A kind of strange fish.  having under the throat like two goats dugger, a thing on the chin; that for to see too, was like a goats beard. Behold how nature the great workemistresse, taketh pleasure to varifie her works, as well by water as by land, as the cunning workman beutifleth his work, exceeding the common trade of his Art and science.   

How we continued our course, with a declaration of the Astrolabia of the sea. Cap. 68  
FOr because that we found no great consolation, nor comfort of our travails in this Island. It behoved us without any tarrying, to hoist sail with an indifferent wind, 
The evil disposition of the air by the Equinoctial.  until we came under the Equinoctial, whereas the sea and the winds are also unconstant. Also the air is always seen there troubled: if one side be fair, the other is troubled, and threateneth fowl weather, so that for the most part there is rain and thunder, which can not be without danger to the Navigants. Now before they come near to this line, the good Navigantes, Pilots, and Mariners, being expert, take counsel or behold always their Astrolabia, for to knew the distance and lying of places from thence where they are. And because this so necessary an Instrument for Navigation cometh now in talk, I will speak there of lightly by the way, for the instruction of those that will follow the sea, being so great that the understanding of man cannot well comprehend it. And that which I speak of the Astrolabia, as much may I say of the Rule or needle of the sea, by the which they may also conduct right the ship. This Instrument is so politic, that with a little paper or parchment, as broad as the palm of my hand, and certain lines marked which signifieth the winds, and a little Iron with the which this Instrument is made, by his only natural virtue that a story giveth him, and bloweth in his proper moving, and without any touching, showeth where is the east, the west, the North and the South, and also all the thirty two winds belonging to Navigation, & it showeth them not only in one place, but in all places of the world beside other secrets, that I omit for this present, whereby it plainly appeareth that the Astrolabia, the needle or compass, with the Card Marin, are well made, and that there showing and perfection as is a wonderful thing, for that a thing so great as the Sea, is pictured in so little a space, and so agreeable that by the same men undertake to sail round about the world. 
The signification of the Astrolabia.  Then the good and perfect Astrolabia, is no other thing than the Sphere pressed and represented in a plain, accomplished in his compass with .360. Degrees, that answer to the circute of the World, divided in like number of degrees, the which again must be divided into four equal parts in our Instrument, that is .90. in every part, the which afterward ye must part by five and five, then holding your Instrument by the ring, raise it or hold it toward the Sun, so that the Sun beams may enter in at the hole, then looking to your declination in what year● month and day ye are in when ye take the height of the Sun. And if the Sun be towards the South which is on the coast of America, and ye be towards the North, ye must take from your height as many degrees as the Sun hath declined, from the line of the which we speak toward the South. And if that in taking of the height of the Sun, ye be towards the South beyond the Equinoctial, and the Sun be in the North, ye must in like manner take away so many degrees, as the Sun hath declined from the line toward our Pole, as for example: if ye take your height the Sun being between the Equinoctial and you, when ye have taken the said height, ye must for to know the place where ye are, be it in sea or land, add your degrees which the Sun is declined from, far from the line with your height, and ye shall find that which ye demand, the which is to be understanded as much of the Pole Arctic, as Antarctic. Thus much by the way Gentle Reader of our Astrolabia, leaving the rest of the knowledge and usage of this Instrument to Astronomers and Astrologians, that make daily profession thereof. It shall suffice that which I have spoken, the which I know to be necessary and needful to Navigation, chief for those that are ignorant and not yet exercised therein.   

Of the departing of our Equator or Equinoctial. Cap. 69.  
I Think there is no man of Spirit, but that knoweth that the Equinoctial is a trace or circle, imagined by the midst of the World, from the East to the West, in equal distance of two, so that from the said Equinoctial to each one of the Poles, it is .90. Degrees, as we have at large treated before, and of the temperateness of the air, that is there about, of the Sea and of the fishes. There resteth now somewhat to speak in our return, of that which before we left out, passing therefore about the first day of April with a favourable wind keeping our right course with sail spread right to the North, 
How the Author departed from Thequinoctiall.  nevertheless we were molested with one ill commodity, the which was, that day and night it ceased not to rain, the which notwithstanding came well to pass for us to drink, considering our necessity, for the space of two months and a half, enduring thirst for that we cold get no fresh water.  
And God knoweth whether we drank not our fill even with open throat, considering the extreme heat that burned us: it is true that the rain water in those parres are corrupted for the infection of the air, from whence it cometh: for that whereof the rain engendereth, is depraved in such sort, that if a body wash their hands therewith, there will rise bushes & bladders. 
Certain rain water corrupted.  I know well that many Philosophers hold opinion, that some rain water is unwholesome, & they set difference between these waters, with the reasons which at this time I will not allege avoiding prolixity: well what corruption so ever came of it, yet nevertheless it behoved us to drink thereof though it had cost us our lives. Furthermore this water falling on a cloth would stain it and leave a spot that scant would be gotten out. Now therefore after we had passed the line, it was needful for our conduct, to begin to count our degrees, from thence unto our Europe: as much must be done of them that go thither, after that they are come under the sayde-line. The Ancient Cosmographers, measured the earth the which we may also do, by stades, paces, and feet, and not by degrees as we do, as affirmeth Pliny, Strabo and others, but Ptolemy did since invent degrees, for to measure both the Sea and the land, which before was not a like measured, and this is much more easy. It is then Ptolemy that hath compassed the whole world by Degrees, as well in length as in breadth, finding 360. Leagues, and in every degree .17. Leagues & a half, as I understand of our Pilots, that are expert in Navigation. So that the whole world having the Firmament and the Elements in his conference, containeth .360. degrees equally by twelve signs, whereof every one hath 30. 
The division of a degree.  degrees, for .12. times .30. make just .360. A degree containeth .60. minutes, a minute .60. thirds, a third .60. fourthes, a fourth .60. fifthes, unto .60. tenths. For the proportions of the firmament, may be parted in so many parts, as we have said. Then by the degrees we find the longitude, latitude and distance of places, the latitude from the line to our Pole, whereas there is .90. degrees, and so much beyond, 
How ye may know the latitude longitude and distance of places.  the longitude is taken from the fortunate islands to the east. Wherefore I say to conclude, that the Pilot that would sail, aught to consider three things, the first in what hight of degrees, he findeth himself, and in what hight the place is that he will go to, secondly the place where he findeth himself, and the place whether he hopeth to go, that is to know, what distance and length there is from one coast to another. Thirdly to know what wind or winds will serve for Navigation, all the which he may know and see by his compass and other Instruments of the Sea. Following always our course six degrees at this side our line, keeping the Caape on the North of us until the .15. day of April, at which time we knew the Sun to be directly under our Zenith, the which was not without enduring great heat as ye may well think, if ye consider the heat that is hetherwarde the Sun, being in Cancer, which is far from our Zenith to us that inhabit in Europe. Now afore going any farther, I will speak of certain flying fishes, that I left out when I spoke of fishes under the line. It is therefore to be noted, that under the line ten degrees on this side, and beyond there is found abundance of flying fish, that flieth high in the air, being followed of another fish that would devour him. So that by the quantity of him that flieth, ye may easily conjecture the quantity of the other living by pray. Among the which the Dorade (of whom we have before showed) doth follow him above all others, for that his flesh is very delicate and tender: of the which also there are two kinds, the one is like a herring, the which is, that which is so chased of others, this fish hath four wings, two great ones, like unto the wings of a bat, and two other little ones near to the tail: the other is made like a Lampron, of the which kinds there are few found, but only .15. degrees on this side, and beyond the line, the which to my judgement is the cause that those that have set out books of fishes, 
Piravena.  have left them out beside many others. The Americans name this fish Piravena he flieth like a Partridge, and the little one flieth much better and higher than the other, and sometimes they are so near chased and followed, specially by night, that many times they strike against the ship sails by heaps, and there remain. There is another fish, which is called by them Albacore, 
Albacore a fish  much more greater than the Porpas, the which is also a devourer of the flying fish as well as the Dorade, and he is very good and excellent to eat above all other fishes in the sea, as well of the West as of the east. He is uneasy to be gotten, and therefore they make a counterfeit fish of white linen, the which they make to spring above water, as doth the flying fish, and by this means he is most commonly taken.   

Of Perou, and of the principal places contained in the same. Cap. 70.  
NOw keeping our course, having the wind very fair we coasted the land of Perou, and the Islands being on the coast of the West Sea, called the Islands of Perou, 
Perou a third part of the Spanish Indies.  even to the height of the Spanish Island, of the which we will speak hereafter particularly. This country as we have divided it, is one of the three parts of the west Indies, having in length .700. Leagues, taking from the North to the South, and in breadth .100. Leagues, from the east to the west, being a firm land, from Themestitan passing the strait of Daryen, between the West and the sea, 
Of whence Perou took his name.  which they name pacifik, and it was so named of a River called Perou, which is in breadth about a little league, as many other provinces in Africa, Asia and Europe, have taken their names of their most famous Rivers, as also we have showed of Senega. This Region is then enclosed, with the West and the South Sea, garnished with thick forests and mountains, the which make the country in many places unaccessible, so that we cannot there drive our Cartes, 
The most renowned provinces of Perou. Quito a Region.  and Horses laden there as we do here. In this country of Perou, there is many fair provinces among the which the most chiefest towards the North is Quito, the which extendeth in length from the east to the West about 60. Leagues, and in breadth .30. Next to Quito is the province of the Canaries, 
The province of the Canaries  having towards the east the River of Amazons, with many mountains and hills, and inhabited with a Barbarous and wild people not yet converted: besides this there is the province that the Spaniards have named S. james of old port, 
S. james of old port. Taxamilca.  beginning within a degree beyond▪ the line Equinoctial. The fourth which they call in their language Taxamilca, extendeth to the great City of Tongilla, the which after that their King Atabalyba was poisoned, Pizare seeing the fruitful commodities of the country, caused there to be edified a Town and a castle There is yet another named Cuzco, 
One Cuzco. The kingdom of the jugies.  in the which the jugies have long time reigned, being a people so named, which have been in times past mighty Lords. And this word jugies is as much to say as Kings. And in their time their Kingdom & limits was so great and large, that it contained above a .1000. Leagues from one end to another. Also this country beareth the name of the chiefest City, as doth Rhodes, Metelin, Candia & other countries taking their names of the most renowned Towns and Cities, as I have showed. Furthermore being on a time at Caape Finistra in Spain, a spaniard showed me, that in this country of Cuzco, there is found a people that have their ears hanging down to their shoulders, having hanging on their ears, great pieces of fine and pure shining Gold, well polished and better than any other Gold in Perou, to whose words I will sooner give credit, than to many Historiographers in these days, that writ by hear say, reporting to us things that they never saw. To this purpose I remember that they would persuade us, that in high Africa, there was people that had ears hanging down to there hales, the which is nothing so but a manifest fable and lie. 
Canar a very cold country.  The fifth province is Canar, having on the west side the South Sea, the which is a marvelous cold country, for the Frost and snow lieth there all the year long. And although that in others Regions of Perou, the cold be not so violent, and that there cometh and proceedeth great plenty of good fruits, yet there is not such temperatnesse in Summer, for in Summer in other places the air is extreme hot & untemperate, the which causeth a corruption chief in the fruits. Also that venomous beasts are not found in cold countries as they are in hot regions. Therefore all being considered, it is hard to judge which of these countries ought to be preferred before the other: to this we may reply that there is no commodity, but that hath his incommodity. Moreover there is yet another named Calao, 
The province of Calao.  wherein is more trading and occupying than in any other country in Perou, the which also is the cause, that it is better peopled. It extendeth from the east coast, to the mountains of Andes, and from the west to the mountains of Nanades: the people in this country is named Xuli, Chilan, Acos, Pomata, Cepita and Trianguavaco. Although it be wild and Barbarous, yet it is nevertheless very tractable, because of the merchandise and trade that there is used, otherwise, it would not be less confirmable than the rest of America. In this country there is a great laake named in their language Titicata, 
Titicata a Lake  which is to say, Island of Feathers, for that that in this Lake there are certain little islands, 
Laake. Carcase a country of Perou, Platte a large and rich City. The land of Perou, is like the figure of a triangle.  in the which are found a great number of birds great and small, and of such divers kinds as is almost uncredible. Now the last country that is in Perou, named Carcase, next adjacent to Chila, in the which standeth the famous and rich City of plat, the country being very rich, because of the fair Rivers and mines of Gold and Silver. Therefore this great country containeth, & is called all that is comprehended from the River of plat unto Quitto as we have already showed, and of which we have declared the eight principal countries and provinces. This main land being so long and broad is like to the figure of a triangle, although that many call it an Island, the which cannot, or else will not make a difference between an Island & that which we call almost an Island. By this means ye need not to doubt that from the strait of Magellan .50. degrees of latitude, and .30. minutes, and .303. degrees of longitude beyond the line, being more than .68. degrees, on this side is the main land. In deed if that this little land between new Spain & Perou, having in breadth but .17. leagues from the Ocean to the South, were cut from the one Sea to the other, than Perou might be called an Island, but Daryens, a strait of land, 
Daryen a strait of land.  so named of the River of Daryen, doth let it, yet it behoveth somewhat to speak of Perou. As touching the Religion of these wild men of that country, 

A great superstition of certain people of Perou.  
Bohitis certain Priests.   which are not yet reform to our Faith, they hold a very strange opinion of a great ●●ttell that they keep secretly, saying that the Sea in times past passed out thereof with all his Fishes, and that out of another thing proceeded the Sun & the Moon, the first Man, and the first Woman, the which their false and deceitful priests have persuaded and showed them, named Bohitis, and they have believed and given credit thereto a long time, until that the Spaniards have dissuaded the most part of these dreams and delusions. Besides this these people are very idolatrous above others. 
The Idolatry of these people  One worshippeth according to his mind what pleaseth him. The fisher's worship a fish named Lyburon, and the rest worship certain beasts and birds: Those that labour the ground & make gardens, worship the Earth, but they all in general take the Sun to be a great God, likewise the Moon & the earth, thinking that by the Sun & the Moon, all things are ruled and governed. In swearing or taking an oath, they will lay their hand on the Earthz & behold the Sun, they also hold opinion that there hath been a Deluge as those of America, saying that there came a Prophet from the North parts, that did marvels, the which after he was put to death, had nevertheless power to live. 
The Spaniards are lords of all Perou.  The Spaniards occupy all this main land from the River of Marignan, unto Furna and Daryen, and yet more further on the west coast, which is the straightest or narrowest place of the main land, by the which the way lieth to Moluques. Furthermore it extendeth to the river of Palm, 
The riches of the Islands of Perou.  whereas they have so well edified and peopled all the country, that it is a marvelous thing to see the riches that at this day, that country bringeth forth, like unto a great kingdom. First to begin almost throughout all the islands of Perou, there are mines of Gold or silver, with certain emeralds and Turkesses, nevertheless e having not so lively a colour as those that come from Malaca and Calicut. The most wealthiest people of all the country of Perou, 
jugas a valiant and rich people.  are those that they name jugas, valiant above other nations, they worship cattle and all other kind of domestical beasts, in greater number than we do here, for the country thereto is given in such sort, that beasts hides and skins of all sorts, is their chief merchandise, and they kill the beasts only for their skins. The greatest number of these domestical beasts are become wild, because that there are so great multitude, so that they let them stray in the woods day & night, for that they have no place to harbour them in their houses. And for to take: them, they set snares and chase them as we do Venison. 

Corn will not prosper nor grow in America.  
Cassade a kind of sustenance.   As for Corn as I understand, it cannot profit there nor grow in no part of Perou, no more than in America. Therefore aswell gentlemen as others, live with a kind of sustenance that they name Cassade, which is a kind of cakes made of a root named Manihot. Furthermore they have great plenty of Mill & fish. As touching wine there groweth none, in stead whereof they make other kinds of beverege. This much as touching the circuit of Perou, the which with his islands of the which I will treat hereafter, is brought to such a form, that at this present ye shall find towns, castles, cities, b●●oughes, houses, bishoprics, common weals, & all kende of livings, so that ye will judge it to be another Europe. By this we know how great the power & goodness of our God is, 
Perou may be thought to be a new Europe.  & his providence to all people, for even as the Turks, moor & heathen people seek to destroy Christ's religion, so contrarily, in other places it doth more increase. Thus far touching Perou, which in our return we coasted on the left hand, as in sailing thither we costed Africa.   

Of the islands of Perou, and chief of the Spanish Island. Cap. 71.  
NOw that I have showed of the land of Perou, seeing that in the course we have in our return costed certain islands on the West Sea, 
The Island of Spain before named Haiti & Quisquia.  called the islands of Perou, for that they border the land, I think it good in like case somewhat to write thereof, for because we were some to the height of one of these Islands named the Spanish Island by those that first did discover it, being before named Haiti, which is as much to say, as sharp or sour land. 

The Promentaries of the Spanish Island, Tiburou, Higney, Lobos, Orane a River, Saint Dominic the chiefest city in that Island.  
The most renowned rivers in Nova Espania.  
The ancient Religion of the inhabitans of this Island.   Also it was named Quisqueia the great, and of a truth it is so fair and great, that from the east to the west, it is .50. leagues long, and of breadth from the North to the South .40. and in compass or circuit more than .400. and is beyond the Equinoctial line .18. degrees, having toward the East the Island of Saint john with many other small islands, much to be feared and dangerous for Sailors, and toward the West, it hath the islands of Cuba and jamaica, on the North side the islands of the Cannibals, and toward the South the Cape of Vela, planted on the main land. This Island showeth like to Sycilly, in times past that first was named Trinacria, for that it had .3. promentaries very eminent, like unto that of which we speak, the which hath three standing very far into the Sea, of the which the first is named Tyburon, the second Higney, the third Labos, which is a side of the Island, which they have named Beata, almost full of the wood Gaiac. In this Spanish Island, are found many fair Rivers, among the which that chiefest named Orane, passeth round about the chiefest City named by the Spaniards Sainst Dominick, the others are Nequa Hatibonice & Haqua, full of very good fish and pleasant to eat, the which is because of the temperateness of the Air and goodness of the ground and of the water: these Rivers run about into the Sea almost all on the East side, the which meeting together, make a very large River bancked on both sides, before that this Island was discovered of that Christians, it was inhabited with wild men that were Idolaters, worshipping the devil, who showed himself to them in divers similitudes & likeness. Also they made many & sundry Idols, according to the visions & sights that they had, as they do at this present in many islands & main land of that country: the others worship many gods, chief one above the rest, the which they esteem to be a maker of all things: and they represent his figure in an Idol of wood, being set in some tree garnished with leaves and feathers. Likewise they worship the Sun & the Moon, & other celestial creatures, the which now the inhabitants that are there do not use, for that they are reform to that Christian faith and to all kind of civility: I know well that in times passed there have been some that have not regarded it.  
We read of Caius Caligula, an Emperor of Rome, 
C. Caligula Emperor of Rome.  though he dispraised & hated that divine power, yet nevertheless he quaked & trembled for fear, when that there appeared any show or token of god's wrath. But before that this Island of which we speak, was brought to subjection under the Spaniards, (as I have been informed of those that were at the conquest) the wild men killed above ten thousand Christians, until that the Spaniards had fortified themselves in certain places: after which time they killed a great multitude of the inhabitants, the rest that were left they led captive into divers countries, and made them slaves. And after this sort they have used them of the islands of Cuba, of S. john jamaique, the holy cross, & the Cannibals, with many other islands & main countries. For at the first the Spaniards & Portugeses, for that they would have the better dominion & rule, learned to live after their manner, alluring them by gifts and fair words, always keeping them in their favour, until that in process of time they saw how that they were able to mate and overcome them, than they began to revolt from their former use, taking this rude people and using them like slaves, they provoked them to labour the earth, otherwise they had never come to the perfection of their enterprise. The mightiest kings of this country, are in Casco, 
Casco, & Apina rich & plentiful islands.  and Apina, rich and famous islands, aswell for the Gold and Silver that there is found, as for the fruitfulness of the land. The inhabitants wear nothing but Gold about them, as large bouckles of two or three pound weight the piece, hanging at their ears, the weight whereof maketh their ears to hang half a foot long, the which causeth the Spaniards, to call them great ears. This Island is very rich in mines of Gold, 
The fruitfulness of this Island named Nova Espania.  as are many others of that country, for there are found few or none but either hath Mynes of Gold or Silver. Furthermore, it doth abound with horned beasts, as Oxen, Cows, Sheep, Goats and an infinite number of Hogs, also very fair Horses, the which beasts for the most part are become wild as we have showed of the main land. As touching Corn and wine they have none but that which is brought from other places, and therefore in stead of bread, they eat much Cassade, made of the meal of Roots, and in stead of wine, they have very good and sweet drynks made of diverse fruits, as the Cider of Normandy. They have an infinite number of good fish, of the which some are very strange, among the which there is one named Manaty, the which is taken in the rivers, and also in the Sea, but the greatest store are in Rivers. This fish is like to a Buck or Goat's skin, being filled with oil or wine, having two feet on both sides of the shoulders, with the which he swimmeth, and from the breast to the tail deminisheth of greatness, 
Description of Manati a strange fish.  his head is like to the head of an Ox, having a slender face, the chin full & great, and very little eyes: this fish is ten foot broad & twenty foot long, having a grey skin, hairy like to an Ox hide, so that with his skin the people of the country make shows according to their manner: his feet are all round, garnished each one with four long claws like to the feet of an Oliphant. This fish is more disformed and misshapen, than any kind of fish in that country. Notwithstanding very good to eat, having a taste more like to vele, than fish. The inhabitans of that country do gather the grease of the said fish, for that it is very good for their Goat skins of the which they make very good marokyns: the black slaves or Neigers, do anoint their bodies there with to make them better disposed & their joints to be playable, as the Africans do with oil of olive. Within the head of this fish are found certain stones, of the which they make great store, 
Stones good for the colic.  for that they have proved them to be good against the colic, be it in the reins or in the bladder. The females of this fish bring forth their young ones quick, with out egg, as doth the Whale & the Grampyn, also she hath two rothers like beasts on the earth, with the which they give suck to their young ones. A Spaniard that had dwelled long time in this Island showed to me, that a governor of the country did nourish one in a cistern, the term of .30. years, the which in process of time became so privy, that she would almost suffer one to lay his hand upon her. 
divers fair works made by the wild men with feathers.  The wild men will take this fish hard by the shore as she feedeth upon the grass. I leave to speak of many birds clad with divers rich coloured feathers, with which they make tapissary, & figures of men, & women, beasts, birds & other things, they trim them upon some linen cloth, & therewith they garnish hats, caps and gounes, the which is very fair & pleasant to behold. Of strange four footed beasts there are none found, but only those of which we have spoken. Nevertheless there is found two kind of little beasts, 
Hulias and Caris a kind of strange beasts.  as little as Coneys, the which they name Hulias, and Caris, good to eat. That which I have said of this Island, I may in like manner speak of the Island of S. james before named jamaica, on the east side it hath the Island of S. Dominike. There is another fair Island named Bouriquan, 
S. james Island. S. john's Island.  in their country speech, but in the card Marius, it is named S. john's Island, the which on the East side hath lying the Island of the holy cross, and other little islands of the which some are inhabited, the others are desert. This Island from the East to the west containeth about .52. leagues, of length .300. degrees no minutes, and of latitude .18. degrees no minutes. To be short, there are many other Islands in those parts, the which because of the multitude I omit. Also for that I could have no particular knowledge of them, I will not here forget, that in all these Islands there are found no ravening beasts no more than in England, and in the isle of Creta.   

Of the Island of Cuba, and of Lucaiae, Cap. 72.  
NOw there resteth of all the islands of Perou, to rehearse some secrets of the Island of Cuba, 
The description of the isle of Cuba.  & of certain others adjacent, & yet to say the truth there can be little more spoken than that which hath been already said of the Spanish Island. This Island is more greater & larger than the others, for it is reckoned from the promontory that is on the East side, to the other that is on the west side three hundredth leagues. And from the North to the South seventy leagues. As touching the disposition of the air, there it is temperate, so that there is no excess of heat, nor yet of cold. There are found rich mines of Gold & silver, likewise other metals. On the sea side are found fair rivers that proceed from the high hills, the waters whereof are excellent, with great quantity of good fish. Moreover before it was discovered, it was better peopled with wild men than any others, but at this day the Spaniards are lords and masters. The midst of this Island hath two hundredth ninety degrees of longitude, no minutes, and of latitude twenty degrees no minutes. There is a hill hard by the Sea side that is all salt, 
A salt hill. Salt of the Earth.  more higher than that of Cyprus, great number of trees of cotton, brasil, hornebeame, also salt of the earth proceeding out of another mountain very high and brackish. And of this kind there is found in like manner in the Island of Cyprus, named of the Greeks, Oryctos, the which also is gotten in a mountain hard by the Sea. Furthermore, there is found in this Island great store of Azer, Vermilion, Alum and other things that are taken out of the bowels of the Earth. 
A kind of Partridges.  As touching birds and fowls of the Air, there is a kind of Partridge very little, being of a red colour, and also of divers other colours, their flesh is very delicate. The rustical people of the mountains do nourish a number of them in their houses, as we do here pullein, and many other things worthy to be noted and written. First there is a valley that is in length three leagues between two mountains, where as are found an infinite number of bowls of stone, great and little, being naturally engendered in that place, although some would judge them to be made artificially. Sometimes there is found some so great, that four men would be cumbered to carry away one, the others are less, and some so little that they exceed not the quantity of a little egg. 

A wonderful lykor proceeding from a hill.  
Bre a kind of lykor.   The second thing worthy to be noted is, that in the same Island there is a mountain near to the rivage of the Sea, out of the which runneth a liquor like to that which is made in the fortunate Islands named Bre as we have before showed, the which runneth down into the Sea. Quintus Curtius in his books which he hath made of the jests of Alexander the great, showeth that he being come to a city named Memi, was desirous to see a great pit or cave, in the which there was a fountain that rendered great quantity of gum very strong, being used with other things, so that the author thinketh for this only reason the walls of Babylon to have been so strong, 
Why in times past the wales of Babylon were so strong The islands of Lucaia.  for that they have been made of such things, the which is not only found in the Island of Cuba, but also in the country of Themistitan, and on the coast of Florida. As touching the islands of Lucaia, (being so named for that they are many in number) they are northward of the Island of Cuba, and of S. Dominike, they are more than four hundredth in number, all little ones and not inhabited, unless it be the greatest that beareth the name of all the others named Lucaia. The inhabitants of this Island commonly go to traffic on the main land, and to other, islands. They that inhabit there, as well men as women, are whiter and more fairer than in any of those parties or countries. Seeing that I am in talk with these islands & of their riches, I will not forget somewhat to speak of the riches of Potossi, the which taketh his name of a high mountain that hath in height a great league, & half a league compass. 
The mountain of Potossy, very rich in Mynes.  This mountain is marvelous riché, because of the great mines of silver, tin, and brass which hath been found almost at the top of the mountain, and this Mine of Silver hath been found so good that in one quintal of the Mine is found half a quintal of pure Silver. The slaves do no other thing but work & fetch Silver from the Mine, & they carry it to the principal and chief town of that country, the which was edified at the bottom of the hill by the Spaniards. Since this Mine was found out, all the countries, islands & main lands be Inhabited with certain wild men all naked as in other places of America. Thus much as touching Perou, and of his islands.   

A description of Nova Espania, and of the great city of Themistitan edified in the west Indies. Cap. 73.  
FOr because that it is not possible for all men to see sensibly all things during his age, be it either because of the continual alteration and changing of things that are here in this world, or because of the long distance of places & countries, God hath given the mean to represent them not only by writing, but also by picture by the industry & labour of those that have seen them. I have seen set out by figure, many ancient, as those of jason, of Actaeon, Aeneas, Hercules, & many other things the which we may daily see in their proper form, without figure, as are many kinds of wild beasts. For this cause I mind to set forth & rehearse unto you, the great & large city of Thimistitan, as near as is possible, 
Themistitan.  being sure & certain that few among you have seen it, neither can ye well go & see it because of the long & dangerous navigation that it behoveth ye to make. Themistitan is a city edified in new Spain, the which taketh his beginning at the strait of Ariana, and endeth on the north side at the river of Canuca. In times past it was named Anavak, and since because it was discovered and inhabited of Spaniards, it hath received the name of new Spain. Among the which lands, the first inhabited was jucathan, the which hath a point of land lying out into the sea like unto the land of Florida, notwithstanding that those which make the Cards Marius, have forgotten to make the best, the which setteth out their show or description. Now this Nova Espania, on the East, West, and South side, is compassed with the west sea, and on the North side to the new world, the which being inhabited, is seen beyond in the same North, an other land not known of the Moderns, for the which I will not stand therein. Themistitan, which is a strong City, great and very rich in the country before named, is founded on a great Lake, the way that goeth to this City is not broader than the length of two spears, being so named of him that laid the foundation, named Tenuth, son to the King Iztacmixcoatz. This city hath only two gates, the one to enter in, the other for to come out at. And not far from the City is a bridge of wood, a ten foot broad, the which was made for the increasing & diminishing of the waters: for that Lake riseth and falleth like unto the Sea. And for the defence of the city there is yet many others like in manner to Venice, edified in the sea. That country is compassed with very high mountains, & the plain country hath in circuit .150. leagues, in the which is found two lakes that occupy a great part thereof, for because that these two lakes have of circuit .50. leagues, of the which th'one is fresh water, 
The opinion of two Laake.  in the which is many good small fish, and the other is salt water, the which beside his bitterness is venomous, and therefore it can nourish no fish, the which is against the opinion of those that think it to be but one Laake. The plain is separated from the said Laakes by certain mountains, and at their farthest part they are joined with a strait or narrow land, by the which men are conducted with barks and boats even into the City, the which is standing on the salt water, & from thence to the main land on the causy side, it is four leagues. And I cannot compare the greatness thereof better than to Venise. 
A comparison of Themistitan.  For to enter into the said City there is four ways made of stones artificially, whereas there are two conduits or fountains of the greatness of two paces, and of a man's height, from one of the which is conducted fresh water into the City, the which is of the height of five foot, and the water runneth a long even to the midst of the City, of the which they drink, and use it in their needful business. The other Channel they keep empty for this reason: when that they will flense that same wherein the fresh water is, they bring all the filth of the City with the other to the land, and because that the channels pass by the bridges, & by the places whereas the salt water entereth & goeth out, they conduct the said water by sweet and clean channels the height of a pace. Upon this Laake that compasseth the City, the Spaniards have made many fair houses & places of pleasure, some upon little Rocks & others upon piles of wood. Moreover Themistitan, standeth a twenty degrees of elevation above the line Equinoctial, and hath .272. degrees of longitude. 
Ferdinand of Cortes.  It was taken by strength, by Ferdinand of Cortes, being captain general for the Emperor in those parts of the year of grace .1521. containing then .70000. houses little and great. 
Mutuezuma.  The king's palace which was named Mutuezuma, with those of the lords of the town, was fair, great and large. The Indians that then did inhabit this City, had a custom to keep every five days the market in places thereto appointed, their trade was feathers of birds, 
How they use to trade.  with the which they made divers and sundry things, as gounes fashioned after their manner, Tapestry work, and other things. And to these sciences were the oldest sort occupied. When they would go worship their great Idol, the which was erected in the midst of the City, like unto a theatre, who when they had taken any of their enemies in the war, did sacrifice them to their Idols, and then eat them, holding this for a kind of religion. Furthermore, their trade was beasts skins, of the which they made gounes, hose, and a kind of hoods for to keep them as well from the cold, as from stinging flies. The inhabitans at this day, which before were cruel and unhumaine, by succession of time have so well changed their manners and conditions, that in stead of barbarous and cruel, they are civil and gracious, in such sort that they have left all their former naughty and wicked doings, the which they were wont to use: as in killing one another, eating human flesh, to have company with the first woman that they met, without having regard either to kindred or degree, with other like vices and imperfections. Their houses are sumptuously builded. Among other things there is a fair palace where as the Armour of the City is kept: the streets and places of this City are so strait, that from one gate one may see to the other without any let. To be short, this city at this present is so fortified and compassed with strong walls and rampers, like in form and fashion to ours in Europe, and it is one of the greatest, fairest and richest that is in all the provinces of the west Indies, taking from the strait of Magellan, which is beyond the line .52. degrees, unto the last & furthest land of Abrador, the which holdeth .51. degrees of latitude on this side the line on the North side.   

Of Florida. Cap. 74.  
seeing that in writing this discourse we have made mention of this land called Florida, although that in our return we approached not so near, considering that our course lay not altogether so low, nevertheless, we sailed close by to take an easterly wind. It seemeth to me not out of the way, to write thereof some thing. Likewise of the land of Canada that is next to it toward the North, being only certain mountains between both. Therefore keeping our course of the height of new Spain, on the right hand to attain to Europe, not so soon nor so right a course as we wished to have gone, we found the sea favourable enough. But as by chance I put out my head for to behold it, I saw it as far as I could extend my sight, all covered with herbs and flowers, the which gave me occasion to think that we were near to the land, considering also that in other places of the sea I had not so much seen, notwithstanding I found myself incontinently frustrate of my opinion, 
The Sea like a marsh.  knowing that they proceeded of the sea, so the we saw the sea strawed with those herbs for the space of .20. days. The sea in the part hath small store of fish, for th●se places seem rather to be marshes, than otherwise. 
A star with a tail.  Shortly after appeared another sign, and forshewing of a star, with a long tail from the East, into the North, the which forshewing, I leave to the judgement of Astronomers and to the experience of those that have knowledge therein. After this which was worse, we were troubled with a contrary wind, the term of nine days, even to the height of our Florida. 
The lying of Florida.  That place is a point of land entering into the full Sea, a hundredth leagues, being .25. leagues a shelf or shallow .25. degrees and a half on this side the line, & a hundredth leagues from Caape de Baxa. Therefore this great land of Florida is very dangerous for those that sail of the coast of Cataia, Canibalu, Panuca, and Themistitan: for to sight a far of, it would be judged an Island lying out in the main Sea. Furthermore this place is dangerous because of the running waters, winds and tempests that are in that coast commonly. As touching the main land of Florida, it hath on the east side the province of Chicoma, and the islands named Bahana and Lucaia. On the west side lieth nova Espania, the which divideth in the land that is named Anavae, of the which we have before showed. The best and most fruitfullest countries that are in Florida, is Panuae, that which bordereth Nova Espania. The people of the country are naturally cruel and mighty men, being all Idolaters, who when that they have need either of water or sun, for their gardens and roots, with the which they daily live, than they will fall down before their Idols, that are ma●● to the similitude of men or of beasts. Besides this these people are more and better practised in the feats of war than the people of Perou. When they go to the wars, they bear their king on four men's shoulders in a beasts skin, and they that bear him, are clad and garnished with rich feathers. And when that they come to hand strokes, they set their king in the midst of them, clad with fine skins, and he will never departed from thence, until the battle be ended: Also if that they feel themselves to be the weaker sort, and that their king beginneth to flee, they will not fail to kill him, the which order the Persians and other barbarous nations in the East part observe at this day: their weapons of defence are bows and arrows made of wood envenomed, the which in stead of Iron heads are garnished at the end with bones of fishes or wild beasts, the which is very sharp. Some of them will eat their enemies, as the americans will do, of whom we have spoken. And although this people as we have before showed are Idolaters, nevertheless they believe the soul to be immortal. Also that there is a place appointed for the wicked, the which is a very cold land, and that the Gods permit that the sins of the wicked shall be punished. Also they believe, that there is an infinite numbered of people in the skies, and as many under the earth with many other follies, the which may better be compared to the transformations of ovid, than to any other thing. Furthermore, they believe these things to be true, as Turks and Arabians do that which is written in their Alcoran. This country toward the sea is not very fruitful, the people are very rustical more than those of Perou, or of America, for that they are traded with strangers. This land was named Florida, 
Why Florida was so named  in the year 1512. by those that first did discover it: for because that by the sea side it was flourishing with green trees, and with an infinite number of ●●cures of divers & sundry colours. Between this Florida, and the river of Palm, are to be seen divers kinds of monstrous and strange beasts, 
A wild bull.  among which there is a kind of great Bulls, having horns a foot long, and on the back a croupe like to a Camel, the hear long all about the body, having a dunnish colour. Of these beasts there were once two, that were brought quick into Spain, of one of the which I saw the skin, and not otherwise, and they lived there but a short time. This beast (as it is said) is perpetual enemy to the horse, & can not abide him to be by him. 
Caape of Baxe.  In Florida, toward the Caape of Baxe, there are certain little rivers, where as the wild men gather oysters, 
Oysters having pearls.  that have pearls. Now seeing that we are come to the gathering of oysters, I will not forget by what means they get out these pearls, as well in the east Indians, as in the West. Ye must note that every chief or head householder, having a great number of slaves, knowing not to what labour to set them about they send them together oysters, of the which they gather baskets full for their masters, putting them into certain great vessels, which being half full of water, is an occasion, that the oysters being conserved therein certain days do open, and the water cleansing them, leaveth these stones or pearls within these vessels. And to get them out they first take the oysters out of the vessel, and then they let the water out by a hole, under the which they lay a linen cloth, lest that with the water the stones or pearls that might be, should run out. As touching the figure of these Oysters, they differ much from ours, as well in colour as in shell, having each of them certain little holes, which would be thought to have been made artificially, in the which holes are these pearls. Thus much thought I good to speak of by the way, the like also are found at Perou, and certain other stones in good number: but the finest are found in the River of Palm, and in the river of Panuco, the which are distant the one from the other .32. leagues, but the christians have not liberty to get them, because that the wild men of that country, are not yet converted to our christian faith.  
Now therefore coasting Florida on the left hand, the wind being to us contrary, we sailed very near to Canada, and to an other country that is called Baccalos, which was against our wills, and to our great displeasure, because of the extreme cold that molested us the term of eighteen days, 
The country of Baccalos.  although that this land of Baccalos entereth far into the full sea in form of a point well-nigh two hundredth leagues on the north side distant from the line only forty eight degrees. 

The point of Baccales.  
Baccales, a fish.   This point was named Baccales, because of a certain fish that is found thereabout in the sea, which they name Baccales, between which and the Cape Delgado, there is divers islands peopled, very dangerous to aboard, because of the multitude of rocks that compass the said Islands, & they are called the islands of Cortes. 
The Islands of Cortes.  Some judge them not to be islands but main land, hanging upon the point of Baccalles. These places were first discovered by an Englishman named Sebastian Babat, 
A voyage by Sebastian Babat, Englishman.  who informed King Henry the seventh, that by that way he would sail into the country of Catia, towards the north, and that by this means he would find spices and other things as well as the King of Portugal did in the east Indies: Nevertheless his mind was to go to Perou, & America, for to people that country with Englishmen, but his purpose took no effect. True it is that he landed toward the coast of Ireland in the north .300. men where as because of the extreme cold the most part of his men died, though it were in the month of july. And since james Quartier a Briton made thither two voyages, as he himself showed me in the year .1530. and .1535.   

Of the land of Canada, before named Baccalos, being discovered in our time, and how the inhabitants live. Ca 75.  
FOr because that this country lying in the north was discovered in our time, 
A voyage made by Sebastian Babat and james Quartier into Canada.  first by Sebastian Babat an Englisheman, and then by james Quartier a Briton, being well seen in navigation, who took upon him the voyage at the commandment of the king of France, Francisce the first, I think it good therefore somewhat to write, the which seemeth to me most worthy to be noted: although that according to the order of our voyage homewards, it ought to go before the next Chapter. Moreover, that which moveth me so to do, is that I have not seen any that hath treated otherwise, although to my judgement the thing doth merit it, and that I have surely learned it of the said james Quartier. 
How the land of Canade lieth.  This land being almost under the Pole arctic, is joined toward the West to Florida, and to the Islands of Perou, and since is coasted by the west toward Baccalles, of which we have spoken. The which place I think be the same, that those which lately have discovered and named Canada, as it happeneth many times that some will give name to that which is out of others knowledge, the which toward the east extendeth to the sea called Hyperbores, 
Caape de Lorraine, or the land of Britons  & on the other side to a main land called Campestra de Berga, to the Southeast joining to this country. There is a Caape called Lorraine, otherwise by them that discovered it, the land of Britons, being near to new found land, having not in distance above ten or xij leagues between them. This new found land bordreth this high land, the which we have named Caape Lorraine, and towards the North-east between both lieth an Island, 
The lying of Caape de Lorraine.  which hath in compass about four leagues. The said land beginneth even at the said Caape towards the south, and extendeth east North-east, and west south-west, the most part thereof extending to the land of Florida, lying like an half circle, drawing toward Themistitan. Now to return to Caape Lorraine, of the which we have spoken, it lieth to the land towards the north, which is ranged with the sea Meditarium, as Italy between the sea Adriatic, and the sea Ligustike. And from the said Caape going towards the West, and west south-west, the shore is to be seen about two hundredth leagues, and all sandy and silte, without any port or haven. This region is inhabited with many people of an indifferent great stature, very malicious, having most commonly their faces disfigured & covered with vizards of red and blue, which colours they have of certain fruits: This land was discovered by james Quartier a Bryton, borne at S. Maloes, in the year .1535. At that time besides the number of ships that he had, for the performance of his voyage, with certain barks, some with .60. and 80. men a piece, he fought out this unknown country, until he came to a great & broad river, to the which they gave a name, in the which is found very good fish, chief Salmons, and that great plenty: then they traded into so many places adjacent with knives, hatchets, hooks and lines to fish with, and such like, for Hearts skins and skins of other wild beasts, whereof there is great store. The wild men of the country gave them good entertainment, showing themselves well affectioned towards them, and glad of their coming, knowledge and amity, and with their practice in bargaining with them. After this, they passing further, found other people, contrary to the first, as well in their language, as in their manner of living, 
Chelogua, a river.  the which people said that they came from the great river Chelogua, for to make war against their neighbours, which afterward was known of a truth by james Quartier, who took one of their skiffs with seven men, whereof he reserved twain, which he brought into France, and at his second voyage did carry them back again, and also they returned again, and were made Christians, & ended their lives in France. Moreover the said Quartier could not learn the manner of living of the first barbarians, neither what commodity is in their country and region, because that it was not before frequented nor traded.   

Of an other country of Canada. Cap. 76.  
AS touching the other part of this Region of Canada, 

another region of Canada found out by Quartier.  
The amiable manners of these Canadiens.   where as remain and inhabit the last wild men: It hath been since discovered beyond the said river. of Chelogua, being more than three or four hundredth leagues by the said Quartier, whereas he found the country well peopled, as well in his second as first Navigation: the people of that country is as obedient, and as amiable as is possible, & as familiar as though that always they had been brought up together without any sign of ill will, or any other rigour. And there the said Quartier made a certain hold or castle for to winter him and his, likewise for to defend them against the cold weather, the which there is very rigorous. He was very well entertained, considering the time & season: for the inhabitants brought them daily boats full of fish, as Eels, Lampreys and others: like wise flesh and venison, whereof there is great plenty. Also they are great hunters, be it either summer or winter with snares and otherwise: they use a kind of rackets set together, with cords of two foot and a half of length, and one foot broad, they were them on their feet in the frost and in the snow, 
A kind of rackets.  chief when they go to hunt wild beasts, to the end that in following of their chase their feet sink not into the snow. These people are clad with the skins of these wild beasts, being corried & trimmed according to their manner. 
The use of these rackets.  Now to take these beasts they will assemble ten or twelve together, being weponed with javelins or boar spears that are xv. or xuj foot long, and garnished at the end with the horn of some heart, or tooth of some other wild beast, the head whereof is at least a foot long, the which they use in stead of iron, and Bows and Arrows, garnished with the same. Then they follow the footing of the Dear, and other wild beasts in the Snow, 
How these Canadians do chase the dear & other wild beasts.  the which is common all the year long: and after that they have found out their train or footing, they will plant their branches of cedar which is green there all the year long, the which they plant in manner of nets, and there they will hide them being weaponed as before is showed, so that the dear seeing the green boughs, draw thitherward, and then they come forth, and cause the dear to quit and forsake that way, and enter into the deep snows even unto the belly, where as they can not easily run nor go: and so by this means they are taken and killed, and opened in the fields, and so being wrapped in his skin, they draw him to their houses. And after this sort they brought them to the castle or hold that james Quartier did keep both flesh and skin, selling them for no other recompense than knives hatchets, and other iron tools. Also I will not let pass one thing very singular, that is, when that these people are sick either of an ague, or any other inward disease, they take the leaves of a certain tree, which is like to a cedar, with the which they make a water that they drink, so that there is no disease, be it never so festered in a man's body, but that this drink will heal within xxiiij hours, which also Christians have tried, and have brought the plants thereof into this country.   

What religion these Canadians use with their living, and how they resist the cold. Ca 77.  
THese people in their living and governing do not far differ from the law of Nature, 
How these Canadians marry.  their matrimony is, that a man may have two or three wives without any other solemnity, as the Americans, of which we have already spoken. Of their Religion, they keep no mean, nor ceremony in worshipping or praying to God, saving that they contemplate, the new Moon, 
Osannaha.  called in their language Osannaha, saying that Andovagny doth so call it, and then causeth it to spread by little and little. Moreover, they do believe, that there is a Creator more greater than the Sun or the Moon, and that hath all under his power, and it is he whom they call Andovagny, and yet they neither know what way to invocate nor call upon, to pray to him, nor to worship him, although that in some parts of Canada, they worship Idols, 
Andovagny, a God of the Canadians.  and will have them sometimes in their lodgings above forty or fifty, the which was showed me of a truth by a Portugal pilot, the which did on a time visit two or three villages or hamlets with the lodgings of the inhabitants. They believe that the soul is immortal, 
The opinion of the Canadians as touching the immortality of the soul.  and that if a man do evil, when he is dead, a bird beareth away his soul: Contrariwise, if that they do well, the soul goeth into a place condecorate with goodly fair trees and flowers, where as there are birds singing melodiously: of the which the lord of the country of Canada did inform us, 
Donacova Aguanna, king of the Canadians.  being named Donacova Aguanna, who died in France a good Christian, and spoke good french, for he had been kept there four years. And for because that I will not be tedious in this history of these Canadians, ye shall note that these people universally are afflicted with continual cold, 
The extreme cold of the country of Canada.  because of the absence of the Sun, as ye may well understand, they inhabit in certain villages and hamlets, made like to half a circle, in greatness twenty or thirty paces, and ten of breadth, covered with barks of trees, & some with reeds. And God knoweth whether that the cold doth grieve them, 
The Canadians lodgings.  having such ill lodgings, ill covered, and worse holden up, so that many times the pillars with that which upholdeth the house, 
Why the people toward the north pole are more courageous and hardy than those toward the south  for the weight of the snow that most commonly lieth upon the house falleth down: yet notwithstanding this extreme cold, they are mighty strong and unreasonable great travailers. Also all the people that dwell north are the like some more and some less, even as those that dwell toward the Equinoctial and south pole, are contrary, because that the vehement heat of the air draweth out the natural heat, so that they are only hot without and cold within: the others have their natural heat enclosed, & provoked to keep in, because of the outward cold, 
A sea that is frozen.  which maketh them strong, stout and valiant: for the force and faculty of all the parts of the body, dependeth of this natural heat. The sea that is about this country is frozen, because that it is so far from the Sun, which from the east to the west, passeth through the midst of the world: And the greater that the natural heat is, the better is a man's appetite, and the better doth he brook and digest meats: so that these people towards the north eat more and have a better stomach than those in other parts: 
Oftentimes there is famine in Canada and why.  for the which cause oftentimes there is in Canada Famine: also for that their fruits, roots, and other things, wherewith they sustain them, is frozen the most part of the year, likewise their rivers. We have showed how that they cover their houses with barks of trees: also they make boats to fish in, both for the salt water and the fresh. Those of the land of Labrador their neighbours, 
The country of Labrador found out by the Spaniards.  the which land was discovered by the spaniards, thinking that by this coast they might find a way more nearer to sail to Moluques, whereas spices are in like manner subject to these colds, and they cover their lodgings with the skins of fishes and of wild beasts, as also do other Canadians. Furthermore the said Canadians live together in common as do the americans, 
How they labour the earth  and they labour and work each one that which he can do. Some make pots of earth, others platters, dishes, spoons, and other things of wood, others bows and arrows, baskets, panniers and other apparel of the skins that they do use to wear to cover them from the cold. The women they labour the earth, and turn it with certain instruments of stones made long: and they sow grain, specially Mill as great as peason, 
Mill.  and of divers colours, the which they plant as we do Melons & gourds, the stalk groweth like to Sugar Canes, bearing three or four ears, of which there is always one more great than the other, in manner like to our Artichokes. They plant also flat Beans, 
White beans.  as white as snow the which are very good, there are of that kind both in America, and in Perou. 
Cucumbers and how they use them.,  They have also good plenty of Cucumbers, the which the eat roasted in the embers as we do Pears and Wardens. Furthermore there is a little seed very small like to Marjoram seed, which bringeth forth an herb somewhat great. This herb is marvelously esteemed: also they dry it in the Sun, 
A kind of herb.  after that they have gathered a great quantity, and customably they hung it about their neck, being wrapped in leather with a kind of thorn, having a hole in one end, where as they put an end of this herb, 
The use of this herb in perfume.  being this dried, which after that they have rubbed it a little between their hands, they put it to the fire, & so receive the smoke by the other end of the horn into their mouths and they take thereof in such quantity, that it cometh forth both at the nose, and at the eyes. And after that sort they parfume them all hours in the day: The people of America, do perfume them after an other manner, as we have before showed.   

Of these Canadians apparel, how they wear their hair, and how their treat their children. Cap. 78.  
THese Canadians having much more civility than the inhabitants of America, 
The Canadians clothing.  know the mean how to cover and clothe themselves in beasts skins with their hair being trimmed after their manner, whereof we have here before spoken, peradventure being constrained because of the extreme cold, and not otherwise, which occasion being not showed to others that inhabit America, causeth them to remain naked without any shame one of an other. And yet the men of Canada, are not altogether clad, but only wrapped in these rough and hairy skins like to an apron for to cover the shamefast parts of nature, bringing it betwixt their legs, & buttoned with buttons, on both the thighs, & then they gird them with a broad girdle, which covereth all their body, and they have their arms and legs bare, saving that upon this they wear a long cloak with furred skins, sowed so well together, as if some master furrier or skinner of our country had thereto set his hand. Their cloaks are made of badger's skins Bears skins, Marterns, Panthers, Foxes, Hares, Rats, and Coneys, & other skins corryed after their manner with hair & all: which to my judgement hath caused this argument, that some think that the wild men are all hairy. 
The ancient Galls in the time of Hercules were like to wild people.  Some writers have set out that Hercules of Lybia, coming into France, found the people living almost like to the wild men that are as well in the east Indies, as in America, without any civility, & the men went almost all naked. Others were clad with beasts skins of divers colours. Such was the state and condition of the first humane kind, being at the first rude & altogether out of frame, until that by succession of time necessity hath constrained men to invent many things for the preservation and maintenance of their life. Well now the poor wild men wonder at our apparel, of what and how it is made, demanding what trees hear such things? as was demanded of me in America, thinking that wool did grow on trees, as doth their cotton: The use whereof was long time unknown: And as some writers do affirm, 
The use of wool, and by whom it was invented.  the first use thereof came from the Athenians, and by them it was first put in ure: others have attributed it to Pallas, for because that wool was used before that Athens was builded. For this cause the Athenians have greatly honoured and worshipped the goddess Pallas, for that they have received of her this great benefit. And by this may be known that the said Athenians and other people of Grecia, do cloth themselves with skins like to these Canadians, and to the similitude of our first parents Adam and Eve, as witnesseth Saint Hierom, leaving an example to all his posterity for to use the like, and not to go naked. For the which thing we can not give sufficient praise and thanks to God, the which of his providence far above all other parts of the world, hath showed favour to our Europe. Now there resteth to show how they wear their hair, the which is otherwise than the americans use. 
How these Canadiens wear their hair.  These people as well men as women have their hair black and very long: and they have this difference, that the men have their hair trussed on their heads like a horse tail, with certain pings of wood, that keepeth it trussed, having beside to cover their heads a Tiger's skin, or of a Bear, or some other wild beast: so that to see them attired after this sort, ye would judge them to be some stage players: for that they lohe more like to the picture of Hercules, that the ancient Romans were wont to make for their recreation and pleasure, and as he is set out now a days, than like any other thing: Others there are that cover their heads, and gird their bodies with marten sables, being so named by the name of the religion that is used in those parts, where as this beast frequenteth, the which Furs we esteem very precious and rich, because they are rare and scant, and therefore these skins with us are for princes and great lords to wear, for they are very scant. The Canadians have no beards no more than those of Bresseill, for they shave it of as soon as it buddeth. 
The clothing that the wives of Canada use to wear.  As touching the women, they are clad with Buck skins, being trimmed with the hair after their manner: and being therewith wrapped or covered they gird or bind themselves with a girdle, that goeth three or four times about, having always one arm and one pap or breast out of the skin at liberty the which skin covereth one of their shoulders, coming cross their bodies like a pilgrim's scrip. Moreover these women of Canada, wear hose of tawed leather, being well made after their manner, and painted or coloured with certain herbs or fruits after their manner, their shoes are after the same sort. They observe matrimony faithfully, 
How the Canadians marry  eschewing adultery, and hating it above all things. True it is, that these men have three or four wives, as we have before showed: the King of that country may have as many wives as he will, they name him Agahanna: 
Agahanna.  the maidens of that country are not hated because they have showed pleasure to young men before that they have been married (as they do in America, and therefore they have certain houses in their villages, where as the men and women meet, being separated from the young men & maidens. Women that are widows do never marry again, after the death of their husbands, but live in sorrow the rest of their life, and have their face all blacked with the dust of coals mingled with train oil, with their hair hanging all about their face, and not trussed up behind, as the others use: and after this sort they go even to their death. 
How they use their children.  As touching the usage of their young children, they wrap them in four or .v. marten skin's being sowed together, and then they have a certain hollow thing of wood which cometh between their legs without hurting them in which the child maketh water, & fileth, so that he never fileth nor toucheth his body, nor yet the skins that he is wrapped in. And this thing or gutter that is between their legs, is made of some tender and thin bark of a tree. If this people were nearer Turkey, I would think they had learned this of the Turks, 
A superstition used by the Turks.  or else that they had taught it them. I will neither say nor judge, that these wild men think it to be sin, that their children should wet them with their urine, as the superstitious nation of the Turks do, but rather for a civility that they have above others. And by this may be known how much these poor brutish people do excel others in honesty. They plant or set a plank of wood for the child because of the inferior extremity pointed into the earth, and the child shall stand or lie upright to sleep with his head hanging down.   

How these people make war. Cap. 79.  
AS these people seem almost to have like manners and usage, as other barbarous people have: 

The Canadians are warlike people.  
Toutaniens enemies to the Canadians.   also there is no nation more prompt & ready to make war one with another than they are, & that use their feats of war most likest unto them, only certain things excepted. The Toutaniens, the Guadelphes, and Chicorins, make war commonly against the Canadians, 
Of Ochelagua and Seguana.  and other strange people that descend from the great river of Ochelagua and Saguena, which Rivers are very fair and great, bearing very good fish, and that great plenty. Also by these rivers ye may enter above three hundredth leagues into the country, and also into the land of their enemies with small boats, because of the rocks. And the old people of the country say, 
How they prepare them to make war.  that they which were minded to follow these two rivers, they should in a few moons (for so they do reckon) find divers kinds of people, and abundance of gold and silver: besides this, these two Rivers being separated the one from the other, they meet and join together in one place, and being thus together they enter far into new Spain, for they border one another as France doth and Italy. And therefore when that they have war in Canada, their great Agahanna, which is as much to say, their King or Lord doth command all other Lords under his authority, for every village hath his superior, that they make them ready to come before him in their best array, with men, victuals and munitions of war, as their custom and manner is to do: and then every one will make themselves ready to obey their lords commandment: and so they will come together on the water with their little barks and skiffs, made of the barks of trees, as they do in America, 
These Canadiens use feats and policy in their war.  and in other places. Then the assembly being made, they go to seek their enemies: and when they know that they shall meet them, they put themselves in array to give the onset, in as good order as is possible, with many feats and policies, according to their custom. If that they tarry at home for their enemies, they fortify their lodgings with certain pieces of wood, faggots and branches, being daubed or smeared with the grease of a Seawoulf, or with some other poison, to the end that they may poison their enemies, if that they come near, the which they set on fire, from the which proceedeth such a thick black and dangerous smoke to smell on, because of the extreme stink, that it killeth those that smell it, and besides this it so blindeth their enemies, that they cannot see one another. And they use such a policy with this smoke, 
Another policy  that what wind so ever bloweth, they will cause it to fly towards their enemies. Likewise they use to make fishes of the leaves of certain trees and of herbs, the which being dried in the Sun, they mingle amongst these faggots and branches, than they set fire thereon, when that they see their enemies coming a far of. After this sorts they did defend themselves against the first Christians that discovered their land, doing their good wills with certain of the foresaid grease to set fire on their ships: but they were informed of this enterprise, and therefore they gave such order that the Canadians were prevented. Nevertheless as I was informed, these poor wild men had not conspired this enterprise, but justly and in a good quarrel, considering the wrong, that they had first received of others. For our men being descended a land some young men among them for their pleasure, most wicked and foolish, using themselves more liker Tyrants than Christians, did cut of both Arms and Legs of some of these poor people, because that they would prove whether their sword would cut well or no: And yet the poor people received them gently. And for this occasion they have not permitted since any Christian there to aboard nor set foot on land, neither yet to trade or traffic as by experience hath been known. Now to our purpose: these Canadians set forward in the war four and four, 
How these Canadians march in the war.  and when they are ready to join battle, they make a great noise with exclamations and other fantasies, even like to the Amazons, of which we have spoken, for to give fear and dread to their enemies, they carry many standards made of branches, being decked with Pennons and Swans feathers. 
A kind of Drums that they use.  Their drums are of certain skins being borne of two men, and one cometh behind and layeth on with two sticks, as hard as he can, their flutes are made of the shank bones of a buck, or some other wild beast. And after this sort the Canadians fight, 
How they use to fight.  with Bows and Arrows, round Clubs of wood, four square staves, Lances, Morispikes, and others, the which are headed with bones in stead of Iron & steel. They use also targets, & some of them use to have and wear a coif made of a thick bears skin for the defence of their heads, 
How our elders in times past used to fight.  ye shall note that the elders in times past used as the wild men do to fight with their fists, spurn with their feet, to bite with their teeth & to pull one another by the hair with such like. And since they used stones in their fight, the which they threw one at another, 
Heroditus.  as it appeareth in the holy Bible. Furthermore Heroditus, in his first book speaking of certain people, 

Virgins used to fight one with another at the feasts of the Goddess Minerva.  
Diodorus. The Ancient custom of the men of Thebes & Lacedæmonians in fight.   that fought with staves and Clubs, saith that the Virgins of that country had a custom to fight every year with stones and staves one against the other, in honour of the Goddess Minerva, on that day that was celebrated to her. Also Diodorus in his first book sayeth, that clubs and Lions skins were good for Hercules to fight with, for before that time other Armours was not used. Who so ever will read Plutarch, justinus and other Authors, shall find that the Ancient Romans did fight naked: the men of Thebes and the Lacedæmonians, did revenge themselves of their enemies with staves & clubs of wood. And ye shall note that the people were then as hardy as they are at this day, and yet they were naked, having no more clothing than the Canadians have of their skins, and they are also destitute and know not the feats & policies of war, with the which these Canadians can shift and help themselves. Well these people of Canada, 
How these Canadians treat their enemies.  do not with their enemies as the Americans do, the which eat them (but that which is much more tolerable) but if that they take any of their enemies or otherwise remain victors, they pull the skin quite over their ears and then dry it, and so they carry it into their country, showing it with great glory to their wives, friends and old people, which for age cannot go to the wars in sign of victory. To conclude, they are not so prone to make war, as those people of Perou and Bressill, peradventure because of the difficulty that the frost and snow causeth, with inconveniences that they have in those parts.   

Of Mynes, precious Stones, and other secrets that are found in Canada. Cap. 80.  
THe land and country of Canada, 
The goodness of the country of Canada.  is fair and under a good climate, and very good of itself, excepting the untemperateness of the air, the which doth hurt it as ye may easily conjecture, it beareth many trees and fruits, the which we know not with us. Among the which there is one tree of the greatness and like to one of our great nut trees that we have, the which hath remained a great time unprofitable and not known, until such time that one by chance cut him, and then there ran forth a juice, the which was found to have so good taste and as pleasant, as the best wine in France: 
The juice of a tree having a taste like good wine.  also it was so judged by our men that then tasted thereof, even the Captain with certain Gentlemen of his company, and at that time they gathered of the said juice above five or six pots full. Therefore judge you if that the Canadians since that time have not made great store thereof, seeing that it is so good and excellent to drink. This tree in their language is called Cotton. 
Cotton a tree. Natural vine roots in Canada.  Also there is another almost uncredible to those that have not seen it. There is found in Canada, many places and countries that bear very good wines, even of their own nature, growing out of the earth, without man's labour, bearing great quantity of Grapes, fair great and good for to eat, but yet I know not whether that the wine be good or no. It is not to be doubted, but that those that first did discover this land, found these things very strange. In this country is goodly hills and valleys, 
Stones like in colour to a mine of gold.  and in these high hills and mountains be found certain stones, being in weight and colour like a gold mine, but when it was tried, it was found good, for it broke & turned into ashes. It is not unpossible, but that in those places may be found mines, as good and as perfect, as those of Perou, if that the ground were undermined. As touching mines of Iron and Brass, 
mines of Iron, and mines of Brass.  there are store. Moreover there are stones made and fashioned like to a Diamond, whereof there are some in the valleys, and others in the hills. They which first found them, thought to have been made rich for ever, thinking that they were perfect Diamonds, whereof they brought home a great number. 
Diamonds of Canada. A Proverb.  And from thence came this proverb or common word, (it is a Diamond of Canada) it is like to the Diamonds of Calicut, and of the east Indies. Some say that these Diamonds are a kind of fine Crystal, of the which I can give no other conclusion, 
Opinions on the creation of Crystal.  but to say as Pliny sayeth, that Crystal proceedeth of Snow and water, that is exceedingly frozen, therefore in those places that are subject to frost and snow, it may be made that some part thereof by process of time converteth, and turneth like to Crystal. Solon, 
Solon.  thinketh this opinion to be false, that Crystal should not engender of snow, for if it were so, it should be found only in cold places as in Canada, and in other cold countries, but the experience showeth the contrary as appeareth in the Island of Cypris, Rhodes, and in many places of Egypt, and of Graecia, as I myself have seen when I was there, that there was found, and is found at this present great plenty of Crystal, by the which argument we may judge, that Crystal cometh not of frozen water, considering that in those countries of which we speak, the heat is more vehement (yea without comparison) than in Canada, which country as afflicted with continual cold. Diodorus saith, 
Diodorus Crystal of Canada.  that Crystal is engendered of pure water, and not frozen together by cold, but rather dried by vehement heat. Notwithstanding the Crystal of Canada, is more resplendent and more finer than that of Cypris and other places. In times past the Emperors of Rome did greatly esteem fine Crystal, 
How greatly Crystal was esteemed in times passed of the Ancient Emperors of Rome, and to what use it was put.  and therewith caused their vessels to be made wherein they did eat. Others made therewith similitudes the which they kept closed in their closerts and treasuries. Likewise the Kings of egypt, in those dares when the great City of Thebes flourished, did beautify their sepulters with fine Crystal, the which was brought from Armenia the great, and from the coast of Syria, and of Crystal was the pictures and images of Kings made to their likeness, for to remain as they thought and to be in perpetual memory. By this ye may see how much Crystal hath been esteemed, and to what use it was employed. And now a days it is bestowed to make cups & vessels, a thing greatly esteemed, if that it were not so weak. To conclude, 
jasper stones & Cassidonies.  in Canada is found great store of jasper stone and Cassidonies.   

Of Earthquakes and hails to the which this country of Canada is very subject. Cap. 81.  
THis Region of Canada is greatly subject to earthquakes and to hails, 
The country of Canada is subject to earthquakes, & why.  and therefore these poor people being ignorant of natural things, yea much more of heavenvly things, are greatly afraid, although that these things are common, they think that these things proceed from their Gods, for that they have offended them. Notwithstanding, earthquakes cometh not but of winds that are shut in in certain crasses of the earth, the which by great power causeth it to shake, as in like manner it causeth many times great trees to shake, yea and bloweth them up by the roots, of the which Aristotle doth show. As touching hail, 
Hail rife in Canada.  it is not to be marvel though it be rife because of the untemperateness and unconstancy of the air, being very cold in this Region, because of the distance of the Sun, the which cometh no nearer than when it cometh to our Tropic. And therefore the water that falleth from the Firmament is always frozen, because that the air is always cold, and therefore it is always hail or snow. Now these Canadians when that they feel such incommodities, for the affliction that they receive, they keep themselves in their houses with certain domestical beasts that they nourish. And there they make their moan to their Idols; whose form and likeness is not much unlike to the fabulous picture of Melusin of Lusignam, being half a Serpent and half a Woman: for the head of their Idol with her hair representeth according to their brutish manner a woman. And the rest of their body is like to a Serpent. The which may cause Poets to feign that Melusin was their Goddess. The earthquakes be dangerous, although the case be evident. 
Earthquakes are dangerous. The opinion of some Philosophers as touching earthquakes.  Seeing that we are come to speak of earthquakes, we will show thereof one word, according to the opinion of natural Philosophers, with the inconveniences that follow. Thales Milesius, one of the seven wise men of Grecia, said that water was the beginning of all things, and that the earth floating in the midst of this water was in a continual quaking, sometimes more, and sometimes less. Of this same opinion was Democrites, and said furthermore, that the water under the earth being burst out by rain, could not because of his excess quantity, be contained in the veins and compass of the earth, but caused these earthquakes, and of this proceedeth the Springs and Fountains that we have. Anaxagoras said, it was fire the which coveting (as it is his nature) to rise high and to join with the fire Elementary, causeth not only this quaking, but certain openings, gulfs, and such like in the earth, as we may see in certa yne places, and confirmed his opinion in that the earth burneth in certain places. Anaximines' doth affirm the earth itself to be the cause of this quaking, the which being opened because of the excessive heat of the Sun, the air entereth in great quantity, and with violence, the which after that the earth is closed again, hath no issue: And by this means the belly of the earth beginneth to move, & this causeth the earthquake. 
What the wind ●●.  The which seemeth more to agree with reason and truth than the others, according as we have following Aristotle, also that the wind is no other thing than an air that riseth rangingly. But leaving these opinions of natural causes and of earthquakes the which may come by other reasons only by the permission of the most highest unknown to us. 
The inconveniences that follow earthquakes.  The inconueniens and mishaps, that come thereby, is overwhelming of Towns and Cities as happened in Asia, of seven Cities in the time of Tiberius Caesar, and of the Metropolitan City of Bithinie, during the reign of Constantinus. Many also have been swallowed up by the earth, and others drowned with waters, as was Elicea and Aura at the ports of Corinth. And for to be short, this earthquake cometh sometimes with such vehemence that beside the inconveniences afore showed, it maketh Islands of main land, as it hath done Sicily, with certain places in Syria and others, it joineth sometimes Islands to main land, as Pliny saith, to be happened of those of Doromscia parva, in millites. In Africa many plains and valleys are at this day turned to lakes and rivers. 
Seneca.  Also Seneca showeth that a flock above five hundredth Sheep and other beasts and fowls were on a time swallowed up and lost by an earthquake. And for this reason the most part keep them by the rivers sides for to eschew this earthquake, being taught by experience and not by reason, that marish ground and wet places, are not so subject to earthquakes, as the main and the hyelande, and therefore this reason is very easy to those that understand the occasion of the earthquakes before alleged. And for this cause the rich and renowned temple of Diana in Ephesus, the which continued more than two hundredth years, being so strongly edified that it meriteth to be in the number of one of the spectacles of the world, 
Why the Temple of Diana was edified on a marish ground.  was set on piles of wood in a marish place, for because that it should not be subject to Earthquakes, until such time as one helvidius, or as some term him Eratosthenes, being foolishly minded, for because that he would be known, and that his memorial might be showed, did set it on fire, and consumed it to ashes. Also for this cause the Romans had edified a Temple to Hercules, by the river of Tiber, and there they did pray and offer sacrifices. 
Earthquakes in Canada very violent.  Now this earthquake is so vehement and contagious in Canada, that within .v. or uj leagues of their houses within the Country, there shall be found more than two thousand trees overthrown to the earth, as well on hills as on valleys, rocks overthrown one upon an other, the ground to sink and to be swallowed up, and all this happeneth not, but of moving and stirring of the earth. The like may happen to other Countries that are subject to earthquakes. Thus much thought I good to speak of earthquakes, without straying far from our matter.   

Of the Country called New found land. Cap. 82.  
AFter that we were departed from the height of the gulf of Canada, it behoved us to pass further, keeping our course right North, leaving the land of Labrador, and the islands called the islands of Devils, 

The islands of Devils.  
Cape de Marco New found land a very cold country.   and the Cape of Marco distant from the line .56. degrees, we coasted on the left hand the Country that is named New found land, the which is very cold, and therefore those that did first find it out, made there no long abiding, nor those neither that go thither oftentimes for fish. This new found land is a region, that is one of the farthest parts of Canada, and in the same land there is found a river, the which because of his breadth and length seemeth to be almost a Sea, and it is named the river of the three brethren, being distant from the islands of Essores four hundredth leagues, and from France nine hundredth: it separateth the Province of Canada from this New found land. Some judge it to be a narrow Sea, like that of Magellan, by the which ye may enter from the West sea, to the South sea. Gemafrigius, although he was expert in Mathematic, hath herein failed & erred, for he maketh us believe, that this River of which we speak is a strait, the which is named Septentrional, and so hath he set it out in his Mappa Mundi. If that which he hath written be true, in vain then have the Portugeses been, and Spaniards to seek a new strait distant from this, above .3000. leagues, for to enter into the South sea, to go to the islands of Moluques, where as the spices are. This Country of New found land is inhabited with barbarous men, being clothed in wild beasts skins, as are those of Canada: this people is very froward and untractable, as our men can well testify that go thither every year a fishing. They that dwell by the Sea, live with little kind of other meat than fish, which they take in the sea, whereof they take a great multitude, 
Oil of the fat of fish.  & chief sea Wolves, of which they eat the flesh, which is very good. With the fat of this fish, they make a certain Oil, that after it is come to his perfection, hath a red colour, which they drink at their tables as we do wine or beer. Of the skin of this fish which is strong and thick, as if it were of some wild beasts, they make cloaks & garments according to their manner, which is a marvelous thing, that in a element so moist as that is, which is moist of itself, can be nourished a beast or fish, that hath the skin hard and dry, as beasts of the earth have. Likewise they have other fishes that have hard skins, as the Grampas & the Dog fish and others with strong shells, as Torterels, Oysters, Muscles, & such like. Besides this, they have great plenty of other good fish both small and great, of which they live daily. I marvel that the jews, Turks, 
The superstition of divers nations in Levant.  Greeks, & many other nations in the East eat no Dolphins nor of many other kind of fishes, that are without shell, as well in the sea as in fresh waters, which maketh me to judge that these people are more wiser & better advised to find the taste in meats more delicate, than whereas are Turks, Arabians, and other superstitious people. In those parts there is also found Whales, (I mean in the hie sea, for such fish never cometh toward the shore) to live with such little fish. Notwithstanding, 
With what fish the Whale liveth.  the fish that the Whale doth most commonly eat, is no greater than a carp, a thing almost uncredible considering her greatness, the reason thereof as some say, is for because that the whale hath but a little throat in comparison of the greatness of his body, & therefore he cannot devour a greater fish. The which is a wonderful secret, & unknown as well to our elders as to us, although that they have treated of fishes, the female hath but one young one at a time, which she bringeth forth as a beast of the earth without egg, & that which is more wondered, she giveth suck to her young one after that she hath brought it forth. And therefore she hath two rothers under her belly under the navel, which no other fish hath, neither in the sea nor in fresh water, but only the sea Wolf, as witnesseth Pliny. 
Pliny showeth that a Whale is dangerous on the sea to mete.  This whale is dangerous to meet on the sea, as the Bayones can well tell by experience, for they use to take them. To the purpose, ye shall note when that we were in America, some merchants ship that passed from one land to another for merchandise was overthrown, & all that was within her lost by a whale that touched her with her tail. In the same place whereas the Whale frequenteth, 
A fish that is perpetual enemy to the Whale.  there is found most commonly a fish that is his mortal enemy, so that if she meet the Whale, she will prick the whale under the belly, which is the softest and tenderest place, with her tongue that cutteth like a barbers razor, so that he being thus hurt, cannot save himself, but that he dieth as the inhabitants of New found land do show, and the common fisher men. In this Sea of New found land, there is a kind of fish that the people of the country call Hehec, 
Hehec a fish.  having a bill like a Popengay, and other fishes with shell. There is found in the same place great store of Dolphins, that show themselves many times above water, leaping and floating; the which some judge to be foreshowings of tempests and fowl weather, from the part or coast that they come from, 
foreshowings of tempests. Isidorus.  as Pliny showeth, & Isidorus in his Etymologies, which I have also known by experience, the which is more surer than the witnessing either of Pliny or of any other. Some have written that there is fine kinds of signs and forth wings of tempests and storms on the Sea, as Polybius being with Scipio Aemilian in Africa. Furthermore, there are great plenty of great muscles: and as for beasts of the earth, there are a great number very wild and dangerous, 
Strange beasts.  as great Bears, the which are almost all white, and besides beasts, there are fowls of the air, of which the feathers are all white, the which I think happeneth because of the extreme coldness of the Country: but these Bears which I spoke of, are day and night about the houses of this people, for to devour their Oil and Fish. As touching these Bears, although that we have treated thereof at large in our cosmography of Levant, yet notwithstanding we will speak somewhat thereof by the way, how the inhabitants of the Country take them, being afflicted with the importunity that they make them. Therefore they make certain pits in the ground very deep, near to trees and rocks, and then they cover them finely with leaves and branches, and this they use where as are hives or multitude of honey Bees, which these Bears seek and follow with all diligence, & thereof they are very desirous, not only so much for to fill them therewith, but for to heal their eyes, the which they have naturally blemished and all their brain: also that being stinged with these Honey Bees, there falleth from them a blood, specially from the head, whereby their pain is eased, so that they are comforted thereby. There is also seen a kind of great beasts like to Buffles, having horns very great, their skin is grayish, of which they make garments, and of many other beasts, whose skins are very rich. This Country is full of hills and mountains, and very barren, as well for because of the untemperateness of the air, as of the condition of the land smally inhabited, and ill tilled. As for birds, there are not found such quantity as in America, or at Perou, nor yet so fair. There are two kind of Eagles, of which the one kind keepeth the waters, and liveth only with fish, 
Two kinds of Eagles.  chief with shell fish, the which she taketh up, and flieth into the air, and so letteth it fall, and breaketh it, for to get the fish out: this Eagle maketh her nest in great high trees by the sea side. Also in this Country there is many fair rivers, and a multitude of good fish. This people prepareth for nothing, but that which is needful to sustain nature, so that they are not curious in meats, for they go not to seek any thing in far Countries, and yet their nourishment is healthsome, and therefore they know not what sickness means, but they live in peace and in continual health, so that they have no occasion to conceive envy one against an other, because of their goods and patrimony: for they are in a manner all equal in goods and riches, being in one mutual contentation and equalness in poverty. Also they have no place ordained for to minister justice, for because that among them, they do nothing worthy of reprehension. They have no laws no more than the worthy americans & other people, but only the law of nature. The people that dwell toward the sea as I have showed live with fish, and others that are far from the sea, are content with fruits of the earth that cometh forth, the most part without labour of man's hands: and after this sort lived the people in the first age as Pliny witnesseth: 

In his xuj book of his natural history.  
Virgil Forestof Dodona.   also we see in our days how the earth bringeth forth fruit without labour. Virgil showeth that the Forest Dodana began to die because of his age, or else for because that it could not satisfy the multitude of people that then did multiply, and therefore they began to labour and till the earth, for to receive the fruits thereof for the sustainment of their lives, so that they began husbandry. 
How the men of New found land do war.  Moreover these people make not war unless that their enemies come to seek them, & then they put them all to defence like to the Canadians, their instruments that give men courage to fight, are beasts skins spread in manner of a circle, which serveth them in stead of drums, with flutes of bones of Dear like to the Canadians, if that they perceive their enemies a far of, they will prepare to fight with their armours and weapons which are bows and arrows. And before that they enter into battle, their principal guide the which they honour as a King, shall go the first, being armed with fair skins and feathers, sitting on the shoulders of two mighty men, to the end that every one should see him, and know him also to be ready to obey him, what so ever he shall command. And when they obtain victory, he shall lack no honour, & so they return joyful to their houses with their banners displayed, 
Strange bamners.  which are branches of trees garnished with feathers of swans wavering in the air, and bearing the skin of the face of their enemies spread in little circles in token of victory.   

Of the islands of Essores. Cap. 83.  
THere resteth now nothing of all our voyage, 
The Islands of Essores why it is so named & feared of the Navigantes.  but to speak of certain islands that they call Essores, which we coasted on the right hand, not without great danger of shipwreck. For three or four degrees beyond, and on this side there bloweth always a wind so cold & contagious, that for this respect it is feared of the Pilots & Navigants, as the most dangerous place that is in the voyage, be it to go either to the Indies or to America: by this ye may know that the Sea in those parts are never calm, but always rough & grown, as we see many times the wind to blow up the dust into the air, the which we call a tempest or fowl weather, which is as well upon the land as on the sea, for in the one and the other, it riseth like a point of fire that raiseth the water of a height when it plaweth or boileth, as I have many times seen. And therefore it seemeth that the wind hath a moving upward like a whirl wind of which I have spoken in an other place. For this cause these islands were so named, because of the great Essor that causeth this wind in the said islands, 
Essores.  for Essores is as much to say, to dry or to wipe clean. These islands are distant from France, about ten degrees and a half, and they are ix in number, of which the best of them are inhabited with Christians Portugal's, 
The fruitfulness of the islands of Essores.  whether as they did send many slaves for to labour the ground, the which by their great pain and diligence they have made fruitful with all good fruits necessary for man's sustenance, chief with wheat, the which groweth there so plentifully, that therewith all the land of Portugal is furnished. The which they transport in their ships, with many good fruits, as well naturally of the Country, as other where: but there is one amongst others, named Hyrcy, 
Hyrcy.  the plant whereof was brought from the Indies, for there was none thereof found before, even as in the Canaries. Likewise in our Europe, before they began to labour the earth, to plant and to sow divers kinds of fruits men were contented only with that the earth brought forth of his nature, having then to drink nothing but clear water, and for their clothing the barks and leaves of trees with certain skins of beasts, as we have already showed. In the which we may clearly see a wonderful providence of our God, the which hath placed in the sea great quantity of islands both little and great, which doth abide and sustain the brunt of the waves of the sea, that goeth not beyond their compass or limits, neither hurteth the inhabitants: for the Lord as the Prophet saith, hath appointed his limits, the which he doth not overpass. Of these islands, some are inhabited that before were desert, and many are forsaken, that in times past were inhabited and peopled, as we see hath happened to many Cities and Towns of the Empire of Greece, Trapezande and Egypt, such is the ordinance of God, that things here in earth shall not be perdurable, but subject to changing. The which being considered of our Cosmographers in our days, they have added to the Tables of Ptolomeus new matters of our time, for since the time and knowledge that he hath written, there hath happened many new things. Now these islands of Essores; were desert, before that the Portingalls knew them. Nevertheless they were full of woods of all sorts, among the which is found a kind of Cedar named in their speech Orcantine, 
Orcantine a kind of Cedar.  with the which they make fine karued works, as tables, coffers and many vessels for the Sea. This wood hath a very good smell, and will not rot neither be worm eaten, be it dry or wet as other wood wil Of the which also Pliny speaketh, 
Plynie.  that in his time was found at Rome, in an old Sepulchre certain books of Philosophy between two stones within a little chest made of Ceader wood, the which had been under the ground above five hundredth years. 
A chest of Cedar.  Furthermore, I remember that I have read in times past, that Alexander the great, passing into the Island of Tabroban, found a ship of Cedar wood on the borders or coast of the sea, 
A ship of Cedar.  whereas it had remained above two hundredth years without rotting. And thereof this proverb in Latin came (Digna Cedro.) 
A Proverb.  These Ceders are not so high neither of such a savour as those that are in the strait of Magellan, although it be of the same highness as are these islands of Essores. Likewise there is found many other trees small & great, bearing fair fruit, chief in the best & most notable Island, the which they have named the Island of S. Michael, 
The Island of S. Michael.  and it is the best peopled. In this Island there is a very fair town lately builded with a castle, where as the ships aswell of Spain as Portugal, at their return from the Indies do harbour, before that they sail home into their countries. In one of these islands there is a hill or mountain almost as high as that of Teneryf, of which we have spoken, where as groweth great plenty of Pastel▪ of Sugar, and some wine, there is no ravening beasts to be found, but there is certain wild Goats & many fowls in the woods. From the height of these trees it behoved us to sail forward, until we came to the Caape Finistra, 
Cape Fynistra.  on the coast of Spain, where as we landed very late for to recover victuals, whereof we had great need for to sustain us, until that we arrived into britain, which is a country under the power and obedience of France.  

The Author's conclusion.  Here have I loving readers, showed the discourse of this may far and long voyage to the Ponent, the which I have set forth as well as God hath given me grace, for that I would not be found unprofitable, neither that this my enterprise should be in vain, peradventure not so eloquently, as your delicate ears and ripe judgement doth require. Therefore seeing that it hath not been the pleasure of God, that I should bestow my youth in learning, nor to obtain so much perfection as others, but rather in navigation, I most hearty beseech you to excuse me. In the mean time if that it please you to take in good part this present work, the which I have gathered together being in the tempests and other discommodities of the sea, you shall encourage me, after that I have rested myself, and reconciled my spirits, which are as scattered here and there, to set forth more fully and at large the lying and distance of places, the which I have observed by eye as well in Levant, 
The Author's Cards, containing the lying & distances of places.  as in the Ponent, and in the South, the which I hope to show you by eye, & represent by lively figures besides the Card Marins, the which to speak the truth, without offence or hurt of any man, do err and fail in many things, whether it be the fault of those that prick them or set them out, I leave you to judge. Furthermore, as it is uneasy so is it also unpossible for any one justly to represent the most notable places their lyengs, and distances, without having seen them, the which is the surest knowledge of all, as all men may well judge and understand.  
By this ye may see how long time we have been ignorant of many countries, as well islands as main lands, believing only that, which our Elders had set forth, until that since of late years men have jeoparded themselves in the Navigation: So that now all our hemisphery is discovered and found inhabited: of the which Ptolomeus, and others knew not the half.  
FINIS.   

¶ The Table of the Chapters of this present Book.  

HOw the Author took shipping. cap. 1  
Of the strait auncienly named Calpe, and now Gebaltary. cap. 2  
Of Africa generally. cap. 3  
Of Africa particularly. ca 4  
Of the fortunate islands, now called the Canaries. ca 5  
Of the high mountain of Pike properly called Pike hill. ca 6  
Of the isle of Iron. cap. 7  
Of the islands of Madera. ca 8  
Of the wine of Madera. ca 9  
Of the promontory Verd, and of his islands. cap. 10  
Of the wine of Palm trees. cap. 11  
Of the Rivers of Senega. ca 12  
Of the islands Hesperideses otherwise named Caape Verd. cap. 13  
Of Torterells and of an herb that they call Orseilla. ca 14  
Of the Island of Fire. cap. 15  
Of Ethiopa. cap. 16  
Of Gynney. cap. 17  
Of the Equinoctial line, and of the Islands of S. Homer. cap. 18  
That not only all that is unto the line is inhabited, but also all the world is inhabited, contrary to the opinion of our Elders. cap. 19  
Of the multitude and divers kinds of fishes being under this line Equinoctial. ca 20  
Of an Island named the Ascension. cap. 21  
Of the promontory of good hope and of many secrets observed in the same, likewise our arrival to the Indians of America, or France Antarctic. cap. 22  
Of the Island of Madagascar otherwise named S. Laurence. cap. 23  
Of our arrival to France Antarctic otherwise named America, to the place named Caape de Fria. cap. 24  
Of the river of Ganabara, otherwise named janaria & how the land where we arrived was named France Antarctic. cap. 25  
Of the fish that is in this great river before named. ca 26  
Of America generally. cap. 27  
Of the Religion of these Americans. cap. 28  
The manner and custom of living of these Americans, aswell men as women. cap. 29  
Of their eating and drinking cap. 30  
Against the opinion of those that think the wild men to be hairy. cap. 31  
Of a tree named Genipat in the American tongue, with the which they make colours. cap. 32  
Of a tree named Paquover. cap. 33  
How these Americans or wild men do difforme themselves, esteeming it a great glory. cap. 34  
Of visions, dreams and dellusions that these Americans have, and of the persecution that they receive of wicked spirits. cap. 35  
Of false Prophets and Magicians that are in this country of America, the which invocate and call upon wicked spirits, and of a tree named Ahovai. cap. 36  
How these Americans believe the soul to be immortal. cap. 37  
How these wild make war one against another, specially against those whom they name Margageas Thabaiares. Also of a tree which they name Hairy, of the which they make their weapons for war. cap. 38  
Their manner of fight aswell on the land as on the water. cap. 39  
How these barbarous and wild men put their enemies to death that they have taken in the wars, and how they eat them. cap. 40  
how these wild men covet greatly to revenge their harms and injuries. cap. 41  
How these wild men of America are married. cap. 42  
Of the ceremonies, burial, and funerals that they use to the deceased. cap. 43  
Of Mortugabes, and of the charity that they use towards strangers. cap. 44  
The description of a sickness named Pians, to the which are subject those people of America, as well in the Ilan●des as the main land. cap. 45  
Of the Diseases most rife in America, and the mean that they observe to cure them. cap. 46  
The manner how to trade among these people: of a bird named Toucan, & of the Spicery of that country. cap. 47  
Of birds most common in America. ca 48  
Of Venison and wild beasts that these wild men take. cap. 49  
Of a tree named Havorahe. cap. 50  
Of a tree named Vhebehafou and of the honey Bees that frequent it. cap. 51  
Of a strange beast named Haute. cap. 52  
How these Americans kindle fire, of their opinion of the world, and of their Iron works. cap. 53  
Of the river of Vases, likewise of certain beasts that are found there about. And of the land named Morpion. 54  
Of the river of Platte, and of the country adjacent. ca 55  
Of the strait of Magellan, and of Daryen. ca 56  
How that those that inhabit from the river of Platte unto the strait of Magellan are our Antipodes. cap. 57  
How these wild men exercise husbandry, and make gardens of a root named Manihot, and of a tree that they name Penoabsou. ca 58  
How and after what sort the land of America was discovered, and Brassyll wood found out, with many other trees not seen else where, but in that country. cap. 59  
Of our departing from France Antartik or America. ca 60  
Of the Cannibals, aswell of the main land as of the islands, & of a tree named Acaiou. cap. 61  
Of the river of Amazons, otherwise named Aurelana, by the which ye may fail into the country of Amazons and into France Antertike. cap. 62  
How certain Spaniards arrived into a country where they found Amazons. ca 63  
How these Spaniards continued their voyadge to Morpion, and of the river of Platte. cap. 64  
How the lands of the kings of Spain and of Portugal are separated. cap. 65  
The division of the West Indies in three parts cap. 66  
Of the Island of Rats. cap. 67  
How we continued our course w●●h a declaration of Astrolabia of the Sea. cap. 68  
Of the departing of our Equator or Equinoctial. cap. 69  
Of Perou and of the principal places contained in the same. cap. 70  
Of the Islands of Perou, and chief of the Spanish Island cap. 71  
Of the islands of Cuba, and of Lucaia. cap. 72  
A description of Nova Espania, and of the great city of Themestitan, edified in the west Indies. cap. 73  
Of Florida. cap. 74  
Of the Island of Canada before named Baccalos, being discovered in our time, and how the inhabitans live. cap. 75  
Of another country of Canade. cap. 76  
What Religion these Canadians use, with their living & how they resist the Cold. cap. 77  
Of these Canadians apparel, how they wear their hair, and how they treat their children. cap. 78  
How these people make war. cap. 79  
Of mines, precious stones & other secrets that are found in Canada. cap. 80  
Of Earthequakes & hails, to the which the country of Canada is very subject. ca 81  
Of the country called New found land. cap. 82  
Of the islands of Essores. ca 83    

¶ Imprinted at London, in Knightrider street, by Henry Bynneman, for Thomas Hacket. 1568.